GPSMAP ®

8400/8600/8700/9000/9500 SERIES
Owner’s Manual
© 2019 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Garmin. Garmin reserves the right to change
or improve its products and to make changes in the content of this manual without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements. Go to
www.garmin.com for current updates and supplemental information concerning the use of this product.
Garmin , the Garmin logo, ActiveCaptain , ANT , Fusion , GPSMAP , inReach , and VIRB are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, registered in the USA and other
® ® ® ® ® ® ®

countries. ActiveCaptain , Connect IQ™, ECHOMAP™, GMR Fantom™, Garmin BlueNet™, Garmin ClearVü™, Garmin Connect™, Garmin Express™, Garmin Nautix™, Garmin Navionics
®

Vision+™, Garmin Quickdraw™, GC™, GCV™, GMR™, GRID™, GXM™, LiveScope™, MotionScope™, OneChart™, OneHelm™, Panoptix™, Reactor™, Shadow Drive™, SmartMode™, and
SteadyCast™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The BLUETOOTH word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
® ®

marks by Garmin is under license. Blu-Ray™ is a registered trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association. Chromecast™ is a registered trademark of Google Inc. CZone™ is a trademark
of Power Products, LLC. Color Thermal Vision™ is a trademark of FLIR Systems, Inc. FLIR and MSX are registered trademarks of FLIR Systems, Inc. HDMI is a registered
® ® ®

trademark of HDMI Licensing, LLC. Mercury and Skyhook are trademarks of Brunswick Corporation. NMEA , NMEA 2000 , and the NMEA 2000 logo are registered trademarks
® ® ® ®

of the National Marine Electronics Association. microSD and the microSD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. Optimus , and SeaStation are registered trademarks of Dometic .
® ® ® ®

CHARGE™, C-Monster and Power-Pole are registered trademarks of JL Marine Systems, Inc. SD and the SDHC logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. SiriusXM and all related
® ® ® ®

marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All rights reserved. USB-C is a registered trademark of USB Implementers Forum. Wi‑Fi is a registered mark of Wi-Fi
® ®

Alliance Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Yamaha , the Yamaha logo, Command Link Plus , and
® ® ®

Helm Master are trademarks of the YAMAHA Motor Co., LTD. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
®
 Table of Contents Automatically Turning Off the
System................................................... 18
Introduction......................................1 Customizing Pages............................... 19
Creating a New Combination Page.. 19
Protective Cover...................................... 1 Adding a SmartMode Layout............ 19
Device Overview...................................... 2 Customizing the Layout of a
Using the Touchscreen....................... 2 SmartMode or Combination Page....20
On-Screen Buttons.............................. 3 Deleting a Combination Page........... 20
Locking and Unlocking the Customizing the Data Overlays........ 20
Touchscreen........................................ 5 Resetting the Station Layouts.......... 20
Connector View (8x10, 8x12, and 8x16 Customizing the Startup Screen...... 21
models)................................................ 5
Presets................................................... 21
Connector View (8x17, 8x22, and 8x24
Managing Presets............................. 21
models)................................................ 6
Saving a New Preset......................... 21
Connector View (8700 models).......... 7
Connector View (9000 Models).......... 8
Controlling the Chartplotter............ 21
Connector View (9500 models).......... 9
Tips and Shortcuts (MFD models)....... 10 Voice Control......................................... 21
Tips and Shortcuts (8700 and 9500 Changing the Voice Control
models).................................................. 11 Language........................................... 22
Accessing Owner's Manuals on the Supported Headsets......................... 22
Chartplotter........................................... 11 Pairing a Wireless Headset with a
Accessing the Manuals from the Garmin Chartplotter.......................... 22
Web........................................................ 11 Using a Wireless Headset with a
Garmin Support Center......................... 11 Garmin Chartplotter.......................... 22
Memory Cards....................................... 12 Chartplotter Voice Commands......... 23
Inserting Memory Cards (GPSMAP GRID Remote Control............................ 27
8x10/8x12/8x16/9x19/9x22/9x24/9x Pairing the GRID Device with the
27)...................................................... 13 Chartplotter from the Chartplotter... 27
Inserting a Memory Card (GPSMAP Pairing the GRID Device with the
8x17/8x22/8x24/87xx/9500)........... 14 Chartplotter from the GRID Device... 27
Acquiring GPS Satellite Signals............14 Pairing the GRID 20 Device with the
Selecting the GPS Source................. 14 Chartplotter from the GRID 20
Device................................................. 27
Customizing the Chartplotter.......... 15 Rotating the GRID Remote Input
Device................................................. 27
Home Screen......................................... 15
Pinning a Feature Button.................. 16 ActiveCaptain App.......................... 27
Rearranging the Category Items...... 16
ActiveCaptain and Garmin BlueNet
Menu Bar............................................... 16 Considerations...................................... 28
Hiding and Showing the Menu Bar... 17 ActiveCaptain Roles.............................. 28
Setting the Vessel Type........................ 17 Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain
Adjusting the Backlight......................... 17 App......................................................... 29
Adjusting the Color Mode..................... 17 Enabling Smart Notifications............... 29
Adjusting the Color Theme................... 18 Receiving Notifications..................... 30
Enabling Screen Lock........................... 18 Managing Notifications.................... 30
Turning On the Chartplotter Making Notifications Private............ 30
Automatically........................................ 18 Updating Software with the
ActiveCaptain App................................ 31

Table of Contents i
 Updating Charts with ActiveCaptain.... 31 Viewing Tide Station Information..... 40
Chart Subscriptions.............................. 31 Animated Tide and Current
Indicators....................................... 41
Communication with Wireless Showing Tides and Current
Devices.......................................... 31 Indicators....................................... 41
Wi‑Fi Network........................................ 32 Showing Satellite Imagery on the
Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network............ 32 Navigation Chart................................ 41
Connecting a Wireless Device to the Viewing Aerial Photos of
Chartplotter........................................ 32 Landmarks......................................... 42
Changing the Wireless Channel....... 32 Automatic Identification System......... 42
Changing the Wi‑Fi Host................... 32 AIS Targeting Symbols..................... 42
Wireless Remote Control...................... 32 Heading and Projected Course of
Activated AIS Targets....................... 43
Pairing the Wireless Remote Control
With the Chartplotter......................... 32 Viewing a List of AIS Threats........... 43
Turning On and Off the Remote Activating a Target for an AIS
Backlight............................................ 33 Vessel................................................. 43
Disconnecting the Remote Control Viewing Information about a
from All Chartplotters....................... 33 Targeted AIS Vessel...................... 43
Wireless Wind Sensor........................... 33 Deactivating a Target for an AIS
Vessel............................................. 43
Connecting a Wireless Sensor to the
Chartplotter........................................ 33 Showing AIS Vessels on a Chart or
3D Chart View................................ 44
Adjusting the Wind Sensor
Orientation......................................... 33 Setting the Safe-Zone Collision
Alarm.................................................. 44
Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin
Watch..................................................... 33 AIS Aids to Navigation...................... 45
Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin Nautix™ AIS Distress Signals...................... 46
Device.................................................... 34 Turning Off AIS Reception................ 46
Chart Menu............................................ 47
Charts and 3D Chart Views............. 34 Chart Layers....................................... 47
Detailed Charts...................................... 34 Chart Layer Settings...................... 47
Activating a Marine Chart Depth Layer Settings..................... 48
Subscription....................................... 35 My Vessel Layer Settings.............. 48
Purchasing a Chart Subscription with Laylines Settings........................... 48
ActiveCaptain.................................... 35 User Data Layer Settings...............49
Renewing Your Subscription............ 35 Other Vessels Layer Settings........ 49
Navigation Chart and Fishing Chart..... 36 Water Layer Settings..................... 49
Chart Symbols................................... 36 Depth Range Shading.................... 50
Zooming In and Out Using the Weather Layer Settings................. 50
Touchscreen...................................... 36 Radar Overlay Settings.................. 51
Measuring a Distance on the Chart Settings.................................... 51
Chart................................................... 37 Fish Eye 3D Settings......................... 51
Creating a Waypoint on the Chart.... 37 Supported Maps.................................... 52
Viewing Location and Object
Information on a Chart...................... 37 Garmin Quickdraw Contours
Viewing Details about Navaids......... 37 Mapping......................................... 52
Navigating to a Point on the Chart... 38 Mapping a Body of Water Using the
Premium Chart Features...................... 39 Garmin Quickdraw Contours Feature.. 52
Fish Eye 3D Chart View..................... 40

ii Table of Contents
 Adding a Label to a Garmin Quickdraw Viewing a List of Routes and Auto
Contours Map........................................ 53 Guidance Paths................................. 60
Garmin Quickdraw Community............ 53 Editing a Saved Route....................... 60
Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Finding and Navigating a Saved
Community with ActiveCaptain........ 53 Route.................................................. 61
Downloading Garmin Quickdraw Browsing for and Navigating Parallel
Community Maps Using to a Saved Route............................... 61
ActiveCaptain................................. 53 Initiating a Search Pattern................ 62
Sharing Your Garmin Quickdraw Deleting a Saved Route..................... 62
Contours Maps with the Garmin Deleting All Saved Routes................. 62
Quickdraw Community Using Auto Guidance....................................... 62
ActiveCaptain................................. 53 Setting and Following an Auto
Garmin Quickdraw Contours Guidance Path................................... 62
Settings.................................................. 54 Creating and Saving an Auto Guidance
Path.................................................... 63
Navigation with a Chartplotter........ 54 Adjusting a Saved Auto Guidance
Basic Navigation Questions................. 55 Path.................................................... 63
Route Color Coding............................... 55 Canceling an Auto Guidance
Destinations.......................................... 56 Calculation in Progress..................... 63
Searching for a Destination by Setting a Timed Arrival...................... 63
Name.................................................. 56 Auto Guidance Path
Selecting a Destination Using the Configurations................................... 64
Navigation Chart................................ 56 Adjusting the Distance from
Searching for a Marine Services Shore.............................................. 65
Destination......................................... 56 Tracks.................................................... 65
Setting and Following a Direct Course Showing Tracks................................. 65
Using Go To....................................... 56 Setting the Color of the Active
Stopping Navigation.......................... 57 Track.................................................. 66
Waypoints.............................................. 57 Saving the Active Track.................... 66
Marking Your Present Location as a Viewing a List of Saved Tracks........ 66
Waypoint............................................ 57 Editing a Saved Track....................... 66
Creating a Waypoint at a Different Saving a Track as a Route................ 66
Location............................................. 57 Browsing for and Navigating a
Marking a Man Overboard or Other Recorded Track................................. 66
SOS Location..................................... 57 Deleting a Saved Track..................... 66
Projecting a Waypoint....................... 57 Deleting All Saved Tracks................. 66
Viewing a List of all Waypoints........ 58 Retracing the Active Track................ 67
Editing a Saved Waypoint................. 58 Clearing the Active Track.................. 67
Moving a Saved Waypoint................ 58 Managing the Track Log Memory
Browsing for and Navigating to a During Recording............................... 67
Saved Waypoint................................. 59 Configuring the Recording Interval of
Deleting a Waypoint or an MOB........59 the Track Log..................................... 67
Deleting All Waypoints...................... 59 Boundaries.............................................67
Routes.................................................... 59 Creating a Boundary.......................... 68
Creating and Navigating a Route From Converting a Route to a Boundary... 68
Your Present Location...................... 60 Converting a Track to a Boundary.... 68
Creating and Saving a Route............ 60 Editing a Boundary............................ 68

Table of Contents iii

 Linking a Boundary to a SmartMode Stopping the Transmission of Sonar
Layout................................................ 68 Signals................................................... 77
Setting a Boundary Alarm................. 68 Traditional Sonar View.......................... 77
Disabling all Boundary Alarms......... 68 Split-Frequency Sonar View.............. 78
Deleting a Boundary.......................... 69 Garmin ClearVü Sonar View................. 78
Deleting All Saved Waypoints, Tracks, Garmin SideVü Sonar View................... 79
Routes, and Boundaries........................ 69 SideVü Scanning Technology........... 80
Measuring Distance on the Sonar
Sailing Features..............................69 Screen................................................ 80
Setting the Vessel Type for Sailing Panoptix Sonar Views........................... 80
Features................................................. 69 LiveVü Down Sonar View.................. 81
Sail Racing............................................. 69 LiveVü Forward Sonar View.............. 82
Starting Line Guidance...................... 69 RealVü 3D Forward Sonar View........ 83
Setting the Starting Line................ 69 RealVü 3D Down Sonar View............ 84
Using the Starting Line RealVü 3D Historical Sonar View..... 85
Guidance........................................ 70 LiveVü Layer................................... 86
Starting the Race Timer.................... 70 True Motion....................................87
Stopping the Race Timer.................. 70 Garmin FrontVü Sonar View............. 87
Setting the Distance between the Bow Triple Beam Sonar View.................... 88
and the GPS Antenna........................ 70 LiveScope Sonar View.......................... 89
Laylines Settings................................... 71 Zooming in a Panoptix LiveVü or
Polar Tables.......................................... 71 LiveScope Sonar View.......................... 90
Importing a Polar Table Manually.... 72 Perspective View................................... 90
Showing Polar Data in Data Fields... 72 Sonar Views in Combo Screens........... 91
Setting the Keel Offset.......................... 73 Selecting the Transducer Type............ 91
Sailboat Autopilot Operation................ 74 Selecting a Sonar Source..................... 91
Wind Hold.......................................... 74 Renaming a Sonar Source................ 91
Changing the Wind Hold Type...... 74 Sonar Sharing........................................ 92
Engaging Wind Hold...................... 75 Synchronizing Sonar Scroll Rates.... 92
Engaging Wind Hold from Heading Pausing and Resuming the Sonar
Hold................................................ 75 Display................................................... 92
Adjusting the Wind Hold Angle..... 75 Viewing Sonar History.......................... 92
Tack and Gybe................................... 75 Creating a Waypoint on the Sonar
Tacking and Gybing from Heading Screen.................................................... 93
Hold................................................ 75 Adjusting the Level of Detail................. 93
Tacking and Gybing from Wind Adjusting the Color Intensity................ 93
Hold................................................ 75 Sonar Setup........................................... 94
Setting a Tack Delay...................... 75 Setting the Zoom Level on the Sonar
Enabling the Gybe Inhibitor........... 76 Screen................................................ 94
Adjusting the Tack and Gybe Enabling a Split Zoom Sonar
Speed............................................. 76 View................................................ 94
Heading Line and Angle Markers......... 76 Setting the Scroll Speed.................... 95
Setting the Heading Line and Angle Adjusting the Range.......................... 95
Markers.............................................. 76 Sonar Noise Rejection Settings........ 96
Viewing Sailing Vessel Data................. 76 Sonar Appearance Settings.............. 96
Sonar Alarms..................................... 97
Sonar Fishfinder............................. 77 Advanced Sonar Settings................. 98
Transducer Installation Settings...... 98

iv Table of Contents
 Sonar Frequencies............................ 99 Radar Overlay and Chart Data
Selecting the Transducer Alignment........................................ 109
Frequency...................................... 99 Transmitting Radar Signals................ 109
Creating a Frequency Preset........ 99 Stopping the Transmission of Radar
Turning On the A-Scope.................. 100 Signals............................................. 109
Heave Compensation..................... 100 Setting Up the Timed Transmit
Configuring Sensors for Heave Mode................................................ 109
Compensation............................. 100 Enabling and Adjusting a Radar No
Using Heave Compensation on a Transmit Zone................................. 109
Sonar View................................... 101 Adjusting the Radar Range................. 110
Turning On Heave Tips for Selecting a Radar Range... 110
Compensation............................. 101 MotionScope Doppler Radar
Panoptix Sonar Setup......................... 101 Technology.......................................... 110
Adjusting the RealVü Viewing Angle Enabling Guard Zones........................ 111
and Zoom Level............................... 101 Defining a Circular Guard Zone...... 111
Adjusting the RealVü Sweep Defining a Partial Guard Zone........ 111
Speed............................................... 101 MARPA................................................ 112
LiveVü Forward and Garmin FrontVü MARPA Targeting Symbols............ 112
Sonar Settings................................. 102 Acquiring MARPA Targets
Setting the LiveVü and Garmin Automatically.................................. 112
FrontVü Transducer Transmit Removing MARPA Targets
Angle............................................ 102 Automatically.................................. 112
Setting the Garmin FrontVü Depth Assigning a MARPA Tag to an
Alarm............................................ 103 Object............................................... 113
LiveVü and Garmin FrontVü Removing a MARPA Tag from a
Appearance Settings................... 103 Targeted Object............................... 113
LiveVü and Garmin FrontVü Layout Viewing Information about a MARPA-
Settings........................................ 103 tagged Object.................................. 113
RealVü Appearance Settings.......... 104 Viewing a List of AIS Threats......... 113
Panoptix Transducer Installation Showing AIS Vessels on the Radar
Settings............................................ 104 Screen.............................................. 113
Setting the Bow Offset................ 105 VRM and EBL................................... 113
Calibrating the Compass............ 105 Showing and Adjusting a VRM and
LiveScope and Perspective Sonar EBL............................................... 113
Settings................................................ 106 Quickly Measuring the Range and
LiveScope and Perspective Sonar Bearing to a Target Object.......... 114
Setup................................................ 106 Changing an EBL Bearing
LiveScope and Perspective Reference..................................... 114
Appearance Settings....................... 107 Changing the Origin of a VRM and
LiveScope and Perspective Layout EBL............................................... 114
Settings............................................ 107 Using VRM and EBL Quick Actions
LiveScope and Perspective from the Radar Screen................ 114
Transducer Installation Settings.... 107 Echo Trails........................................... 115
Turning on Echo Trails.................... 115
Radar............................................108 Adjusting the Length of the Echo
Radar Interpretation............................ 108 Trails................................................ 115
Radar Overlay.................................. 108 Clearing the Echo Trails.................. 115
Radar Settings..................................... 115

Table of Contents v
 Radar Gain....................................... 115 Setting Up and Following the Circles
Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Pattern............................................. 123
Automatically............................... 115 Setting Up and Following the Zigzag
Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Pattern............................................. 123
Manually....................................... 116 Following the Williamson Turn
Minimizing Nearby Large-Object Pattern............................................. 124
Interference................................. 116 Following an Orbit Pattern.............. 124
Minimizing Side-Lobe Interference Setting Up and Following the
on the Radar Screen.................... 116 Cloverleaf Pattern........................... 124
Radar Filter Settings........................ 117 Setting Up and Following a Search
Adjusting Sea Clutter on the Radar Pattern............................................. 124
Screen.......................................... 117 Cancelling a Steering Pattern......... 124
Adjusting Rain Clutter on the Radar Adjusting the Autopilot Response..... 124
Screen.......................................... 117 Enabling Auto Response................. 125
Averaging Multiple Scans on the Low-Speed Autopilot Mode................ 125
Radar Screen............................... 117 Enabling and Disabling Low-Speed
Radar Options Menu....................... 118 Autopilot Mode................................ 125
Radar Setup Menu........................... 118 Engaging and Disengaging Low Speed
Reducing Cross Talk Clutter on the Autopilot Mode................................ 125
Radar Screen............................... 118 Enabling the Autopilot Controls on a
Radar Appearance Settings............ 118 Garmin Watch......................................125
Radar Installation Settings............. 119 Customizing the Autopilot Button
Measuring and Setting the Front-of- Actions............................................. 126
Boat Offset................................... 119 Controlling the Autopilot with a GRID 20
Setting a Custom Park Position. 119 Remote Control................................... 126
Radar My Vessel Layer Settings..... 119 Reactor™ Autopilot Remote Control.. 126
Radar Overlay Chart Settings......... 119 Pairing a Reactor Autopilot Remote
Selecting a Different Radar Source.... 119 Control With a Chartplotter............. 126
Changing the Functions of the Reactor
Autopilot...................................... 120 Autopilot Remote Control Action
Autopilot Configuration...................... 120 Keys.................................................. 126
Selecting the Preferred Heading Updating the Reactor Autopilot
Source.............................................. 120 Remote Control Software............... 127
Opening the Autopilot Screen............ 120 Power Steering Mode......................... 127
Autopilot Screen..................................121 Enabling Power Steering Mode...... 127
Adjusting the Step Steering Yamaha Autopilot............................... 128
Increment......................................... 121 Yamaha Autopilot Screen............... 128
Setting the Power Saver................. 121 Yamaha Autopilot Settings......... 129
Enabling the Shadow Drive™ Yamaha Autopilot Overlay Bar....... 129
Feature............................................. 122
Autopilot Overlay Bar.......................... 122 Force® Trolling Motor Control...... 130
Engaging the Autopilot....................... 122 Connecting to a Trolling Motor.......... 130
Adjusting the Heading Using the Adding the Trolling Motor Controls to
Helm................................................. 123 Screens................................................ 130
Adjusting the Heading with the Trolling Motor Control Bar.............. 131
Chartplotter in Step Steering Mode 123 Trolling Motor Settings....................... 132
Steering Patterns................................ 123
Following the U-Turn Pattern.......... 123

vi Table of Contents
 Assigning a Shortcut to the Trolling Customizing the Engines Shown in
Motor Remote Control Shortcut Gauges............................................. 139
Keys.................................................. 132 Enabling Status Alarms for Engine
Calibrating the Trolling Motor Gauges............................................. 139
Compass.......................................... 132 Enabling Some Engine Gauge Status
Setting the Bow Offset.................... 133 Alarms.............................................. 140
Calibrating the Steering Alignment 133 Yamaha Engine Gauges..................... 140
Engine Condition Icons................... 141
Digital Selective Calling................ 134 Engine Alert Icons........................... 142
Networked Chartplotter and VHF Radio Setting Up the Gauges.................... 142
Functionality........................................ 134 Configuring the Number of
Turning On DSC................................... 134 Engines.........................................142
DSC List............................................... 134 Configuring the Tank Level
Viewing the DSC List....................... 134 Sensors........................................ 143
Adding a DSC Contact.................... 134 Changing the Data Shown.......... 143
Incoming Distress Calls...................... 134 Yamaha Engine Data Settings.... 143
Navigating to a Vessel in Distress. 135 Mercury® Engine Gauges................... 144
Man-Overboard Distress Calls Initiated Setting the Fuel Alarm........................ 145
from a VHF Radio............................ 135 Synchronizing the Fuel Data with the
Man-Overboard and SOS Distress Actual Vessel Fuel........................... 145
Calls Initiated from the Viewing the Wind Gauges................... 145
Chartplotter......................................135 Configuring the Sailing Wind
Position Tracking................................ 135 Gauge............................................... 145
Viewing a Position Report.............. 135 Configuring the Speed Source........145
Navigating to a Tracked Vessel..... 135 Configuring the Heading Source of the
Creating a Waypoint at the Position of Wind Gauge..................................... 146
a Tracked Vessel............................. 136 Customizing the Close-Hauled Wind
Editing Information in a Position Gauge............................................... 146
Report...............................................136 Viewing Trip Gauges........................... 146
Deleting a Position-Report Call...... 136 Resetting Trip Gauges.................... 146
Viewing Vessel Trails on the Chart 136 Viewing Graphs................................... 146
Individual Routine Calls...................... 136 Setting the Graph Range and Time
Selecting a DSC Channel................ 137 Scales.............................................. 147
Making an Individual Routine Call.. 137 Disabling Graph Filtering................ 147
Making an Individual Routine Call to
an AIS Target................................... 137 inReach Messages....................... 147
Connecting an inReach Device to the
Gauges and Graphs...................... 137 Chartplotter......................................... 147
Viewing the Gauges............................ 138 Receiving Messages........................... 148
Engine Alert Icons........................... 138 Replying to a Message....................... 148
Changing the Data Shown in a Sending a Preset or Check-In
Gauge............................................... 138 Message.............................................. 148
Customizing the Gauges................ 139 Starting a New Conversation............. 148
Customizing Engine Gauge and Fuel Sending a Quick Message.................. 149
Gauge Limits................................... 139 Sending a Custom Message.............. 149
Selecting the Number of Engines inReach SOS Calls............................... 149
Shown in Gauges............................ 139 Sending an inReach SOS Call......... 149

Table of Contents vii

 Communicating with the Garmin Adding the Mercury Active Trim
Response Team During an SOS Overlay............................................. 159
Call................................................... 150 Mercury Active Trim Overlay.......... 160
Cancelling an inReach SOS Call..... 150 Skyhook® Digital Anchor Control...... 160
Adding the Skyhook Digital Anchor
Digital Switching...........................150 Control Overlay................................ 160
Adding and Editing a Digital Switching Skyhook Digital Anchor Overlay..... 161
Page..................................................... 150 Drifthook Overlay............................. 161
Garmin Boat Switch™.......................... 150 Dometic® Optimus® Features.......... 161
Configuring the Garmin Boat Switch Activating the Optimus Overlay
Device.............................................. 150 Bar.................................................... 161
Configuring a Switch as Optimus Overlay Bar Overview....... 162
Momentary................................... 151 Optimus Overlay Symbols.............. 162
Naming a Switch......................... 151 Optimus Limp Home Mode............ 162
Labeling a Switch........................ 151
Showing and Hiding Switches.... 151 Tide, Current, and Celestial
Configuring the Navigation Light Information.................................. 163
Option........................................... 152 Tide and Current Overlays.................. 163
Using the Bilge Pump Switches..... 152 Adding Tide and Current Overlays. 163
Using Dimmable Lights................... 152 Tide Station Information..................... 164
Current Station Information............... 164
Controlling Third-Party Equipment Celestial Information.......................... 164
Installed on Your Boat.................. 153 Viewing Tide Station, Current Station, or
Power-Pole® Anchor System............. 153 Celestial Information for a Different
Enabling the Power-Pole Anchor or Date...................................................... 164
CHARGE™ Overlay........................... 153 Viewing Information for a Different Tide
Setting Up the Power-Pole Anchor. 153 or Current Station................................ 164
Power-Pole Overlay......................... 154 Viewing Almanac Information from the
Power-Pole Advanced Boat Navigation Chart................................. 164
Control............................................. 155
CHARGE Overlay............................. 155 Messages and Warnings............... 165
Enabling the Mercury Helm................ 156 Viewing Messages and Warnings...... 165
Mercury Troll Control Features.......... 156 Sorting and Filtering Messages......... 165
Adding the Mercury Troll Control Saving Messages to a Memory Card. 165
Overlay............................................. 157 Clearing all Messages and Warnings 165
Mercury Troll Overlay...................... 157
Mercury Cruise Control....................... 157 Media Player................................ 166
Enabling the Mercury Cruise Control Opening the Media Player.................. 166
Overlay............................................. 157 Media Player Icons.......................... 166
Mercury Cruise Control Overlay..... 158 Selecting the Media Device and
Mercury Engine Details....................... 158 Source.................................................. 167
Adding the Mercury Engine Adjusting the Volume and Audio
Overlay............................................. 158 Levels................................................... 167
Mercury Engine Overlay.................. 159 Adjusting the Volume......................167
Enabling the Mercury Engine Sport Adjusting the Audio Level............... 167
Exhaust Setting............................... 159 Muting the Media Volume.............. 167
Mercury Active Trim Control.............. 159

viii Table of Contents

 Automatic Volume Adjustment Based Parental Controls............................ 174
on Speed.......................................... 167 Unlocking SiriusXM Parental
Enabling Automatic Volume Controls........................................ 174
Adjustment Based on Speed...... 167 Setting Parental Controls on
Automatic Volume Control SiriusXM Radio Channels............174
Settings........................................ 168 Clearing All Locked Channels on a
Speed Source Information.......... 168 SiriusXM Radio............................ 174
Stereo Zones and Groups................... 168 Restoring Default Parental Control
Selecting the Home Zone............... 169 Settings Values............................ 174
Adjusting the Zone Volume............ 169 Changing a Parental Passcode on a
Disabling a Speaker Zone............... 169 SiriusXM Radio............................ 175
Creating a Group............................. 169 Setting the Device Name.................... 175
Editing a Group............................ 170 Updating the Media Player Software. 175
Group Synchronization................ 170 Audio Return Channel......................... 175
Playing Music...................................... 170
Browsing for Music......................... 170 Configuring a Stereo from the
Enabling Alphabetical Search..... 170 Chartplotter.................................. 175
Setting a Song to Repeat................ 171
Setting All Songs to Repeat............ 171 SiriusXM Weather......................... 176
Setting Songs to Shuffle................. 171 SiriusXM Equipment and Subscription
Radio.................................................... 171 Requirements...................................... 176
Setting the Tuner Region................ 171 Weather Data Broadcasts.................. 176
Changing the Radio Station............ 171 Weather Warnings and Weather
Changing the Tuning Mode............ 171 Bulletins............................................... 176
Presets............................................. 172 Viewing Precipitation Information..... 176
Saving a Station as a Preset....... 172 Storm Cell and Lightning
Selecting a Preset....................... 172 Information...................................... 177
Removing a Preset...................... 172 Hurricane Information..................... 177
DAB Playback...................................... 172 Forecast Information.......................... 177
Setting the DAB Tuner Region........ 172 Viewing a Marine Forecast or an
Scanning for DAB Stations............. 172 Offshore Forecast........................... 177
Changing DAB Stations...................172 Viewing Forecast Information for
Selecting a DAB Station from a Another Time Period....................... 177
List................................................ 172 Weather Fronts and Pressure
Selecting a DAB Station from a Centers............................................. 178
Category....................................... 173 City Forecasts..................................178
DAB Presets..................................... 173 Viewing Fish Mapping Data................ 179
Saving a DAB Station as a Viewing Sea Conditions...................... 179
Preset........................................... 173 Surface Winds................................. 179
Selecting a DAB Preset from a Wave Height, Wave Period, and Wave
List................................................ 173 Direction........................................... 179
Removing DAB Presets............... 173 Viewing Forecast Sea Conditions
SiriusXM Satellite Radio..................... 173 Information for Another Time
Locating a SiriusXM Radio ID......... 173 Period............................................... 179
Activating a SiriusXM Subscription 173 Viewing Sea Temperature
Information.......................................... 180
Customizing the Channel Guide..... 174
Surface Pressure and Water
Saving a SiriusXM Channel to the
Temperature Data........................... 180
Presets List...................................... 174

Table of Contents ix
 Changing the Sea Surface Deleting a VIRB Video................. 188
Temperature Color Range.............. 180 Starting a VIRB Video Slideshow 188
Visibility Information........................... 180 VIRB Action Camera Settings..... 188
Viewing Forecast Visibility Information VIRB Action Camera Video Setup
for Another Time Period................. 180 Settings........................................ 188
Viewing Buoy Reports......................... 180 Adding the VIRB Action Camera
Viewing Local Weather Information Controls to Other Screens.............. 189
near a Buoy...................................... 181 HDMI Video Considerations............... 189
Weather Overlay.................................. 181 Controlling HDMI Audio...................... 190
Viewing Weather Subscription Pairing the GC™ 100 Camera with a
Information.......................................... 181 Garmin Chartplotter............................ 190

Viewing Video.............................. 181 Surround View Camera System.....191

Selecting a Video Source.................... 181 Changing a Camera............................ 191
Alternating Among Multiple Video Viewing a Camera Feed Full Screen.. 192
Sources............................................ 181 Changing the Surround View Camera
Networked Video Devices.................. 182 System Layout..................................... 192
Using Video Presets on Networked Showing and Hiding the Visual
Video Cameras................................ 182 Bumper................................................ 192
Saving Video Presets on a Adjusting the Visual Bumper.......... 192
Networked Video Camera........... 182 Showing the Distance Marker............ 192
Naming Video Presets on a Surround View Camera Movement
Networked Video Camera........... 182 Control................................................. 192
Activating Video Presets on a Renaming a Camera........................... 193
Networked Video Camera........... 182 Setting the Camera to Mirrored Stern
Camera Settings.............................. 183 View..................................................... 193
Video Settings................................. 183 Object Detection and Proximity Alert 193
Associating the Camera to a Video Enabling the Proximity Beeper....... 194
Source.............................................. 183 Proximity Beeper Mute Behavior.... 195
Video Camera Movement Control.. 184
Controlling Video Cameras Using LED Lighting Control..................... 195
On-Screen Controls..................... 184 LED Light Controller Configuration.... 195
Controlling a Video Camera Using Initializing Connected LED Lights.. 196
Gestures....................................... 184 Renaming an LED Light................... 196
Configuring the Video Appearance.... 184 Associating LED Lights with an Audio
Camera Tracking................................. 185 Zone................................................. 196
Setting the Camera Angle and Renaming an LED Lighting
Height............................................... 185 Controller......................................... 197
Using Compass Lock...................... 185 Removing an LED Lighting
Using Vessel Lock........................... 186 Controller......................................... 197
Garmin VIRB® Action Cameras......... 186 LED Lighting Control Screen.............. 198
Connecting a VIRB 360 Action Turning LED Lights On and Off....... 198
Camera............................................ 186 Adjusting LED Light Brightness...... 198
Connecting a VIRB Action Camera 187 Changing LED Light Color............... 199
Controlling the VIRB Action Camera Changing LED Light Effects............ 199
with the Chartplotter....................... 187 Setting LED Lights to React to
Controlling the VIRB Action Camera Music............................................... 200
Video Playback............................ 187 LED Light Scenes................................ 200

x Table of Contents
 Creating a new LED Light Scene.... 200 Navigation Alarms........................... 210
Editing an LED Light Scene............. 201 Setting the Anchor Drag Alarm... 210
Starting an LED Light Scene........... 201 System Alarms................................ 211
Deleting an LED Light Scene.......... 201 Sonar Alarms................................... 211
LED Light Groups................................ 201 Setting Weather Alarms.................. 211
Creating and Adding Lights to an LED Setting the Fuel Alarm.................... 211
Light Group...................................... 201 My Vessel Settings............................. 212
Editing an LED Light Group............. 202 Setting the Keel Offset.................... 213
Renaming an LED Light Group....... 202 Setting the Water Temperature
Offset............................................... 214
Device Configuration.................... 202 Fuel Settings.................................... 214
System Settings.................................. 202 Calibrating a Water-Speed Device.. 214
Sounds and Display Settings.......... 202 Other Vessels Settings....................... 215
Audio Settings............................. 203 Settings that are Synced on the Garmin
Satellite Positioning (GPS) Marine Network................................... 215
Settings............................................ 203 Restoring the Original Chartplotter
Station Settings............................... 203 Factory Settings.................................. 216
Viewing System Software
Information...................................... 204 Sharing and Managing User Data.. 216
Viewing the Event Log................. 204 Selecting a File Type for Third-Party
Sorting and Filtering Events........ 204 Waypoints and Routes........................ 216
Saving Events to a Memory Copying User Data from a Memory
Card.............................................. 204 Card......................................................217
Clearing All of the Events From the Copying All User Data to a Memory
Event Log..................................... 204 Card......................................................217
Viewing E-label Regulatory and Copying User Data from a Specified Area
Compliance Information................. 204 to a Memory Card............................... 217
Preferences Settings.......................... 204 Updating Built-In Maps with a Memory
Units Settings.................................. 205 Card and Garmin Express................... 218
Navigation Settings......................... 205 Backing Up Data to a Computer......... 218
Auto Guidance Path Restoring Backup Data to a
Configurations............................. 206 Chartplotter......................................... 218
Adjusting the Distance from Saving System Information to a Memory
Shore............................................ 207 Card......................................................218
Communications Settings.................. 208
Viewing Connected Devices........... 208 Appendix...................................... 219
NMEA 0183 Settings....................... 208 ActiveCaptain and Garmin Express... 219
Configuring NMEA 0183 Output Garmin Express App........................... 219
Sentences.................................... 208 Installing the Garmin Express App on a
Setting the Communication Format Computer......................................... 219
for Each NMEA 0183 Port........... 208 Registering Your Device Using the
NMEA 2000 Settings....................... 209 Garmin Express App....................... 220
Naming Devices and Sensors on the Updating Your Charts Using the
Network........................................ 209 Garmin Express App....................... 221
The Garmin BlueNet Network and the Software Updates............................222
Legacy Garmin Marine Network..... 209 Loading the New Software on a
USB DRD Settings............................ 209 Memory Card Using Garmin
Setting Alarms..................................... 209 Express.........................................222

Table of Contents xi
 Updating the Device Software Using
a Memory Card............................ 223
NMEA 0183 with Audio Cable Pinout 223
Touchscreen Controls for a Connected
Computer (MFD models).................... 224
Touchscreen Controls for a Connected
Computer (8700 and 9500 Models).. 225
Controlling a Computer with the
Chartplotter......................................... 226
Cleaning the Screen............................ 226
Viewing Images on a Memory card... 227
Screenshots........................................ 227
Capturing Screenshots................... 227
Copying Screenshots to a
Computer......................................... 227
Troubleshooting.................................. 227
My device will not acquire GPS
signals.............................................. 227
My device will not turn on or keeps
turning off........................................ 228
My device is not creating waypoints in
the correct location......................... 228
Contacting Garmin Support................ 228
Specifications......................................229
GPSMAP 8x10 Specifications........ 229
GPSMAP 8x12 Specifications........ 230
GPSMAP 8x16 Specifications........ 231
GPSMAP 8x17 Specifications........ 232
GPSMAP 8x22 Specifications........ 233
GPSMAP 8x24 Specifications........ 234
GPSMAP 9x19 Specifications........ 235
GPSMAP 9x22 Specifications........ 236
GPSMAP 9x24 Specifications........ 237
GPSMAP 9x27 Specifications........ 238
GPSMAP 8700 Specifications........ 239
GPSMAP 9500 Specifications........ 240
Sonar Models Specifications......... 240
Recommended Startup Image
Dimensions...................................... 241
NMEA 2000 PGN Information........ 242
J1939 Information.......................... 245
NMEA 0183 Information................. 246

xii Table of Contents

 Introduction
WARNING
See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other
important information.
All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance
or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and
conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,
personal injury, or death.
NOTE: Not all features are available on all models.
The Garmin website at support.garmin.com presents up-to-date information about your product. The support
®

pages will provide answers to frequently asked support questions, and you can download software and chart
updates. There is also contact information to Garmin support should you have any questions.

Protective Cover
WARNING
Some protective covers may contain magnets. Under certain circumstances, magnets may cause interference
with some medical devices, including pacemakers and insulin pumps. Protective covers that contain magnets
should be kept away from such medical devices. Protective covers that contain magnets are flat and stick to the
screen of the device, whereas covers without magnets have a lip that holds the cover to the sides of the device.

NOTICE
Some protective covers contain magnets. Under certain circumstances, magnets may cause damage to some
electronic devices, including hard drives in laptop computers. Use caution when the protective cover is near
electronic devices.
Before moving the vessel, remove the sun cover. Leaving the sun cover in place while the boat is moving could
result in the sun cover becoming detached and possibly becoming lost or falling into the water.
The protective cover protects the screen when the device is not in use.

Introduction 1
Device Overview

Touchscreen

Power key

Automatic backlight sensor

Using the Touchscreen

• Tap the screen to select an item.
• Drag or swipe your finger across the screen to pan or scroll.
• Pinch two fingers together to zoom out.
• Spread two fingers apart to zoom in.

2 Introduction
On-Screen Buttons
These on-screen buttons may be displayed on some screens and functions. Some buttons are accessible only
in a combination page or SmartMode™ layout or when accessories, such as a radar, are connected.

Introduction 3
Button Function

Clears the on-screen icons and re-centers the screen on the boat

Opens a full-screen view of the item

Creates a new waypoint

Creates a route, with turns, to the destination

Adds a turn to the route at the selected location

Removes the last added turn from the route

Creates a direct route, without turns, to the destination

Creates an Auto Guidance route to the destination

Begins navigation

Ends navigation

Stops and starts radar transmission

Opens the radar gain adjustment menu

Opens the radar sea clutter adjustment menu

Opens the radar rain clutter adjustment menu

Turns on and off the radar echo trails

Acquires a radar target and begins tracking it

Shows and sets the VRM/EBL line

Opens the menu for the page or function

Opens the Weather menu for the page or function

Opens the Radar menu for the page or function

Opens the Favorites menu for the page or function

4 Introduction
Locking and Unlocking the Touchscreen
You can lock the touchscreen to prevent inadvertent screen touches.
1 Select > Lock Touchscreen to lock the screen.
2 Select to unlock the screen.

Connector View (8x10, 8x12, and 8x16 models)

The connectors and locations vary based upon the model. A GPSMAP 8612xsv model is shown below.

2 microSD memory card slots, 32 GB max card size1.

®

NETWORK Garmin Marine Network

HDMI IN HDMI in
®

HDMI OUT HDMI out

CVBS IN Composite video in

AUDIO NMEA 0183 and audio out

®

POWER Power

Micro-USB to connect a compatible Garmin card reader, or to connect and control a computer
USB
using the chartplotter touchscreen

12-PIN XDCR 12-pin transducer

LVS XDCR LiveScope™ single-array transducer

8-PIN XDCR 8-pin transducer

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

®

J1939 J1939 network

1 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to
1 TB, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

Introduction 5
Connector View (8x17, 8x22, and 8x24 models)
The connectors and locations vary based upon the model. A GPSMAP 8622 model is shown below.

POWER Power

NETWORK Garmin Marine Network

HDMI IN HDMI in

HDMI OUT HDMI out

CVBS IN Composite video in

NMEA 0183 NMEA 0183 and audio out

Micro-USB to connect a compatible Garmin card reader, or to connect and control a computer
USB
using the chartplotter touchscreen

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

ENGINE/J1939 J1939 engine network

6 Introduction
Connector View (8700 models)

POWER Power cable connection

NETWORK Garmin Marine Network

HDMI IN HDMI in

HDMI OUT HDMI out to connect the chartplotter to a monitor. Required for device functionality.

CVBS IN Composite video in

Status LED

Power ground

Power button

NMEA 0183 NMEA 0183 and audio out

USB HOST Micro-USB output for connecting a touchscreen monitor

Micro-USB input from compatible Garmin card reader2, computer, or other supported USB
USB OTG
accessory

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

J1939 J1939 network

2 Only compatible Garmin card readers recommended. Third-party card readers are not guaranteed to be fully compatible.

Introduction 7
Connector View (9000 Models)
The connectors and locations are the same across all of the GPSMAP 9000 series models. A GPSMAP 9x22
model is shown below.

2 microSD memory card slots, 1 TB max. card size3

POWER Power

NETWORK Garmin BlueNet™ network ports

HDMI IN 1 HDMI input compatible with HDMI devices up to 4K at 60 fps

HDMI IN 2 HDMI input compatible with HDMI devices up to 4K at 30 fps

HDMI OUT HDMI out

USB USB-C to connect a compatible Garmin card reader4.

®

Dual-Role-Data (DRD) USB-C that can be configured as either a host or a client (USB DRD Settings,
USB DRD
page 209).

AUDIO NMEA 0183 and audio out

CVBS IN Composite video in

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

J1939 J1939 network

3 As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series devices are compatible with up to 1 TB memory cards formatted to exFAT.
4 An adapter cable (010-12390-13) may be required when connecting an external card reader to this port.

8 Introduction
Connector View (9500 models)

Status LED

POWER Power cable connection

NETWORK Garmin BlueNet network ports

USB USB-C to connect a compatible Garmin card reader5.

HDMI IN 1 HDMI input compatible with HDMI devices up to 4K at 60 fps

HDMI IN 2 HDMI input compatible with HDMI devices up to 4K at 30 fps

HDMI OUT HDMI out to connect the chartplotter to a monitor. Required for device functionality.

Power ground

Power button

AUDIO Audio out

Dual-Role-Data (DRD) USB-C that can be configured as either a host or a client (USB DRD Settings,
USB DRD
page 209).

CVBS IN Composite video in

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 network

J1939 J1939 network

5 An adapter cable (010-12390-13) may be required when connecting an external card reader to this port.

Introduction 9
Tips and Shortcuts (MFD models)
• Press to turn on the chartplotter.
• From any screen, press repeatedly to scroll through the brightness levels, if available. This can be helpful
when the brightness is so low you cannot see the screen.
• Select from any screen to open to the home screen.
• Select Options to open additional settings about that screen.
• Select Toolbars to quickly add a toolbar overlay to the current page.
• Select to close the menu when finished.
• Press to open additional options, such as adjusting the backlight.
• Press , and select Power > Turn Off System, or hold until the Turn Off System bar fills to turn off the
chartplotter, when available.
• Press , and select Power > Sleep Station to set the chartplotter to standby mode, when available.
To exit standby mode, select .
• Depending on the features of your chartplotter, not all feature buttons are visible are on the home screen.
Swipe right or left to view the additional feature buttons.
• On some menu buttons, select the button to enable the option.

A green light on an option indicates the option is enabled .

• When available, select to open the menu.

10 Introduction
Tips and Shortcuts (8700 and 9500 models)
• Press to turn on the GPSMAP 8700/9500 device.
You can also turn on and off the device using a Garmin chartplotter on the network or a GRID™ remote control.
You can put the device to sleep using a GRID 20 remote control, although you cannot use a GRID 20 remote
control to turn it on.
• From any screen, press repeatedly to scroll through the brightness levels when connected to a GRID
remote control, or a GRID 20 remote control. This can be helpful when the brightness is so low you cannot
see the screen.
• Select from any screen to open to the home screen.
• Select Options to open additional settings about that screen.
• Select to close the menu when finished.
• Press to open additional options, depending on your installation.
• Depending on the features of your chartplotter, not all feature buttons are visible are on the home screen.
Swipe right or left to view the additional feature buttons.
• On some menu buttons, select the button to enable the option.

A green light on an option indicates the option is enabled .

• When available, select to open the menu.

Accessing Owner's Manuals on the Chartplotter

1 Select > Owner's Manual.
2 Select a manual.
3 Select Open.

Accessing the Manuals from the Web

You can get the latest owner's manual and translations of manuals from the Garmin website. The owner's
manual includes instructions for using device features and accessing regulatory information.
1 Go to garmin.com/manuals/GPSMAP8400-8600 or garmin.com/manuals/GPSMAP9000.
2 Select the Owner's Manual.
A web manual opens. You can download the entire manual by selecting Download PDF.

Garmin Support Center

Go to support.garmin.com for help and information, such as product manuals, frequently asked questions,
videos, software updates, and customer support.

Introduction 11
Memory Cards
You can use optional memory cards with the chartplotter. Map cards allow you to view high-resolution satellite
imagery and aerial reference photos of ports, harbors, marinas, and other points of interest. You can use blank
memory cards to record Garmin Quickdraw™ Contours mapping, record sonar (with a compatible transducer),
transfer data such as waypoints and routes to another compatible chartplotter or a computer, and use the
ActiveCaptain app.
®

The internal card readers on GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotters support up to 32 GB memory cards,
formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher6. Use of an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10
is recommended. As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotters
support up to 1 TB memory cards, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

Model Memory Card Location Memory Card Type Memory Card Size and Format

8x10 Back of the device microSD Up to 32 GB, FAT326

8x12 Back of the device microSD Up to 32 GB, FAT326

8x16 Back of the device microSD Up to 32 GB, FAT326

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
8x17 External card reader SD
®

Up to 32 GB, FAT32

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
8x22 External card reader SD
Up to 32 GB, FAT32

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
8x24 External card reader SD
Up to 32 GB, FAT32

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
87xx External card reader SD
Up to 32 GB, FAT32

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
9x19 Back of the device microSD
Up to 32 GB, FAT32

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
9x22 Back of the device microSD
Up to 32 GB, FAT32

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
9x24 Back of the device microSD
Up to 32 GB, FAT32

Up to 1 TB, exFAT
9x27 Back of the device microSD
Up to 32 GB, FAT32

6 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to 1 TB,
formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

12 Introduction
Inserting Memory Cards (GPSMAP 8x10/8x12/8x16/9x19/9x22/9x24/9x27)
The internal card readers onGPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotters support up to a 32 GB microSD
memory card, formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher6. Use of an 8 GB or larger memory card with
speed class 10 is recommended. As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000
series chartplotters support up to a 1 TB microSD memory card, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or
higher.
1 Open the weather cap on the back of the chartplotter.

2 Insert the memory card .

NOTE: On a GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotter the memory card faces the other direction when you insert it.
Observe the indicator label near the card slot to verify correct orientation.
3 Press the card in until it clicks.
4 Clean and dry the weather cap.
NOTICE
To prevent corrosion, be sure the memory card and weather cap are thoroughly dry before closing the cap.
5 Press the weather cap firmly shut.

6 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to 1 TB,
formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

Introduction 13
Inserting a Memory Card (GPSMAP 8x17/8x22/8x24/87xx/9500)
NOTE: The memory card reader is not included with the chartplotter. It is sold as a separate accessory. You can
connect a USB memory card reader to the chartplotter, or you can connect the chartplotter to a Garmin BlueNet
network or Garmin Marine Network with another chartplotter model that has a built-in memory card slot.
As of software version 34.00, the external USB card reader supports up to a 1 TB SD memory card, formatted to
exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.
1 Open the door on the memory card reader.

2 Insert the memory card with the label facing away from the door.
3 Press the card in until it clicks.
4 Clean and dry the gasket and door.
NOTICE
To prevent corrosion, be sure the memory card, gasket, and door are thoroughly dry before closing the door.
5 Close the card reader door.

Acquiring GPS Satellite Signals

The device may need a clear view of the sky to acquire satellite signals. The time and date are set automatically
based on the GPS position.
1 Turn on the device.
2 Wait while the device locates satellites.
It may take 30 to 60 seconds to acquire satellite signals.
To view the GPS satellite signal strength, select > System > Satellite Positioning.
If the device loses satellite signals, a flashing question mark appears over the boat position indicator ( ) on the
chart.
For more information about GPS, go to garmin.com/aboutGPS. For help acquiring satellite signals, see My
device will not acquire GPS signals, page 227.

Selecting the GPS Source

You can select your preferred source for GPS data, if you have more than one GPS source.
1 Select > System > Satellite Positioning > Source.
2 Select the source for GPS data.

14 Introduction
 Customizing the Chartplotter
Home Screen
The home screen is an overlay that provides access to all of the features in the chartplotter. The features are
dependent on the accessories you have connected to the chartplotter. You may not have all of the options and
features discussed in this manual.
When viewing any screen, you can return to the home screen by selecting .

Settings menu button

Features buttons

Present time, present depth, or autopilot control button

Category tabs

Closes the home screen and returns to the previously open page

The categories tabs provide quick access to the main features of your chartplotter. For example, the Sonar tab
displays the views and screens related to the sonar feature. You can save items you commonly access to the
Pinned category.
TIP: To view the available categories tabs, you may need to click and drag a tab to scroll left or right.
The SmartMode items are geared toward an activity, such as cruising or docking. When a SmartMode button
is selected from the home screen, each display in the station can show unique information. For example, when
Cruising is selected from the home screen, one display can show the navigation chart and another display can
show the radar screen.
When multiple displays are installed on the Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network, you can group
them together into a station. A station enables the displays to work together, instead of as several separate
displays. You can customize the layout of the screens on each display, making each screen different on each
display. When you change the layout of a screen in one display, the changes appear on only that display. When
you change the name and symbol of the layout, those changes appear on all displays in the station, to maintain
a consistent appearance.

Customizing the Chartplotter 15

Pinning a Feature Button
You can add features, such as a chart, combo screen, or gauge to the Pinned category.
NOTE: If your chartplotter has been customized by the boat manufacturer, the Pinned category contains
customized items for your boat. You cannot edit the Pinned category.
1 Select a category, such as Charts.
2 Hold a feature button, such as Nav. Chart.
3 Select Add to Pinned > OK.
The feature is added to the Pinned category.
To see the Pinned items, select a Pinned item, and swipe to the left or right.
To remove a feature from the Pinned category, press and hold the feature to remove, select Remove Pin > Yes.

Rearranging the Category Items

You can customize the screen by rearranging the items in the categories.
1 Select a category to customize, such as Charts
2 Hold the button you want to move, such as Nav. Chart, until the menu appears.
3 Select Rearrange.
Arrows appear on the feature buttons.
4 Reselect the button to move.
5 Select the new location for the button.
6 Repeat until you finish customizing the screen.
7 Select Back or Close when finished.

Menu Bar
The menu bar along the bottom of the screen provides access to many functions of the chartplotter, the options
menu, and the home screen.

16 Customizing the Chartplotter

 Engages and disengages the autopilot

Creates a waypoint at your location

Opens a menu to access navigation features

Shows certain active function such as radar

Opens the home screen

TIP: Use the arrows to scroll through the Pinned features.

This is shown when there are no active alerts or warnings to resolve.

Opens a menu to view warnings and alerts and to access other communication such as AIS and DSC
information.

Replaces the when there is an active alert or warning to view.

TIP: The icon changes color to indicate severity.

Creates an SOS

Allows you to add an overlay to the current page

Opens the options menu

Hiding and Showing the Menu Bar

You can hide the menu bar automatically to make more screen space available.
1 Select > Preferences > Menu Bar Display > Auto.
After a short period of time on a main page, such as a chart, the menu bar collapses down.
2 Swipe the screen from the bottom up to show the menu bar again.

Setting the Vessel Type

You can select your boat type to configure the chartplotter settings and to use features customized for your
boat type.
1 Select > My Vessel > Vessel Type.
2 Select an option.

Adjusting the Backlight

1 Select > System > Sounds and Display > Backlight.
2 Adjust the backlight.
TIP: From any screen, press repeatedly to scroll through the brightness levels. This can be helpful when
the brightness is so low you cannot see the screen.

Adjusting the Color Mode

1 Select > System > Sounds and Display > Color Mode.
TIP: Select > Color Mode from any screen to access the color settings.
2 Select an option.

Customizing the Chartplotter 17

Adjusting the Color Theme
You can change the highlight and accent color used on most chartplotter screens.
1 Select > System > Sounds and Display > Color Theme.
2 Select an option.

Enabling Screen Lock

For anti-theft protection and to prevent unauthorized use of your device, you can enable the Screen Lock feature
which requires a PIN (Personal Identification Number). When enabled, you must enter the PIN to unlock the
screen each time you turn on the device. You can set up recovery questions and answers as prompts in case
you forget the PIN.
NOTICE
If you enable the Screen Lock feature, Garmin Support cannot retrieve the PIN or access your device. It is your
responsibility to provide the PIN to anyone authorized to use the vessel.
1 Select > System > Sounds and Display > Screen Lock > Setup.
2 Enter a memorable numeric PIN of 6 digits.
3 Reenter the PIN to verify.
4 When prompted, choose and answer three PIN recovery questions.
You can Disable or Reset the PIN and recovery questions as needed.

Turning On the Chartplotter Automatically

You can set the chartplotter to turn on automatically when the power is applied. Otherwise, you must turn on the
chartplotter by pressing .
Select > System > Auto Power Up.
NOTE: When Auto Power Up is On, and the chartplotter is turned off using , and power is removed and
reapplied within less than two minutes, you may need to press to restart the chartplotter.

Automatically Turning Off the System

You can set the chartplotter and the whole system to turn off automatically after it has been asleep for the
selected length of time. Otherwise, you must press and hold to turn off the system manually.
1 Select > System > Auto Power Off.
2 Select an option.

18 Customizing the Chartplotter

Customizing Pages
Creating a New Combination Page
You can create a custom combination page to suit your needs.
1 Select Combo > Add Combo.
2 Select a window.
3 Select a function for the window.
4 Repeat these steps for each window of the page.
5 Hold a window to rearrange it.
6 Hold a data field to select new data.
7 Select Layout, and select a layout.

8 Select Name, enter a name for the page, and select Done.
9 Select Overlays, and select which data to show.
10 Select Done when you have finished customizing the page.

Adding a SmartMode Layout

You can add SmartMode layouts to suit your needs. Each customization made to one SmartMode layout in a
station appears on all displays in the station.
1 Select SmartMode™ > Add Layout.
2 Select an option:
• To change the name, select Name & Symbol > Name, enter a new name, and select Done.
• To change the SmartMode symbol, select Name & Symbol > Symbol, and select a new symbol.
• To change the number of functions shown and the layout of the screen, select Layout, and select an
option.
• To change the function of a portion of the screen, select the window to change, and select a function.
• To change how the screens are split, drag the arrows to a new location.
• To change the data shown on the page and additional data bars, select Overlays, and select an option.
• To assign a preset to a portion of the SmartMode screen, select Favorites > Include, and select a preset.

Customizing the Chartplotter 19

Customizing the Layout of a SmartMode or Combination Page
You can customize the layout and data shown in the combination pages and SmartMode layouts. When you
change the layout of a page in a display you are interacting with, the change appears only on that display, except
for the SmartMode name and symbol. When you change the SmartMode name or symbol for the layout, the new
name or symbol appears on all displays in the station.
1 Open a page to customize.
2 Select Options.
3 Select Edit Layout or Edit Combo.
4 Select an option:
• To change the name, select Name or Name & Symbol > Name, enter a new name, and select Done.
• To change the SmartMode symbol, select Name & Symbol > Symbol, and select a new symbol.
• To change the number of functions shown and the layout of the screen, select Layout, and select an
option.
• To change the function of a portion of the screen, select the window to change, and select a function from
the list on the right.
• To change how the screens are split, drag the arrows to a new location.
• To change the data shown on the page and additional data bars, select Overlays, and select an option.
TIP: While viewing a screen with data overlay, hold an overlay box to quickly change the data in it.
• To assign a preset to a portion of the SmartMode screen, select Favorites > Include, and select a preset
from the list on the right.

Deleting a Combination Page

1 Select Combo.
2 Press and hold a combination page to delete.
3 Select Delete Combo > Yes.

Customizing the Data Overlays

You can customize the data in the data overlays shown on a screen.
1 Select an option based on the type of screen you are viewing:
• From a full screen view, select Options > Edit Overlays.
• From a combination screen, select Options > Edit Combo > Overlays.
• From a SmartMode screen, select Options > Edit Layout > Overlays.
TIP: To quickly change the data shown in an overlay box, hold the overlay box.
2 Select an item to customize the data and data bar:
• To show the data overlays, select Data, select the location, and select Back.
• To change the data shown in an overlay box, select the overlay box, select the new
data to show, and select Back.
• To customize the information shown when navigating, select Navigation, and select
an option.
• To turn on other data bars, select Top Bar or Bottom Bar, and select the necessary
options.
3 Select Done.

Resetting the Station Layouts

You can restore the layouts in this station to the factory default settings.
Select > System > Station Information > Reset Layouts.

20 Customizing the Chartplotter

Customizing the Startup Screen
You can personalize the image that is displayed when the chartplotter is turning on. For the best fit, the
image should be 50 MB or less and conform to the recommended dimensions (Recommended Startup Image
Dimensions, page 241).
1 Insert a memory card that contains the image you want to use.
2 Select > System > Sounds and Display > Startup Image > Select Image.
3 Select the memory card slot.
4 Select the image.
5 Select Set as Startup Image.
The new image is shown when turning on the chartplotter.

Presets
A preset is a collection of settings that optimize the screen or view. You can use particular presets to optimize
groups of settings for your activity. For example, some settings might be optimal for when you are fishing, and
others might be optimal for when you are cruising. Presets are available on some screens, such as charts, sonar
views, and radar views.
To select a preset for a compatible screen, select Options > , and select the preset.
When you are using a preset and you make changes to the settings or view, you can save the changes to the
preset or create a new preset based on the new customizations.

Managing Presets
You can customize the pre-loaded presets and edit presets you created.
1 From a compatible screen, select Options > > Manage.
2 Select a preset.
3 Select an option:
• To rename the preset, select Rename, enter a name, and select Done.
• To edit the preset, select Edit, and update the preset.
• To delete the preset, select Delete.
• To reset all presets to factory settings, select Reset All.

Saving a New Preset

After you have customized the settings and view of a screen, you can save the customization as a new preset.
1 From a compatible screen, change the settings and view.
2 Select Options > > Save > New.
3 Enter a name, and select Done.
4 Select an item, and select Include to include or exclude the item from the preset.

Controlling the Chartplotter

You can control the chartplotter using the touchscreen, using GRID remote controls, and using a Garmin voice
control device.

Voice Control
You can use your voice to control the chartplotter using a compatible headset.
NOTE: Chartplotters older than the GPSMAP 9000 series do not have built-in Bluetooth technology. For earlier
®

models, you must install the Garmin Voice Control USB module (010-13194-00) to enable voice control.

Controlling the Chartplotter 21

Changing the Voice Control Language
1 From the home screen, select > System > Sounds and Display > Voice Control.
2 Select Voice Control > Voice Language.
3 Select the voice control language.
NOTE: The voice control language can be different than the text language.

Supported Headsets
This device supports headsets and speakers with the following specifications:
• Bluetooth hands-free profile version 1.6 or higher
• mSBC audio codec (16 kHZ)
NOTE: Headset manufacturers often list these as "HD Voice" or "Wideband Speech" headsets.
A list of supported headsets is available at support.garmin.com/marine.

Pairing a Wireless Headset with a Garmin Chartplotter

1 On the chartplotter, select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Headsets.
2 Select Search for Devices.
3 Enable pairing mode on your headset according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The name of your headset appears on the chartplotter after it is detected.
4 Select the name of your headset.
5 Select Connect.
Your headset appears on the chartplotter as Paired and Connected.

Using a Wireless Headset with a Garmin Chartplotter

Before using a wireless headset for voice control, make sure the volume on your headset is sufficient to hear
voice responses.
1 Say OK Garmin.
2 Say a command (Chartplotter Voice Commands, page 23).
The chartplotter completes the action or provides a voice response.

22 Controlling the Chartplotter

Chartplotter Voice Commands
The voice command system is designed to detect natural speech. This is a list of commonly used voice
commands, but the device does not require these exact phrases (other than OK Garmin). You can try saying
variations of these commands in a way that is natural to you.

Voice Wake Word Function

OK Garmin Wakes up the chartplotter to listen for voice commands

Voice Help Command Function

What can I say? Shows a list of common voice commands

Device and Screen Functions

Voice Command Function

Show Navigation Chart Opens the navigation chart screen

Show Fishing Chart Opens the fishing chart screen

Show Radar Opens the radar screen

Show Sonar Opens the sonar screen

Zoom In Zooms in

Zoom Out Zooms out

Raise Brightness Raises the display brightness

Lower Brightness Lowers the display brightness

Automatic Brightness Enables automatic display brightness adjustment

Set the brightness to a specified level. For example, you can cay "Set brightness to
Set brightness to 80
80," and the brightness level will adjust to 80 percent.

Sleep Display Puts the display to sleep

Wake Display Wakes the display

Beeper Off Disables the chartplotter beeper

Beeper On Enables the chartplotter beeper

Lock Screen Locks the chartplotter screen

Unlock Screen Unlocks the chartplotter screen

Home Screen Opens the home screen

Screenshot Captures a screenshot

Vessel Functions

Voice Command Function

What's the fuel level? Replies with the present fuel level

What's the engine temperature? Replies with the present engine temperature

What's the system unit voltage? Replies with the present system unit voltage

Controlling the Chartplotter 23

Navigation Functions

Voice Command Function

Mark Waypoint Marks a waypoint at your present location

Show Waypoints Shows a list of all waypoints saved to the device

Clear Active Track Clears all active track information

What's the distance to the next waypoint? Replies with the distance to next set waypoint

Media Functions

Voice Command Function

Show Media Player Opens the media player

Play Music Plays the presently selected media

Pause Music Pauses the presently selected media

Resume Resumes playing the presently selected media

Previous Track Returns to the previous track

Next Track Skips to the next track

Mute Mutes the media volume

Unmute Unmutes the media volume

Lower Volume Lowers the media volume

Raise Volume Raises the media volume

Weather and Condition Functions

Voice Command Function

What's the water temperature? Replies with the present water temperature

What's the air temperature? Replies with the present air temperature

What's the wind speed? Replies with the present wind speed

What's the wind direction? Replies with the present wind direction

When is sunrise? Replies with the sunrise time for the present location

When is sunset? Replies with the sunset time for the present location

Tell me the Tide Info Replies with the present tide information

What time is it? Replies with the present time

What's the depth? Replies with the water depth at the present location

24 Controlling the Chartplotter

Radar Functions

Voice Command Function

Start Radar Transmission When a radar is in standby, this starts the radar transmission

Stop Radar Transmission Stops the radar transmission and places the radar in standby

Enable Echo Trail Enables the echo trail

Disable Echo Trail Disables the echo trail

Clear Echo Trail Clears the echo trail

Increase Radar Gain Increases the radar gain

Decrease Radar Gain Decreases the radar gain

Increase Radar Range Increases the radar range

Decrease Radar Range Decreases the radar range

Automatic Radar Gain High Sets the automatic radar gain to the highest setting

Automatic Radar Gain Low Sets the automatic radar gain to the lowest setting

Automatic Radar Gain Bird Sets the automatic radar gain to the setting best for locating birds

Manual Radar Gain Sets the radar gain to the last manual setting

Radar Rain Clutter On Turns on the rain clutter filter

Radar Rain Clutter Off Turns off the rain clutter filter

Increase Radar Rain Clutter Increases the level of the rain clutter setting

Decrease Radar Rain Clutter Decreases the level of the rain clutter setting

Radar Sea Clutter On Turns on the sea clutter filter

Radar Sea Clutter Off Turns off the sea clutter filter

Increase Radar Sea Clutter Increases the level of the sea clutter setting

Decrease Radar Sea Clutter Decreases the level of the sea clutter setting

Start MotionScope Turns on the MotionScope™ feature

Stop MotionScope Turns off the MotionScope feature

Controlling the Chartplotter 25

Sonar Functions

Voice Command Function

Show Traditional Sonar Opens the traditional sonar screen

Show Clear View Opens the Garmin ClearVü™ sonar screen

Show Side View Opens the Garmin SideVü™ sonar screen

Show Live Scope Opens the LiveScope screen

Increase Sonar Gain Increases the sonar gain level

Decrease Sonar Gain Decreases the sonar gain level

Sonar Gain Automatic Sets the sonar gain level to adjust automatically

Increase Sonar Range Increases the sonar range

Decrease Sonar Range Decreases the sonar range

Sonar Range Automatic Sets the sonar range to adjust automatically

Show Front View Opens the Garmin FrontVü™ sonar screen

Show Live Scope Down Opens the LiveScope down sonar screen

Show Live Scope Forward Opens the LiveScope forward sonar screen

Show Live View Opens the LiveVü sonar screen

Show Live View Down Opens the LiveVü down sonar screen

Show Live View Forward Opens the LiveVü forward sonar screen

Show Real View Down Opens the RealVü down sonar screen

Show Real View Historical Opens the RealVü historical sonar screen

Show Real View Forward Opens the RealVü forward sonar screen

Increase Sonar Forward Range Increases the sonar forward range

Decrease Sonar Forward Range Decreases the sonar forward range

Sonar Forward Range Automatic Sets the sonar forward range to adjust automatically

Increase Sonar Depth Range Increases the sonar depth range

Decrease Sonar Depth Range Decreases the sonar depth range

Sonar Depth Range Automatic Sets the sonar depth range to adjust automatically

26 Controlling the Chartplotter

GRID Remote Control
Pairing the GRID Device with the Chartplotter from the Chartplotter
NOTE: These steps are applicable to both the GRID device and the GRID 20 device.
Before you can pair the GRID 20 device with the chartplotter to make the data connection, you must supply
power using batteries, the included power cable, or a NMEA 2000 network connection.
Before you can pair the GRID device with the chartplotter, you must connect it to the Garmin Marine Network.
1 Select > System > Station Information > GRID™ Pairing > Add.
2 Select an action:
• On the GRID remote input device, press SELECT.
• On the GRID 20 remote input device, press and until the remote control beeps three times.

Pairing the GRID Device with the Chartplotter from the GRID Device
NOTE: This is not applicable to the GRID 20 device.
1 On the GRID remote input device, press + and HOME at the same time.
A selection page opens on all of the chartplotters on the Garmin Marine Network.
2 Rotate the wheel on the GRID remote input device to highlight Select on the chartplotter you want to control
with the GRID remote input device.
3 Press SELECT.

Pairing the GRID 20 Device with the Chartplotter from the GRID 20 Device
1 On the GRID 20 device connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the chartplotter, hold and until
the device beeps.
A GRID™ Pairing page opens on all of the chartplotters on the network.
2 Press or repeatedly on the GRID20 device until Add is highlighted on the chartplotter you want to
control with the GRID 20 device.
3 Press the knob to confirm.

Rotating the GRID Remote Input Device

For certain installation situations, you can rotate the orientation of the GRID device.
NOTE: This is not applicable to the GRID 20 device.
1 Select > Communications > Marine Network.
2 Select the GRID device.
3 Select GRID Direction and select the installation orientation.

ActiveCaptain App
WARNING
This feature allows users to submit information. Garmin makes no representations about the accuracy,
completeness, or timeliness of information submitted by users. Any use or reliance on the information
submitted by users is at your own risk.
The ActiveCaptain app provides a connection to your GPSMAP chartplotter, maps and charts, and the
ActiveCaptain community for a connected boating experience.
On your mobile device with the ActiveCaptain app, you can download, purchase, and update maps and charts.
You can use the app to easily and quickly transfer user data, such as waypoints and routes, connect to the
Garmin Quickdraw Contours Community, update device software, and plan your trip. You can also control the
GPSMAP chartplotter from the app using the Garmin Helm™ feature.
You can connect to the ActiveCaptain community for up-to-date feedback on marinas and other points of
interest. The app can push smart notifications, such as calls and texts, to your chartplotter display when paired.

ActiveCaptain App 27
ActiveCaptain and Garmin BlueNet Considerations
All ActiveCaptain features are compatible with Garmin BlueNet devices and legacy Garmin Marine Network
devices. When using the ActiveCaptain app with Garmin BlueNet devices, observe these considerations.
• If you have only Garmin BlueNet devices on your boat, you can insert the memory card required for the
ActiveCaptain app into any chartplotter connected to the Garmin BlueNet network.
• If you connected a legacy Garmin Marine Network chartplotter to the Garmin BlueNet network using a Garmin
BlueNet 30 gateway, you must insert the memory card required for the ActiveCaptain app into a Garmin
BlueNet chartplotter, such as a GPSMAP 9000 chartplotter.
◦ Inserting the ActiveCaptain memory card into a legacy Garmin Marine Network chartplotter connected to
a Garmin BlueNet network can result in poor system performance. For example, software updates started
from the ActiveCaptain app will update only legacy Garmin Marine Network devices, and none of the
Garmin BlueNet devices will be updated.
◦ Inserting the ActiveCaptain memory card into a Garmin BlueNet chartplotter will result in expected
performance. Software updates started from the ActiveCaptain app will update all connected devices,
including all Garmin BlueNet devices and all legacy Garmin Marine Network devices.
For more information about Garmin BlueNet technology, go to garmin.com/manuals/bluenet.

ActiveCaptain Roles
Your level of interaction with the GPSMAP device using the ActiveCaptain app depends on your role.

Feature Owner Guest

Register device, built-in maps, and supplemental map cards to account Yes No

Update software Yes Yes

Automatically transfer Garmin Quickdraw contours you have downloaded or created Yes No

Push smart notifications Yes Yes

Automatically transfer user data, such as waypoints and routes Yes No

Begin navigating to a specific waypoint or navigating a specific route, and send that waypoint
Yes Yes
or route to the GPSMAP device

28 ActiveCaptain App
Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain App
You can connect a mobile device to the GPSMAP device using the ActiveCaptain app. The app provides a
quick and easy way for you to interact with your GPSMAP device and complete such tasks as sharing data,
registering, updating the device software. When configured, you can also receive mobile device notifications.
1 From the GPSMAP device, select Vessel > ActiveCaptain.
2 From the ActiveCaptain page, select Wi-Fi Network > Wi-Fi > On.
3 Enter a name and password for this network.
4 Insert a memory card in the GPSMAP device's card slot (Memory Cards, page 12).
5 Select Set ActiveCaptain Card.
NOTICE
You might be prompted to format the memory card. Formatting the card deletes all information saved on the
card. This includes any saved user data, such as waypoints. Formatting the card is recommended, but not
required. Before formatting the card, you should save the data from the memory card onto the device internal
memory (Copying User Data from a Memory Card, page 217). After formatting the card for the ActiveCaptain
app, you can transfer the user data back to the card (Copying All User Data to a Memory Card, page 217).
NOTE: Formatting the memory card in the chartplotter retains the format type and is not able to change it. If
you want to change a card format from FAT32 to exFAT, for example, you must make that change using a
computer or other device before using the card in the chartplotter.
Be sure the card is inserted each time you want to use the ActiveCaptain feature.
6 From the application store on your mobile device, install and open the ActiveCaptain
app.
TIP: You can scan this QR code using your mobile device to download the app.
7 Bring the mobile device within 32 m (105 ft.) of the GPSMAP device.
8 From your mobile device settings, open the Wi‑Fi connections page, and connect to the
®

GPSMAP device, using the name and password you entered in step 3.

Enabling Smart Notifications

WARNING
Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the
water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.
Before your GPSMAP device can receive notifications, you must connect it to your mobile device and to the
ActiveCaptain app.
1 From the GPSMAP device, select ActiveCaptain > Smart Notifications > Enable Notifications.
2 Turn on Bluetooth technology in the mobile device settings.
3 Bring the devices within 10 m (33 ft.) of each other.
4 From the ActiveCaptain app on the mobile device, select Smart Notifications > Pair with Chartplotter.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to pair the app to the GPSMAP device.
6 When prompted, enter the key on your mobile device.
7 If necessary, adjust which notifications you receive in your mobile device settings.

ActiveCaptain App 29
Receiving Notifications
WARNING
Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the
water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.
Before your GPSMAP device can receive notifications, you must connect it to your mobile device and enable the
Smart Notifications feature (Enabling Smart Notifications, page 29).
When the Smart Notifications feature is enabled and your mobile device receives a notification, a pop-up
notification appears on the GPSMAP screen briefly.
NOTE: The available actions depend on the type of notification and your phone operating system.
• To answer a phone call on your phone, select Answer.
TIP: Have your phone nearby. The phone call is answered on your mobile phone, not on the chartplotter.
• To not answer the phone call, select Decline.
• To review the full message, select Review.
• To dismiss the pop-up notification, select OK or wait for the notification to close automatically.
• To remove the notification from the chartplotter and your mobile device, select Clear.

Managing Notifications
WARNING
Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the
water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.
Before you can manage the notifications, you must enable the Smart Notifications feature (Enabling Smart
Notifications, page 29).
When the Smart Notifications feature is enabled and your mobile device receives a notification, a pop-up
notification appears on the GPSMAP screen briefly. You can access and manage the notifications from the
ActiveCaptain screen.
1 Select ActiveCaptain > Smart Notifications > Messages.
TIP: You can also access these notifications from All Communications > Conversations in the messages
and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).
A list of notifications appear.
2 Select a notification.
3 Select an option:
NOTE: The available options vary based on your mobile device and the notification type.
• To dismiss and remove the notification from the chartplotter and your mobile device, select Clear or
Delete.
NOTE: This does not delete the message from the mobile device. This only dismisses and removes the
notification.
• To call the phone number back, select Call Back or Dial.

Making Notifications Private

You can turn off the pop-up notifications and disable the messages list on specific chartplotters for privacy. For
example, the captain could disable pop-up notifications and messages on the chartplotter used for fishing, but
allow notifications on the chartplotter used at the helm.
1 From the chartplotter you want notifications to be private, select ActiveCaptain > Smart Notifications.
2 Select an option:
• To turn off pop-up notifications on this chartplotter, select Popups.
• To turn off pop-up notifications and disable access to the messages list on this chartplotter, select
Visibility.

30 ActiveCaptain App
Updating Software with the ActiveCaptain App
If your device has Wi‑Fi technology, you can use the ActiveCaptain app to download and install the latest
software updates for your device.
NOTICE
Software updates may require the app to download large files. Regular data limits or charges from your Internet
service provider apply. Contact your Internet service provider for more information about data limits or charges.
The installation process can take several minutes.
1 Connect the mobile device to the GPSMAP device (Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain App, page 29).
2 When a software update is available and you have internet access on your mobile device, select Software
Updates > Download.
The ActiveCaptain app downloads the update to the mobile device. When you reconnect the app to the
GPSMAP device, the update is transferred to the device. After the transfer is complete, you are prompted to
install the update.
3 When you are prompted by the GPSMAP device, select an option to install the update.
• To update the software immediately, select OK.
• To delay the update, select Cancel. When you are ready to install the update, select ActiveCaptain >
Software Updates > Install Now.

Updating Charts with ActiveCaptain

NOTE: Before you can update your charts, you must register them (Getting Started with the ActiveCaptain App,
page 29).
You can use the ActiveCaptain app to download and transfer the latest chart updates for your device. To
shorten download time and conserve storage space, you can download only the areas of the chart you need.
After you download a chart or area for the first time, updates are automatic each time you open ActiveCaptain.
If you are downloading an entire chart, you can use the Garmin Express™ app to download the map onto
a memory card (Updating Your Charts Using the Garmin Express App, page 221). The Garmin Express app
downloads large charts more quickly than the ActiveCaptain app.
NOTICE
Chart updates may require the app to download large files. Regular data limits or charges from your internet
service provider apply. Contact your internet service provider for more information about data limits or charges.
1 When you have internet access on your mobile device, select Chart > > Download Charts.
2 Select the area to download.
3 Select Download.
4 If necessary, select the map to update.
The ActiveCaptain app downloads the update to the mobile device. When you reconnect the app to the
GPSMAP device, the update is transferred to that device. After the transfer is complete, the updated charts
are available for use.

Chart Subscriptions
A chart subscription allows you to access the latest chart updates and additional content using the
ActiveCaptain mobile app. You can download updated charts and content each day.
You can purchase, activate, and renew chart subscriptions using the ActiveCaptain mobile app (Detailed Charts,
page 34).

Communication with Wireless Devices

The chartplotters can create a wireless network to which you can connect wireless devices.
Connecting wireless devices allows you to use Garmin apps, such as ActiveCaptain.

Communication with Wireless Devices 31

Wi‑Fi Network
Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network
This device can host a Wi‑Fi network to which you can connect wireless devices such as another chartplotter or
your phone. The first time you access the wireless network settings, you are prompted to set up the network.
1 Select > Communications > Wi-Fi Network > Wi-Fi > On > OK.
2 If necessary, enter a name for this wireless network.
3 Enter a password.
You will need this password to access the wireless network from a wireless device, such as your phone. The
password is case-sensitive.

Connecting a Wireless Device to the Chartplotter

Before you can connect a wireless device to the chartplotter wireless network, you must configure the
chartplotter wireless network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page 32).
You can connect multiple wireless devices to the chartplotter to share data.
1 From the wireless device, turn on the Wi‑Fi technology and search for wireless networks.
2 Select the name of your chartplotter wireless network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page 32).
3 Enter the chartplotter password.

Changing the Wireless Channel

You can change the wireless channel if you have trouble finding or connecting to a device, or if you experience
interference.
1 Select > Communications > Wi-Fi Network > Advanced > Channel.
2 Enter a new channel.
You do not need to change the wireless channel of devices connected to this network.

Changing the Wi‑Fi Host

If there are multiple chartplotters with Wi‑Fi technology on the Garmin marine network, you can change which
chartplotter is the Wi‑Fi host. This can be helpful if you are having trouble with Wi‑Fi communications. Changing
the Wi‑Fi host allows you to select a chartplotter that is physically closer to your mobile device.
1 Select > Communications > Wi-Fi Network > Advanced > Wi-Fi Host.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Wireless Remote Control

These steps are not applicable to the GRID remote input devices Pairing the GRID Device with the Chartplotter
from the Chartplotter, page 27.

Pairing the Wireless Remote Control With the Chartplotter

Before you can use the wireless remote control with a chartplotter, you must pair the remote with the
chartplotter.
You can connect a single remote to multiple plotters, and then press the pairing key to switch between the
chartplotters.
1 Select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > GPSMAP® Remote.
2 Select New Connection.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

32 Communication with Wireless Devices

Turning On and Off the Remote Backlight
Turning off the remote backlight can significantly increase the battery life.
1 On the chartplotter, select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > GPSMAP®
Remote > Backlight.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Disconnecting the Remote Control from All Chartplotters

1 On the chartplotter, select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > GPSMAP®
Remote > Disconnect All.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Wireless Wind Sensor

Connecting a Wireless Sensor to the Chartplotter
You can view data from a compatible wireless sensor on the chartplotter.
1 Select > Communications > Wireless Devices.
2 Select the wind sensor.
3 Select Enable.
The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the wireless sensor.
To view data from the sensor, add the data to a data field or gauge.

Adjusting the Wind Sensor Orientation

You should adjust this setting if the sensor does not face the front of the boat, exactly parallel to the center line.
NOTE: The opening where the cable connects to the pole indicates the front of the sensor.
1 Estimate the angle, in degrees clockwise around the mast, by which the sensor points away from the center
of the front of the boat:
• If the sensor is facing starboard, the angle should be between 1 and 180 degrees.
• If the sensor is facing port, the angle should be between -1 and -180 degrees.
2 Select > Communications > Wireless Devices.
3 Select the wind sensor.
4 Select Wind Angle Offset.
5 Enter the angle observed in step 1.
6 Select Done.

Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin Watch

You can connect a compatible Garmin watch to a compatible chartplotter to view data from the chartplotter.
1 Bring the Garmin watch within range (3 m) of the chartplotter.
2 From the watch clock screen, select START > Boat Data > START.
NOTE: If you have already connected to a chartplotter, and would like to connect to a different chartplotter,
open the Boat Data screen, hold UP, and select Pair new.
3 On the chartplotter, select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Boat Data >
Enable > New Connection.
The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the wearable device.
4 Compare the code shown on the chartplotter with the one shown on the watch.
5 If the codes match, select Yes to complete the pairing process.
After the devices are paired, they connect automatically when they are turned on and within range.

Communication with Wireless Devices 33

Viewing Boat Data on a Garmin Nautix™ Device
You can connect a Garmin Nautix device to the chartplotter to view charplotter data on the Garmin Nautix
device.
NOTE: You can connect a Garmin Nautix device to multiple compatible devices for better coverage on larger
vessels.
1 Bring the a Garmin Nautix device within range (3 m) of the chartplotter.
The device automatically looks for all compatible devices within range.
2 If necessary, from the wearable device menu, select Device Connections > Pair New Device.
3 On the chartplotter, select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Boat Data >
Enable Connections > New Connection.
The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the wearable device.
After the devices are paired, they connect automatically when they are turned on and within range.

Charts and 3D Chart Views

The charts and 3D chart views that are available depend on the map data and accessories used.
NOTE: 3D chart views are available with premium charts, in some areas.
You can access the charts and 3D chart views by selecting Charts.
Nav. Chart: Shows navigation data available on your pre-loaded maps and from supplemental maps, if available.
The data includes buoys, lights, cables, depth soundings, marinas, and tide stations in an overhead view.
Fishing Chart: Provides a detailed view of the bottom contours and depth soundings on the chart. This
chart removes navigational data from the chart, provides detailed bathymetric data, and enhances bottom
contours for depth recognition. This chart is best for offshore deep-sea fishing.
NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.
Perspective 3D: Provides a view from above and behind the boat (according to your course) and provides a
visual navigation aid. This view is helpful when navigating tricky shoals, reefs, bridges, or channels, and is
beneficial when trying to identify entry and exit routes in unfamiliar harbors or anchorages.
3D Chart: Shows a detailed, three-dimensional view from above and behind the boat (according to your course)
and provides a visual navigation aid. This view is helpful when navigating tricky shoals, reefs, bridges, or
channels, and when trying to identify entry and exit routes in unfamiliar harbors or anchorages.
Fish Eye 3D: Provides an underwater view that visually represents the sea floor according to the chart
information. When a sonar transducer is connected, suspended targets (such as fish) are indicated by red,
green, and yellow spheres. Red indicates the largest targets and green indicates the smallest.
Relief Shading: Provides high resolution elevation shading of lakes and coastal waters. This chart can be
helpful for fishing and diving.
NOTE: The Relief Shading chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

Detailed Charts
This chartplotter is compatible with the latest Garmin Navionics+™ cartography and additional premium chart
features. You can obtain these charts in three ways:
• You can purchase a chartplotter with preloaded detailed charts.
• You can purchase chart regions on a memory card from your Garmin dealer or from garmin.com.
• You can purchase chart regions in the ActiveCaptain app, and download them to your chartplotter.
NOTE: You must activate preloaded charts and charts purchased on a memory card using the ActiveCaptain
app before you can access the full chart features on your chartplotter.

34 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Activating a Marine Chart Subscription
Before you can use the full features of Garmin Navionics+ charts that are preloaded on your device or
purchased on a memory card, you must activate your subscription using the ActiveCaptain app.
Your subscription allows you to access the latest chart updates and additional content included with your
purchase.
1 If you purchased charts on a memory card, insert the card into a memory card slot on the chartplotter or
Garmin memory card reader.
2 Open the ActiveCaptain app on your mobile device, and connect it to the chartplotter (Getting Started with the
ActiveCaptain App, page 29).
3 After the ActiveCaptain app connects to the chartplotter, make sure your mobile device is connected to the
internet.
4 In the ActiveCaptain app, select Chart > > My Charts, and verify that an active subscription for the charts
is shown in the list.
5 If necessary, connect the ActiveCaptain app to the chartplotter to complete the activation process.
The ActiveCaptain app activates the subscription automatically after it connects to the internet and then to
the chartplotter. The ActiveCaptain app shows the subscription status in the My Charts list.
NOTE: It might take a few hours to verify the new subscription.

Purchasing a Chart Subscription with ActiveCaptain

1 Connect your mobile device to the internet and open the ActiveCaptain app.
2 Select Chart > > My Charts > Add a Chart Subscription.
3 Select a chart.
4 Select Subscribe Now.
NOTE: It might take a few hours to display the new subscription.

Renewing Your Subscription

Your cartography subscription expires after one year. After the subscription expires, you can continue using the
downloaded charts, but you are not able to download the latest chart updates or additional content.
1 Connect your mobile device to the internet and open the ActiveCaptain app.
2 Select Chart > > My Charts.
3 Select the chart to renew.
4 Select Renew Now.
NOTE: It might take a few hours to display the renewed subscription.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 35

Navigation Chart and Fishing Chart
NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.
The Nav. Chart is optimized for navigation. You can plan a course, view map information, and use the chart as a
navigational aid. To open the Nav. Chart, select Charts > Nav. Chart.

The Fishing Chart provides a detailed view with more bottom detail and fishing content. This chart is optimized
for use when fishing. To open the Fishing Chart, select Charts > Fishing Chart.

Chart Symbols
This table contains some of the common symbols you might see on the detailed charts.

Icon Description

Buoy

Information

Marine services

Tide station

Current station

Overhead photo available

Perspective photo available

Other features common to most charts include depth contour lines, intertidal zones, spot soundings (as
depicted on the original paper chart), navigational aids and symbols, obstructions, and cable areas.

Zooming In and Out Using the Touchscreen

You can quickly zoom in and out of many screens, such as the charts and sonar views.
• Pinch two fingers together to zoom out.
• Spread two fingers apart to zoom in.

36 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Measuring a Distance on the Chart
1 From a chart, select a location.
2 Select Measure.
A push pin appears on the screen at your present location. The distance and angle from the pin is listed in
the corner.
TIP: To reset the pin and measure from the current location of the cursor, select Set Reference.

Creating a Waypoint on the Chart

1 From a chart, select a location or object.
2 Select .

Viewing Location and Object Information on a Chart

You can view information, such as tide, current, celestial, chart notes, or local services, about a location or an
object on the Navigation chart or the Fishing chart.
1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a location or object.
A list of options appears. The options that appear vary based on the location or object you selected.
2 If necessary, select .
3 Select Information.

Viewing Details about Navaids

From the Navigation chart, Fishing chart, Perspective 3D chart view, or Mariner’s Eye 3D chart view, you can
view details about various types of navigation aids, including beacons, lights, and obstructions.
NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.
NOTE: 3D chart views are available with premium charts, in some areas.
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select a navaid.
2 Select the name of the navaid.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 37

Navigating to a Point on the Chart
WARNING
All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance
or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and
conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,
personal injury, or death.
The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and
bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or
other obstacles that may be in your path.
When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual
sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.
NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.
NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.
1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a location.
2 If necessary, select Navigate To.
3 Select an option:
• To navigate directly to the location, select Go To or .
• To create a route to the location, including turns, select Route To or .
• To use Auto Guidance, select Auto Guidance or .
4 Review the course indicated by the magenta line (Route Color Coding, page 55).
NOTE: When using Auto Guidance, a gray segment within any part of the magenta line indicates that Auto
Guidance cannot calculate part of the Auto Guidance line. This is due to the settings for minimum safe water
depth and minimum safe obstacle height.
5 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

38 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Premium Chart Features
WARNING
All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance
or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and
conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,
personal injury, or death.
The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and
bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or
other obstacles that may be in your path.
NOTE: Not all models support all charts.
Optional premium charts, such as Garmin Navionics Vision+™, allow you to get the most out of your chartplotter.
In addition to detailed marine charting, premium charts may contain these features, which are available in some
areas.
NOTE: Not all premium chart features are available immediately after purchase. Before you can access all
premium features you must activate your chart subscription and choose to download specific features using
the ActiveCaptain app (Activating a Marine Chart Subscription, page 35).
Mariner’s Eye 3D: Provides a view from above and behind the boat for a three-dimensional navigation aid.
Fish Eye 3D: Provides an underwater, three-dimensional view that visually represents the sea floor according to
the information on the chart.
Fishing Charts: Shows the chart with enhanced bottom contours and without navigational data. This chart
works well for offshore deep-sea fishing.
High Resolution Satellite Imagery: Provides high-resolution satellite images for a realistic view of the land and
water on the Navigation chart (Showing Satellite Imagery on the Navigation Chart, page 41).
Aerial Photos: Shows marinas and other navigationally significant aerial photos to help you visualize your
surroundings (Viewing Aerial Photos of Landmarks, page 42).
Detailed Roads and POI data: Shows detailed road and point of interest (POI) data, which includes highly
detailed coastal roads and POIs such as restaurants, lodging, and local attractions.
Auto Guidance: Uses specified information about your vessel and chart data to determine the best path to your
destination.
Sonar Imagery: Shows sonar imagery to help show the density of the bottom.
Relief Shading: Shows the gradient of the bottom with shading.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 39

Fish Eye 3D Chart View
Using the depth contour lines of the premium charts, such as Garmin Navionics Vision+, the Fish Eye 3D chart
view provides an underwater view of the sea floor or lake bottom.
Suspended targets, such as fish, are indicated by red, green, and yellow spheres. Red indicates the largest
targets and green indicates the smallest.

Viewing Tide Station Information

WARNING
Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted
water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the
water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
The icon on the chart indicates a tide station. You can view a detailed graph for a tide station to help predict
the tide level at different times or on different days.
NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.
1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a tide station.
Tide direction and tide level information appear near .
2 Select the station name.

40 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Animated Tide and Current Indicators
WARNING
Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted
water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the
water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.
You can view indicators for animated tide station and current direction on the Navigation chart or the Fishing
chart. You must also enable animated icons in the chart settings (Showing Tides and Current Indicators,
page 41).
An indicator for a tide station appears on the chart as a vertical bar graph with an arrow. A red arrow pointing
downward indicates a falling tide, and a blue arrow pointing upward indicates a rising tide. When you move the
cursor over the tide station indicator, the height of the tide at the station appears above the station indicator.
Current direction indicators appear as arrows on the chart. The direction of each arrow indicates the direction
of the current at a specific location on the chart. The color of the current arrow indicates the range of speed for
the current at that location. When you move the cursor over the current direction indicator, the specific current
speed at the location appears above the direction indicator.

Color Current Speed Range

Yellow 0 to 1 knot

Orange 1 to 2 knots

Red 2 or more knots

Showing Tides and Current Indicators

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.
You can show static or animated tide and current station indicators on the Navigation chart or Fishing chart.
1 From the Navigation or Fishing chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Tides & Currents.
2 Select an option:
• To show animated tide station indicators and animated current direction indicators on the chart, select
Animated.
• To enables the tides and current slider, which sets the time for which tides and currents are reported on
the map, select Slider.

Showing Satellite Imagery on the Navigation Chart

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.
You can overlay high-resolution satellite images on the land or on both land and sea portions of the Navigation
chart.
NOTE: When enabled, high-resolution satellite images are present only at lower zoom levels. If you cannot see
high-resolution images in your optional chart region, you can select to zoom in. You also can set the detail
level higher by changing the map zoom detail.
1 From the Navigation chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Satellite Photos.
2 Select an option:
• Select Land Only to show standard chart information on the water, with photos overlaying the land.
NOTE: This setting must be enabled to view Standard Mapping charts.
®

• Select Photo Map to show photos on both the water and the land at a specified opacity. Use the slider bar
to adjust the photo opacity. The higher you set the percentage, the more the satellite photos cover both
land and water.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 41

Viewing Aerial Photos of Landmarks
Before you can view aerial photos on the Navigation chart, you must turn on the Photo Points setting in the
chart setup (Chart Layers, page 47).
NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.
You can use aerial photographs of landmarks, marinas, and harbors to help orient yourself to your surroundings
or to acquaint yourself with a marina or a harbor prior to arrival.
1 From the Navigation chart, select a camera icon:
• To view an overhead photo, select .
• To view a perspective photo, select . The photo was taken from the location of the camera, pointed
in the direction of the cone.
2 Select Photo.

Automatic Identification System

The Automatic Identification System (AIS) enables you to identify and track other vessels, and alerts you to
area traffic. When connected to an external AIS device, the chartplotter can show some AIS information about
other vessels that are within range, that are equipped with a transponder, and that are actively transmitting AIS
information.
The information reported for each vessel includes the Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI), location, GPS
speed, GPS heading, time that has elapsed since the last position of the vessel was reported, nearest approach,
and time to the nearest approach.
Some chartplotter models also support Blue Force Tracking. Vessels being tracked with Blue Force Tracking are
indicated on the chartplotter with a blue-green color.

AIS Targeting Symbols

Symbol Description

AIS vessel. The vessel is reporting AIS information. The direction in which the triangle is pointing
indicates the direction in which the AIS vessel is moving.

Target is selected.

Target is activated. The target appears larger on the chart. A green line attached to the target
indicates the heading of the target. The MMSI, speed, and direction of the vessel appear beneath the
target, if the details setting has been set to Show. If the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, a
message banner appears.

Target is lost. A green X indicates that the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, and the
chartplotter displays a message banner asking whether the vessel should continue to be tracked.
If you discontinue vessel tracking, the lost target symbol disappears from the chart or the 3D chart
view.

Dangerous target in range. The target flashes while an alarm sounds and a message banner
appears. After the alarm has been acknowledged, a solid red triangle with a red line attached to it
indicates the location and the heading of the target. If the safe-zone collision alarm has been set to
Off, the target flashes, but the audible alarm does not sound and the alarm banner does not appear.
If the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, a message banner appears.

Dangerous target is lost. A red X indicates that the AIS transmission from the vessel is lost, and the
chartplotter displays a message banner asking whether the vessel should continue to be tracked. If
you discontinue vessel tracking, the lost dangerous target symbol disappears from the chart or the
3D chart view.

The location of this symbol indicates the closest point of approach to a dangerous target, and the
numbers near the symbol indicate the time to the closest point of approach to that target.

42 Charts and 3D Chart Views

NOTE: Vessels being tracked with the Blue Force Tracking feature are indicated with a blue-green color
regardless of their status.

Heading and Projected Course of Activated AIS Targets

When heading and course over ground information are provided by an activated AIS target, the heading of the
target appears on a chart as a solid line attached to the AIS target symbol. A heading line does not appear on a
3D chart view.
The projected course of an activated AIS target appears as a dashed line on a chart or a 3D chart view. The
length of the projected course line is based on the value of the projected heading setting. If an activated AIS
target is not transmitting speed information, or if the vessel is not moving, a projected course line does not
appear. Changes in the speed, course over ground, or rate of turn information transmitted by the vessel can
impact the calculation of the projected course line.
When course over ground, heading, and rate of turn information are provided by an activated AIS target, the
projected course of the target is calculated based on the course over ground and the rate of turn information.
The direction in which the target is turning, which is also based on the rate of turn information, is indicated by
the direction of the barb at the end of the heading line. The length of the barb does not change.

When course over ground and heading information are provided by an activated AIS target, but rate of turn
information is not provided, the projected course of the target is calculated based on the course over ground
information.

Viewing a List of AIS Threats

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > AIS > AIS List.
TIP: You can quickly access the AIS list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 If necessary, select Display Options to sort or filter the items in the list.

Activating a Target for an AIS Vessel

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > AIS > AIS List.
TIP: You can quickly access the AIS list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a vessel from the list.
3 Select Review and review the target information.
4 Select Activate Target.
Viewing Information about a Targeted AIS Vessel
You can view the AIS signal status, MMSI, GPS speed, GPS heading, and other information that is reported about
a targeted AIS vessel.
1 From a chart or a 3D chart view, select an AIS vessel.
2 Select AIS Vessel.
Deactivating a Target for an AIS Vessel
1 From a chart or a 3D chart view, select an AIS vessel.
2 Select AIS Vessel > Deactivate.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 43

Showing AIS Vessels on a Chart or 3D Chart View
Before you can use AIS, you must connect the chartplotter to an external AIS device and receive active
transponder signals from other vessels.
You can configure how other vessels appear on a chart or on a 3D chart view. The display range configured
for one chart or one 3D chart view are applied only to that chart or to that 3D chart view. The details, projected
heading, and trails settings configured for one chart or one 3D chart view are applied to all charts and to all 3D
chart views.
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > AIS.
2 Select an option:
• To show the tracks of AIS vessels, select AIS Trails and adjust the trail length if needed. .
• To indicate the distance from your location in which AIS vessels appear, select Display Range, and select
a distance.
• To show a list of AIS-activated vessels, select AIS List.

Setting the Safe-Zone Collision Alarm

WARNING
The safe-zone collision alarm is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent collisions in all
circumstances. You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel, for remaining aware of
your surroundings, and for using safe judgment on the water at all times.

CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
Before you can set a collision alarm, you must connect an AIS device to the same network as a compatible
chartplotter.
The safe-zone collision alarm is used for AIS vessels. When a radar is connected to the same network, you can
also use the safe-zone collision alarm for MARPA targets. The safe zone is used for collision avoidance and can
be customized.
1 Select > Alarms > Collision Alarm > On.
A message banner appears and an alarm sounds when an AIS-activated vessel enters the safe-zone area
around your boat. The vessel is also labeled as dangerous on the screen. When the alarm is off, the message
banner and audible alarm are disabled, but the vessel is still labeled as dangerous on the screen.
2 Select Range, and select a distance for the safe-zone radius around your vessel.
3 Select Time To, and select a time at which the alarm will sound if a target is determined to intersect the safe
zone.
For example, to be notified of a pending intersection 10 minutes before it will likely occur, set Time To to 10,
and the alarm will sound 10 minutes before the vessel intersects the safe zone.
4 Select MARPA Alarm, and select an option for when the alarm sounds for MARPA-tagged objects.
A message banner appears and an alarm sounds when a MARPA-tagged object enters the safe-zone area
around your boat. The object is also labeled as dangerous on the screen. When the alarm is off, the message
banner and audible alarm are disabled, but the object is still labeled as dangerous on the screen.

44 Charts and 3D Chart Views

AIS Aids to Navigation
An AIS aid to navigation (ATON) is any kind of navigational aid that is transmitted over the AIS radio. ATONs are
displayed on the charts and have identifying information, such as position and type.
There are three main kinds of AIS ATONs. Real ATONs physically exist and send their identifying and location
information from their actual location. Synthetic ATONs physically exist, and their identifying and location
information is sent from another location. Virtual ATONs do not actually exist, and their identifying and location
information is sent from another location.
You can view AIS ATONs on the chart when the chartplotter is connected to a compatible AIS radio. To show
AIS ATONs, from a chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Navaid > ATONs. You can view more information
about an ATON if you select the ATON on the chart.

Symbol Meaning

Real or synthetic ATON

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark North

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark South

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark East

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark West

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark Special

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark Safe

Real or synthetic ATON: Topmark Danger

Virtual ATON

Virtual ATON: Topmark North

Virtual ATON: Topmark South

Virtual ATON: Topmark East

Virtual ATON: Topmark West

Virtual ATON: Topmark Special

Virtual ATON: Topmark Safe

Virtual ATON: Topmark Danger

Charts and 3D Chart Views 45

AIS Distress Signals
Self-contained AIS distress signal devices transmit emergency position reports when activated. The chartplotter
can receive signals from Search and Rescue Transmitters (SART), Emergency Position Indicating Radio
Beacons (EPIRB), and other man overboard signals. Distress signal transmissions are different than standard
AIS transmissions, so they appear differently on the chartplotter. Instead of tracking a distress signal
transmission for collision avoidance, you track a distress signal transmission to locate and assist a vessel
or person.
Navigating to a Distress Signal Transmission
When you receive a distress signal transmission, a distress signal alarm appears.
Select Review > Go To to begin navigation to the transmission.
AIS Distress Signal Device Targeting Symbols
Symbol Description

AIS distress signal device transmission. Select to see more information about the transmission and
begin navigation.

Transmission lost.

Transmission test. Appears when a vessel initiates a test of their distress signal device, and does not
represent a true emergency.

Transmission test lost.

Enabling AIS Transmission Test Alerts

To avoid a large number of test alerts and symbols in crowded areas such as marinas, you can select to receive
or ignore AIS test messages. To test an AIS emergency device, you must enable the chartplotter to receive test
alerts.
1 Select > Alarms > AIS.
2 Select an option:
• To receive or ignore Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPRIB) test signals, select AIS-EPIRB
Test.
• To receive or ignore Man Overboard (MOB) test signals, select AIS-MOB Test.
• To receive or ignore Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) test signals, select AIS-SART Test.

Turning Off AIS Reception

AIS signal reception is turned on by default.
Select > Other Vessels > AIS > Off.
All AIS functionality on all charts and 3D chart views is disabled. This includes AIS vessel targeting and
tracking, collision alarms that result from AIS vessel targeting and tracking, and the display of information
about AIS vessels.

46 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Chart Menu
NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts. Some options require premium maps or connected accessories, such
as radar.
NOTE: The menus may contain some settings that are not supported by your installed charts or your present
location. If you make changes to those settings, the changes will not impact the chart view.
From a chart, select Options.
Layers: Adjusts the appearance of the different items on the charts (Chart Layers, page 47).
Quickdraw Contours: Turns on bottom contour drawing, and allows you to create fishing map labels (Garmin
Quickdraw Contours Mapping, page 52).
Settings: Adjusts the chart settings (Chart Settings, page 51).
Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page 20).

Chart Layers
You can turn on and off chart layers and customize features of the charts. Each setting is specific to the chart
or chart view being used.
NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts and chartplotter models. Some options require premium maps or
connected accessories.
NOTE: The menus may contain some settings that are not supported by your installed charts or your present
location. If you make changes to those settings, the changes will not impact the chart view.
From a chart, select Options > Layers.
Chart: Shows and hides chart-related items (Chart Layer Settings, page 47).
My Vessel: Shows and hides items relating to the boat (My Vessel Layer Settings, page 48).
Manage User Data: Shows and hides user data, such as waypoints, boundaries, and tracks, and opens user data
lists (User Data Layer Settings, page 49).
Other Vessels: Adjusts how other vessels are shown (Other Vessels Layer Settings, page 49).
Water: Shows and hides depth items (Water Layer Settings, page 49).
Quickdraw Contours: Shows and hides Garmin Quickdraw Contours data (Garmin Quickdraw Contours Settings,
page 54).
Weather: Shows and hides weather-related items (Weather Layer Settings, page 50).
Chart Layer Settings
From a chart, select Options > Layers > Chart.
Satellite Photos: Shows high-resolution satellite images on the land or on both land and sea portions of the
Navigation chart, when certain premium maps are used (Showing Satellite Imagery on the Navigation Chart,
page 41).
NOTE: This setting must be enabled to view Standard Mapping charts.
Tides & Currents: Shows current station indicators and tide station indicators on the chart (Showing Tides and
Current Indicators, page 41) and enables the tides and current slider, which sets the time for which tides and
currents are reported on the map.
Land POIs: Shows points of interest on land.
Navaid: Shows navigational aids, such as ATONs and flashing lights, on the chart. Allows you to select NOAA or
IALA navaid type.
Service Points: Shows locations for marine services.
Depth: Adjusts the items on the depth layer (Depth Layer Settings, page 48).
Restricted Areas: Shows information about restricted areas on the chart.
Photo Points: Shows camera icons for aerial photos (Viewing Aerial Photos of Landmarks, page 42).

Charts and 3D Chart Views 47

Depth Layer Settings
From a chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Depth.
Depth Shading: Specifies an upper and lower depth to shade between.
Shallow Shading: Sets the shades from the shoreline to the specified depth.
Spot Depths: Turns on spot soundings and sets a dangerous depth. Spot depths that are equal to or more
shallow than the dangerous depth are indicated by red text.
Fishing Contours: Sets the zoom level for a detailed view of bottom contours and depth soundings and
simplifies map presentation for optimal use while fishing.
My Vessel Layer Settings
From a chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel.
Heading Line: Shows and adjusts the heading line, which is a line drawn on the map from the bow of the boat in
the direction of travel (Setting the Heading Line and Angle Markers, page 76).
Active Tracks: Shows the active track on the chart and opens the Active Track Options menu.
Wind Rose: Shows a visual representation of the wind angle or direction provided by the connected wind sensor
and sets the wind source.
Compass Rose: Shows a compass rose around your boat, indicating compass direction oriented to the heading
of the boat. Enabling this option disables the Wind Rose option.
Vessel Icon: Sets the icon that represents your present location on the chart.
Laylines Settings
To use the laylines features, you must connect a wind sensor to the chartplotter.
When in sailing mode (Setting the Vessel Type for Sailing Features, page 69), you can display laylines on the
navigation chart. Laylines can be very helpful when racing.

From the Navigation chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel > Laylines > Setup.
Sailing Ang.: Allows you to select how the device calculates laylines. The Actual option calculates the laylines
using the measured wind angle from the wind sensor. The Manual option calculates the laylines using
manually entered windward and leeward angles. The Polar Table option calculates the laylines based on the
imported polar table data (Importing a Polar Table Manually, page 72).
Windward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the windward sailing angle.
Leeward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the leeward sailing angle.
Tide Correction: Corrects the laylines based on the tide.
Layline Filter: Filters the layline data based on the time interval entered. For a smoother layline that filters out
some of the changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a higher number. For laylines that display
a higher sensitivity to changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a lower number.

48 Charts and 3D Chart Views

User Data Layer Settings
You can show user data, such as waypoints, boundaries, and tracks, on the charts.
From a chart, select Options > Layers > Manage User Data.
Waypoints: Shows waypoints on the chart and opens the list of waypoints.
Boundaries: Shows boundaries on the chart and opens the list of boundaries.
Tracks: Shows tracks on the chart.
Other Vessels Layer Settings
NOTE: These options require connected accessories, such as an AIS receiver or VHF radio.
From a chart, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels.
DSC: Sets how DSC vessels and trails appear on the chart, and shows the DSC list.
AIS: Sets how AIS vessels and trails appear on the chart, and shows the AIS list.
MARPA: Sets how MARPA vessels and trails appear on the chart, and shows the MARPA list.
Details: Shows other vessel details on the chart.
Proj. Heading: Sets the projected heading time for AIS-activated vessels. This also sets the projected heading
time for MARPA-tagged vessels.
Collision Alarm: Sets the safe-zone collision alarm (Setting the Safe-Zone Collision Alarm, page 44).
Water Layer Settings
From a chart, select Options > Layers > Water.
NOTE: The menu may contain some settings that are not supported by your installed charts or your present
location. If you make changes to those settings, the changes will not impact the chart view.
NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts, views, and chartplotter models. Some options require premium maps
or connected accessories.
Depth Shading: Specifies an upper and lower depth to shade between (Depth Range Shading, page 50).
Shallow Shading: Sets the shades from the shoreline to the specified depth.
Spot Depths: Turns on spot soundings and sets a dangerous depth. Spot depths that are equal to or more
shallow than the dangerous depth are indicated by red text.
Fishing Contours: Sets the zoom level for a detailed view of bottom contours and depth soundings and
simplifies map presentation for optimal use while fishing.
Relief Shading: Shows the gradient of the bottom with shading. This feature is available only with some
premium maps.
Sonar Imagery: Shows sonar imagery to help show the density of the bottom. This feature is available only with
some premium maps.
Lake Level: Sets the present water level of the lake. This feature is available only with some premium maps.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 49

Depth Range Shading
You can set color ranges on your map to show the water depths where your target fish are currently biting. You
can set deeper ranges to monitor how quickly the bottom depth changes within a specific depth range. You can
create up to ten depth ranges. For inland fishing, a maximum of five depth ranges can help reduce map clutter.
The depth ranges apply to all charts and all bodies of water.
Some Garmin LakeVü™ and premium supplemental charts have multiple depth range shading by default.

Red From 0 to 1.5 m (from 0 to 5 ft.)

Orange From 1.5 to 3 m (from 5 to 10 ft.)

Yellow From 3 to 4.5 m (from 10 to 15 ft.)

Green From 4.5 to 6.1 m (from 15 to 20 ft.)

To turn on and adjust, from a chart, select Options > Layers > Water > Depth Shading.
Weather Layer Settings
From the Navigation or Fishing chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Weather > .
From a weather chart, select Options > Layers > Chart > Weather.
Observed Layers: Sets which observed weather items are shown. Observed weather is the present weather
condition that are visible now.
Forecast Layers: Sets which forecasted weather items are shown.
Layer Mode: Shows forecasted or observed weather information.
Loop: Shows a loop of forecasted or observed weather information.
Legend: Shows the weather legend, with the severity of the conditions increasing from left to right.
Weather Subscription: Shows weather subscription information.
Restore Defaults: Resets the weather settings to factory default values.
Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page 20).

50 Charts and 3D Chart Views

Radar Overlay Settings
From the Navigation or Fishing chart, select Options > Layers > Radar > .
From a radar screen, select Options.
Radar To Standby: Stops radar transmission.
Gain: Adjusts the gain (Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Automatically, page 115).
Sea Clutter: Adjusts the sea clutter (Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Automatically, page 115).
Radar Options: Opens the radar options menu (Radar Options Menu, page 118).
Other Vessels: Sets how other vessels are displayed on the radar view (Other Vessels Layer Settings, page 49).
Radar Setup: Opens the radar display settings (Radar Setup Menu, page 118).
Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page 20).

Chart Settings
NOTE: Not all settings apply to all charts and 3D chart views. Some settings require external accessories or
applicable premium charts.
From a chart, select Options > Chart Settings.
Map Orientation: Sets the perspective of the map.
Look Ahead: Shifts your present location toward the bottom of the screen automatically as your speed
increases. Enter your top speed for the best results.
Vessel Orientation: Sets the alignment of the vessel icon on the map. The Auto option aligns the vessel icon
using GPS COG at high speeds and the magnetic heading at low speeds to better align the vessel icon with
the active track line. The Heading option aligns the vessel icon with the magnetic heading. The GPS Heading
(COG) option aligns the vessel icon using GPS COG. If the selected data source is not available, the available
data source is used instead.

WARNING
The vessel orientation setting is for informational purposes and is not intended to be precisely followed. Always
defer to the navaids and conditions on the water to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel
damage, personal injury, or death.
NOTE: You can set the Map Orientation and Vessel Orientation settings separately for two navigation charts
used in a combination page.
Detail: Adjusts the amount of detail shown on the map, at different zoom levels.
Chart Size: Sets the visible size of the chart.
World Map: Uses either a basic world map or a shaded relief map on the chart. These differences are visible
only when zoomed out too far to see the detailed charts.
Start Line: Sets the starting line for the sailing race (Setting the Starting Line, page 69).
Inset Map: Shows a small map centered on your present location.

Fish Eye 3D Settings

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.
From the Fish Eye 3D chart view, select Options.
View: Sets the perspective of the 3D chart view.
Tracks: Shows tracks.
Sonar Cone: Shows a cone that indicates the area covered by the transducer.
Fish Symbols: Shows suspended targets.

Charts and 3D Chart Views 51

Supported Maps
To help you have a safe and enjoyable time on the water, Garmin devices only support official maps produced
by Garmin or an approved third party producer.
You can purchase maps from Garmin. If you purchase maps from a seller other than Garmin, investigate the
seller before purchasing. Be extra cautious with online sellers. If you have purchased an unsupported map,
return it to the seller.

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Mapping

WARNING
The Garmin Quickdraw Contours mapping feature allows users to generate maps. Garmin makes no
representations about the accuracy, reliability, completeness or timeliness of the maps generated by third
parties. Any use or reliance on the maps generated by third parties is at your own risk.
The Garmin Quickdraw Contours mapping feature allows you to instantly create maps with contours and depth
labels for any body of water.
When Garmin Quickdraw Contours records data, a colored circle surrounds the vessel icon. This circle
represents the approximate area of the map that is scanned by each pass.

A green circle indicates good depth and GPS position, and a speed under 16 km/h (10 mph). A yellow circle
indicates good depth and GPS position, and a speed between 16 and 32 km/h (10 and 20 mph). A red circle
indicates poor depth or GPS position, and a speed above 32 km/h (20 mph).
You can view Garmin Quickdraw Contours in a combination screen or as a single view on the map.
The amount of saved data depends on the size of your memory card, your sonar source, and the speed of your
boat as you record data. You can record longer when you use a single-beam sonar. It is estimated that you
might be able to record about 1,500 hours of data onto a 2 GB memory card.
When you record data on a memory card in your chartplotter, the new data is added to your existing Garmin
Quickdraw Contours map, and is saved on the memory card. When you insert a new memory card, the existing
data does not transfer onto the new card.

Mapping a Body of Water Using the Garmin Quickdraw Contours Feature

Before you can use the Garmin Quickdraw Contours feature, you must have sonar depth, your GPS position, and
a memory card with free space.
1 From a chart view, select Options > Quickdraw Contours > Start Recording.
2 When recording is complete, select Options > Quickdraw Contours > Stop Recording.
3 Select Manage > Name, and enter a name for the map.

52 Garmin Quickdraw Contours Mapping

Adding a Label to a Garmin Quickdraw Contours Map
You can add labels to a Garmin Quickdraw Contours map to mark hazards or points of interest.
1 From the Navigation chart, select a location.
2 Select Quickdraw Lbl..
3 Enter text for the label, and select Done.

Garmin Quickdraw Community

The Garmin Quickdraw Community is a free, public, online community that enables you to download maps
other users have created. You can share your Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps with others. You must use
the ActiveCaptain app to access the Garmin Quickdraw Community (Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw
Community with ActiveCaptain, page 53).
NOTE: The Garmin device must have a memory card slot and Wi‑Fi technology to participate in the Garmin
Quickdraw Community.

Connecting to the Garmin Quickdraw Community with ActiveCaptain

1 From your mobile device, open the ActiveCaptain app and connect to the GPSMAP device (Getting Started
with the ActiveCaptain App, page 29).
2 From the app, select Quickdraw Community.
You can download contours from others in the community (Downloading Garmin Quickdraw Community Maps
Using ActiveCaptain, page 53) and share the contours you have created (Sharing Your Garmin Quickdraw
Contours Maps with the Garmin Quickdraw Community Using ActiveCaptain, page 53).
Downloading Garmin Quickdraw Community Maps Using ActiveCaptain
You can download Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that other users have created and shared with the Garmin
Quickdraw Community.
1 From the ActiveCaptain app on your mobile device, select Quickdraw Community > Search for Contours.
2 Use the map and search features to locate an area to download.
The red dots represent Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that have been shared for that area.
3 Select Select Download Region.
4 Drag the box to select the area to download.
5 Drag the corners to change the download area.
6 Select Download Area.
The next time you connect the ActiveCaptain app to the GPSMAP device, the downloaded contours are
transferred to the device automatically.
Sharing Your Garmin Quickdraw Contours Maps with the Garmin Quickdraw Community Using
ActiveCaptain
You can share Garmin Quickdraw Contours maps that you have created with others in the Garmin Quickdraw
Community.
When you share a contour map, only the contour map is shared. Your waypoints are not shared.
When you set up your ActiveCaptain app, you may have selected to share your contours with the community
automatically. If not, follow these steps to enable sharing.
From the ActiveCaptain app on your mobile device, select Sync with Plotter > Contribute to Community.
The next time you connect the ActiveCaptain app to the GPSMAP device, your contour maps are transferred to
the community automatically.

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Mapping 53

Garmin Quickdraw Contours Settings
From a chart, select Options > Quickdraw Contours > Settings.
Recording Offset: Sets the distance between the sonar depth and the contour recording depth. If the water
level has changed since your last recording, adjust this setting so the recording depth is the same for both
recordings.
For example, if the last time you recorded had a sonar depth of 3.1 m (10.5 ft.), and today's sonar depth is
3.6 m (12 ft.), enter -0.5 m (-1.5 ft.) for the a Recording Offset value.
User Display Offset: Sets differences in contour depths and depth labels on your own contours maps to
compensate for changes in the water level of a body of water, or for depth errors in recorded maps.
Comm. Display Offset: Sets differences in contour depths and depth labels on the community contours maps to
compensate for changes in the water level of a body of water, or for depth errors in recorded maps.
Survey Coloring: Sets the color of the Garmin Quickdraw Contours display. When this setting is turned on, the
colors indicate the quality of the recording. When this setting is turned off, the contour areas use standard
map colors.
Green indicates good depth and GPS position, and a speed under 16 km/h (10 mph). Yellow indicates good
depth and GPS position, and a speed between 16 and 32 km/h (10 and 20 mph). Red indicates poor depth or
GPS position, and a speed above 32 km/h (20 mph).
Depth Shading: Specifies the minimum and maximum depths of a depth range and a color for that depth range.

Navigation with a Chartplotter

WARNING
All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance
or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and
conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,
personal injury, or death.
The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and
bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or
other obstacles that may be in your path.
When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual
sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.

CAUTION
If your vessel has an autopilot system, a dedicated autopilot control display must be installed at each steering
helm in order to disable the autopilot system.
NOTE: Some chart views are available with premium charts, in some areas.
To navigate, you must choose a destination, set a course or create a route, and follow the course or route. You
can follow the course or the route on the Navigation chart, Fishing chart, Perspective 3D chart view, or Mariner’s
Eye 3D chart view.
You can set and follow a course to a destination using one of three methods: Go To, Route To, or Auto
Guidance.
Go To: Takes you directly to the destination. This is the standard option for navigating to a destination. The
chartplotter creates a straight-line course or navigation line to the destination. The path may run over land
and other obstacles.
Route To: Creates a route from your location to a destination, allowing you to add turns along the way. This
option provides a straight-line course to the destination, but allows you to add turns into the route to avoid
land and other obstacles.
Auto Guidance: Uses the specified information about your vessel and chart data to determine the best path
to your destination. This option is available only when using a compatible premium chart in a compatible
chartplotter. It provides a turn-by-turn navigation path to the destination, avoiding land and other obstacles
(Auto Guidance, page 62).

54 Navigation with a Chartplotter

 When you are using a compatible autopilot connected to the chartplotter using NMEA 2000, the autopilot
follows the Auto Guidance route.
NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.
The color of the route line changes depending upon several factors (Route Color Coding, page 55).

Basic Navigation Questions

Question Answer

How do I make the chartplotter point me in the Navigate using Go To (Setting and Following a Direct Course
direction in which I want to go (bearing)? Using Go To, page 56).

How do I make the device guide me along

Build a single-leg route and navigate it using Route To
a straight line (minimizing cross track) to a
(Creating and Navigating a Route From Your Present Location,
location using the shortest distance from the
page 60).
present location?

Build a multi-leg route and navigate it using Route To

How do I make the device guide me to a
(Creating and Navigating a Route From Your Present Location,
location while avoiding charted obstacles?
page 60).

How do I make the device steer my automatic Navigate using Route To (Creating and Navigating a Route
pilot? From Your Present Location, page 60).

If you have premium maps that support Auto Guidance and

are in an area covered by Auto Guidance, navigate using
Can the device create a path for me?
Auto Guidance (Setting and Following an Auto Guidance Path,
page 62).

How do I change the Auto Guidance settings

See Auto Guidance Path Configurations, page 64.
for my boat?

Route Color Coding

WARNING
All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance
or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and
conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,
personal injury, or death.
The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and
bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or
other obstacles that may be in your path.
When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual
sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.
As you navigate, the color of the route might change to indicate when you should take caution.
Magenta: Default route/course line.
Thin purple: Dynamically corrected course, indicating you are off course.
Orange: Caution! This segment of the route may be near the thresholds of the Auto Guidance depth and height
settings. For example, the route segment is orange when the route crosses under a bridge or is in potentially
shallow waters. Garmin Navionics+ and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts only.
Red striped: Warning! This segment of the route might be unsafe, based on the Auto Guidance depth and height
settings. For example, the roue segment is red striped when the route crosses under a very low bridge or is in
shallow waters. This line is red striped in Garmin Navionics+ and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts only; it is
magenta and gray striped in previous versions of the charts.
Gray: Cannot calculate this segment of the route due to land or other obstacles, or there is no chart coverage
area in that location.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 55

Destinations
You can select destinations using various charts and 3D chart views or using the lists.

Searching for a Destination by Name

You can search for saved waypoints, saved routes, saved tracks, and marine services destinations by name.
1 Select Where To > Services > Search by Name.
2 Enter at least a portion of the name of your destination.
3 If necessary, select Done.
The 50 nearest destinations that contain your search criteria appear.
4 Select the destination.

Selecting a Destination Using the Navigation Chart

From the Navigation chart, select a destination.

Searching for a Marine Services Destination

NOTE: This feature is available with premium charts, in some areas.
The chartplotter contains information for thousands of destinations offering marine services.
1 Select Where To > Services.
2 Select Offshore Services or Inland Services.
3 If necessary, select the marine service category.
The chartplotter shows a list of the nearest locations and the distance and bearing to each.
4 Select a destination to view more information about the destination, if available.
You can touch and drag up and down to scroll through the list of nearest destinations.

Setting and Following a Direct Course Using Go To

WARNING
When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual
sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.
You can set and follow a direct course from your current location to a selected destination.
1 Select a destination (Destinations, page 56).
2 Select Navigate To > Go To.
A magenta line appears. In the center of the magenta line is a thinner purple line that represents the
corrected course from your current location to the destination. The corrected course is dynamic, and it
moves with your boat when you are off course.
3 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.
4 If you are off course, follow the purple line (corrected course) to go to your destination, or steer back to the
magenta line (direct course).
You can also use the orange course-to-steer arrow, which shows a proposed turning radius to return your
boat to the course.

WARNING
Review the path for obstacles before negotiating the turn. If the path is unsafe, reduce your boat speed and
determine a safe path back to the course.

56 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Stopping Navigation
While navigating, from an applicable chart, select an option:
• Select Options > Stop Navigation.
• When navigating with Auto Guidance, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation.
• Select .

Waypoints
Waypoints are locations you record and store in the device. Waypoints can mark where you are, where you are
going, or where you have been. You can add details about the location, such as name, elevation, and depth.

Marking Your Present Location as a Waypoint

From any screen, select Mark.

Creating a Waypoint at a Different Location

1 From a chart, select Where To > Waypoints > New Waypoint.
2 Select an option:
• To create the waypoint by entering position coordinates, select Enter Coordinates, and enter the
coordinates.
• To create the waypoint using a chart, select Use Chart, select the location, and select Create Waypoint.
• To create the waypoint using a range (distance) and bearing, select Enter Range/Bearing, and enter the
information.

Marking a Man Overboard or Other SOS Location

You must connect a VHF radio to the chartplotter before you can use the chartplotter to initiate SOS calls.
You can use the chartplotter to mark a man overboard or SOS location and immediately begin navigating to
the marked location. If you have a VHF radio connected to the chartplotter, you can also broadcast the SOS
information.
If you have a compatible inReach device connected to the chartplotter, you can initiate an inReach SOS and
®

SM
communicate with the Garmin Response team while you wait for help to arrive (Sending an inReach SOS Call,
page 149).
1 Select SOS.
2 Select Man Overboard or the SOS type.
3 If necessary, select Yes to navigate to the SOS location.
If you selected Yes, the chartplotter sets a direct course back to the location.
The call details are sent to the VHF radio. You must send the call using the radio.

Projecting a Waypoint
You can create a new waypoint by projecting the distance and bearing from a different location. This can be
helpful when creating sail racing start and finish lines.
1 Select Where To > Waypoints > New Waypoint > Enter Range/Bearing.
2 If necessary, select a reference point on the chart.
3 Select Enter Range/Bearing.
4 Enter the distance, and select Done.
5 Enter the bearing, and select Done.
6 Select Create Waypoint.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 57

Viewing a List of all Waypoints
Select an option:
• Select Where To > Waypoints.
• From a chart or 3D chart view, select Options > Waypoints.

Editing a Saved Waypoint

1 Select Where To > Waypoints.
2 Select a waypoint.
3 Select Review > Edit.
4 Select an option:
• To add a name, select Name, and enter a name.
• To change the symbol, select Symbol.
• To move the position of the waypoint, select Position.
• To change the depth, select Depth.
• To change the water temperature, select Water Temp..
• To change the comment, select Comment.

Moving a Saved Waypoint

1 Select Where To > Waypoints.
2 Select a waypoint.
3 Select Review > Edit > Position.
4 Indicate a new location for the waypoint:
• To move the waypoint using coordinates, select Enter Coordinates, enter the new coordinates, and select
Done or Cancel.
• To move the waypoint while using the chart, select Use Chart, select a new location on the chart, and
select Move Waypoint.
• To move the waypoint using the vessel's current position, select Use Current Position.
• To move the waypoint using a range (distance) and bearing, select Enter Range/Bearing, enter the
information, and select Done.

58 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Browsing for and Navigating to a Saved Waypoint
WARNING
All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance
or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and
conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,
personal injury, or death.
The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and
bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or
other obstacles that may be in your path.
When using Go To, a direct course and a corrected course may pass over land or shallow water. Use visual
sightings, and steer to avoid land, shallow water, and other dangerous objects.
NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.
Before you can navigate to a waypoint, you must create a waypoint.
1 Select Where To > Waypoints.
2 Select a waypoint.
3 Select Navigate To.
4 Select an option:
• To navigate directly to the location, select Go To.
• To create a route to the location, including turns, select Route To.
• To use Auto Guidance, select Auto Guidance.
5 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.
NOTE: When using Auto Guidance, a gray segment within any part of the magenta line indicates that Auto
Guidance cannot calculate part of the Auto Guidance line. This is due to the settings for minimum safe water
depth and minimum safe obstacle height.
6 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Deleting a Waypoint or an MOB

1 Select Where To > Waypoints.
2 Select a waypoint or an MOB.
3 Select Review > Delete.

Deleting All Waypoints

Select Where To > Manage User Data > Delete User Data > Waypoints > All.

Routes
A route is a path from one location to one or more destinations.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 59

Creating and Navigating a Route From Your Present Location
You can create and immediately navigate a route on the Navigation chart or the Fishing chart. This method does
not save the route.
1 From the Navigation chart or Fishing chart, select a destination.
2 Select Route To.
3 Select the location of the last turn before the destination.
4 Select Add Turn.
5 If necessary, repeat to add turns, working backward from the destination to the present location of your
vessel.
The last turn you add should be the first turn you make, starting from your present location. It should be the
turn closest to your vessel.
6 Select Done.
7 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.
8 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Creating and Saving a Route

You can add up to 250 turns to one route.
1 Select Where To > Routes > New > Route Using Chart.
2 Select the starting location of the route.
The starting point can be your present location or another location.
3 Select Add Turn.
4 Select the location of the next turn on the chart.
5 Select Add Turn.
6 If necessary, repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more turns.
7 Select Done.

Viewing a List of Routes and Auto Guidance Paths

1 Select Where To > Routes.
2 If necessary, select Filter to see routes only or Auto Guidance paths only.
3 Select Sort to sort the list of available routes by range, length, or name.

Editing a Saved Route

You can change the name of a route or change the turns the route contains.
1 Select Where To > Routes.
2 Select a route.
3 Select Review > Edit Route.
4 Select an option:
• To change the name, select Name, and enter the name.
• To edit a turn from a list, select Edit Turns > Use Turn List, and select a turn from the list.
• To select a turn using the chart, select Edit Turns > Use Chart, and select a location on the chart.
Modifying a turn that uses a saved waypoint does not move that waypoint, it relocates the turn in the route.
Moving the location of a waypoint used in a route does not move the turn in the route.

60 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Finding and Navigating a Saved Route
Before you can browse a list of routes and navigate to one of them, you must create and save at least one route
(Creating and Saving a Route, page 60).
1 Select Where To > Routes.
2 Select a route.
3 Select Navigate To.
4 Select an option:
• To navigate the route from the starting point used when the route was created, select Forward.
• To navigate the route from the destination point used when the route was created, select Backward.
• To navigate parallel to the route, select Offset (Browsing for and Navigating Parallel to a Saved Route,
page 61).
• To navigate a route from the route's first waypoint, select From Start.
A magenta line appears. In the center of the magenta line is a thinner purple line that represents the
corrected course from your present location to the destination. The corrected course is dynamic, and it
moves with your boat when you are off course.
5 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.
6 Follow the magenta line along each leg in the route, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other
obstacles.
7 If you are off course, follow the purple line (corrected course) to go to your destination, or steer back to the
magenta line (direct course).

Browsing for and Navigating Parallel to a Saved Route

Before you can browse a list of routes and navigate to one of them, you must create and save at least one route
(Creating and Saving a Route, page 60).
1 Select Where To > Routes.
NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.
2 Select a route.
3 Select Navigate To.
4 Select Offset to navigate parallel to the route.
5 Select Offset to enter the distance to offset from the route.
6 Indicate how to navigate the route:
• To navigate the route from the starting point used when the route was created, to the left of the original
route, select Forward - Port.
• To navigate the route from the starting point used when the route was created, to the right of the original
route, select Forward - Starboard.
• To navigate the route from the destination point used when the route was created, to the left of the
original route, select Backward - Port.
• To navigate the route from the destination point used when the route was created, to the right of the
original route, select Backward - Starboard.
7 If necessary, select Done.
A magenta line appears. In the center of the magenta line is a thinner purple line that represents the
corrected course from your present location to the destination. The corrected course is dynamic, and it
moves with your boat when you are off course.
8 Review the course indicated by the magenta line.
9 Follow the magenta line along each leg in the route, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other
obstacles.
10 If you are off course, follow the purple line (corrected course) to go to your destination, or steer back to the
magenta line (direct course).

Navigation with a Chartplotter 61

Initiating a Search Pattern
You can initiate a search pattern to search an area. Different patterns are better suited for different search
situations.
1 Select Where To > Routes > New > Route Using SAR Pattern.
2 Select a pattern:
• Select Sector Search when the location of the object is fairly known, the search area is small, and an
intensive search is needed.
• Select Expanding Square when the location of the object is somewhat doubtful, the search area is small,
and an intensive search is needed.
• Select Creeping/Parallel Line when the location of the object is approximate, the search area is small, and
a consistent search is needed.
3 Enter the search parameters.
4 Select Done.
5 If necessary, select Engage.

Deleting a Saved Route

1 Select Where To > Routes.
2 Select a route.
3 Select Review > Delete.

Deleting All Saved Routes

Select Where To > Manage User Data > Delete User Data > Routes.

Auto Guidance
WARNING
The Auto Guidance feature is based on electronic chart information. That data does not ensure obstacle and
bottom clearance. Carefully compare the course to all visual sightings, and avoid any land, shallow water, or
other obstacles that may be in your path.
All route and navigation lines displayed on the chartplotter are only intended to provide general route guidance
or to identify proper channels, and are not intended to be precisely followed. Always defer to the navaids and
conditions on the water when navigating to avoid groundings or hazards that could result in vessel damage,
personal injury, or death.
NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.
You can use Auto Guidance to plot the best path to your destination. Auto Guidance uses your chartplotter to
scan chart data, such as water depth and known obstacles, to calculate a suggested path. You can adjust the
path during navigation.

Setting and Following an Auto Guidance Path

1 Select a destination (Destinations, page 56).
2 Select Navigate To > Auto Guidance.
3 Review the path, indicated by the magenta line.
4 Select Start Navigation.
5 Follow the magenta line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles (Route Color Coding,
page 55).
NOTE: When using Auto Guidance, a gray segment within any part of the magenta line indicates that Auto
Guidance cannot calculate part of the Auto Guidance line. This is due to the settings for minimum safe water
depth and minimum safe obstacle height.

62 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Creating and Saving an Auto Guidance Path
1 Select Where To > Routes > New > Auto Guidance.
2 Select a starting point, and select Next.
3 Select a destination, and select Next.
4 Select an option:
• To view a hazard and adjust the path near a hazard, select Hazard Review.
• To adjust the path, select Adjust Path, and follow the on-screen instructions.
• To delete the path, select Cancel Auto Guidance.
• To save the path, select Done.

Adjusting a Saved Auto Guidance Path

1 Select Where To > Routes & Auto Guidance.
2 Select a path, and select Review > Edit > Adjust Path.
TIP: When navigating an Auto Guidance path, select the path on the navigation chart, and select Adjust Path.
3 Select a location on the path.
4 Drag the point to a new location.
5 If necessary, select a point, and select Remove.
6 Select Done.

Canceling an Auto Guidance Calculation in Progress

From the Navigation chart, select Options > Cancel.
TIP: You can select Back to quickly cancel the calculation.

Setting a Timed Arrival

You can use this feature on a route or an Auto Guidance path to get feedback about when you should arrive at a
selected point. This allows you to time your arrival at a location, such as a bridge opening or a race starting line.
1 From the Navigation chart, select Options.
2 Select Navigation Options > Timed Arrival.
TIP: You can quickly open the Timed Arrival menu by selecting a point on the path or route.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 63

Auto Guidance Path Configurations
CAUTION
The Preferred Depth and Vertical Clearance settings influence how the chartplotter calculates an Auto Guidance
path. If a section of an Auto Guidance path is shallower than the Preferred Depth or lower than the Vertical
Clearance settings, the section of the Auto Guidance path appears as a solid orange line or a red striped line
in Garmin Navionics+ and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts and appears as a magenta and gray striped line in
previous versions. When your boat enters one of those areas, a warning message appears (Route Color Coding,
page 55).
NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.
NOTE: Not all settings apply to all maps.
You can set the parameters the chartplotter uses when calculating an Auto Guidance path.
Select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance.
Preferred Depth: Sets the minimum water depth, based on chart depth data, that your boat can safely travel
over.
NOTE: The minimum water depth for the premium charts (made before 2016) is 3 feet. If you enter a value of
less than 3 feet, the charts only use depths of 3 feet for Auto Guidance path calculations.
Vertical Clearance: Sets the minimum height of a bridge or obstacle, based on chart data, that your boat can
safely travel under.
Shoreline Distance: Sets how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance path to be placed. The path
may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for this setting are relative, not
absolute. To ensure that path is placed the appropriate distance from shore, you can assess the placement
of the path using one or more familiar destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway
(Adjusting the Distance from Shore, page 65).

64 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Adjusting the Distance from Shore
The Shoreline Distance setting indicates how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance line to be placed.
The Auto Guidance line may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for the
Shoreline Distance setting are relative, not absolute. To ensure the Auto Guidance line is placed the appropriate
distance from shore, you can assess the placement of the Auto Guidance line using one or more familiar
destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway.
1 Dock your vessel or drop the anchor.
2 Select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline Distance > Normal.
3 Select a destination that you have navigated to previously.
4 Select Navigate To > Auto Guidance.
5 Review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether the line safely avoids known
obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.
6 Select an option:
• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and
proceed to step 10.
• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >
Shoreline Distance > Far.
• If the turns in the line are too wide, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline
Distance > Near.
7 If you selected Near or Far in step 6, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether
the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.
Auto Guidance maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the Shoreline
Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto Guidance line,
unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.
8 Select an option:
• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and
proceed to step 10.
• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >
Shoreline Distance > Farthest.
• If the turns in the line are too wide, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline
Distance > Nearest.
9 If you selected Nearest or Farthest in step 8, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine
whether the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.
The Auto Guidance path maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the
Shoreline Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto
Guidance line, unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.
10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 at least once more, using a different destination each time, until you are familiar
with the functionality of the Shoreline Distance setting.

Tracks
A track is a recording of the path of your boat. The track currently being recorded is called the active track, and it
can be saved. You can show tracks in each chart or 3D chart view.

Showing Tracks
1 From a chart, select Options > Layers > Manage User Data > Tracks.
2 Select the tracks to display.
A trailing line on the chart indicates your track.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 65

Setting the Color of the Active Track
1 Select Where To > Tracks > Active Track Options > Track Color.
2 Select a track color.

Saving the Active Track

The track currently being recorded is called the active track.
1 Select Where To > Tracks > Save Active Track.
2 Select an option:
• Select the time the active track began.
• Select Entire Log.
3 Select Save.

Viewing a List of Saved Tracks

Select Where To > Tracks > Saved Tracks.

Editing a Saved Track

1 Select Where To > Tracks > Saved Tracks.
2 Select a track.
3 Select Review > Edit Track.
4 Select an option:
• Select Name, and enter the new name.
• Select Track Color, and select a color.
• Select Save as Route to save the track as a route.
• Select Save as Boundary to save the track as a boundary.

Saving a Track as a Route

1 Select Where To > Tracks > Saved Tracks.
2 Select a track.
3 Select Review > Edit Track > Save as Route.

Browsing for and Navigating a Recorded Track

Before you can browse a list of tracks and navigate to them, you must record and save at least one track.
1 Select Where To > Tracks > Saved Tracks.
2 Select a track.
3 Select Follow Track.
4 Select an option:
• To navigate the track from the starting point used when the track was created, select Forward.
• To navigate the track from the destination point used when the track was created, select Backward.
5 Review the course indicated by the colored line.
6 Follow the line along each leg in the route, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Deleting a Saved Track

1 Select Where To > Tracks > Saved Tracks.
2 Select a track.
3 Select Review > Delete.

Deleting All Saved Tracks

Select Where To > Manage User Data > Delete User Data > Saved Tracks.

66 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Retracing the Active Track
The track currently being recorded is called the active track.
1 Select Where To > Tracks > Follow Active Track.
2 Select an option:
• Select the time the active track began.
• Select Entire Log.
3 Review the course indicated by the colored line.
4 Follow the colored line, steering to avoid land, shallow water, and other obstacles.

Clearing the Active Track

Select Where To > Tracks > Clear Active Track.
The track memory is cleared, and the active track continues to be recorded.

Managing the Track Log Memory During Recording

1 Select Where To > Tracks > Active Track Options.
2 Select Record Mode.
3 Select an option:
• To record a track log until the track memory is full, select Fill.
• To continuously record a track log, replacing the oldest track data with new data, select Wrap.

Configuring the Recording Interval of the Track Log

You can indicate the frequency at which the track plot is recorded. Recording more frequent plots is more
accurate but fills the track log faster. The resolution interval is recommended for the most efficient use of
memory.
1 Select Where To > Tracks > Active Track Options > Interval > Interval.
2 Select an option:
• To record the track based on a distance between points, select Distance > Change, and enter the distance.
• To record the track based on a time interval, select Time > Change, and enter the time interval.
• To record the track plot based on a variance from your course, select Resolution > Change, and enter the
maximum error allowed from the true course before recording a track point. This is the recommended
recording option.

Boundaries
WARNING
This feature is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent groundings or collisions in all
circumstances. It is your obligation to ensure safe operation of your vessel.

CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
Boundaries allow you to avoid or remain in designated areas in a body of water. You can set an alarm to alert
you when you enter or exit a boundary.
You can create boundary areas, lines, and circles using the map. You can also convert saved tracks and routes
into boundary lines. You can create a boundary area using waypoints by creating a route from the waypoints,
and converting the route into a boundary line.
You can select a boundary to act as the active boundary. You can add the active boundary data to the data
fields on the chart.

Navigation with a Chartplotter 67

Creating a Boundary
1 Select Where To > Boundaries > New.
2 Select a boundary shape.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Converting a Route to a Boundary

1 Select Where To > Routes.
2 Select a route.
3 Select Review > Edit Route > Save as Boundary.

Converting a Track to a Boundary

1 Select Where To > Tracks > Saved Tracks.
2 Select a track.
3 Select Review > Edit Track > Save as Boundary.

Editing a Boundary
1 Select Where To > Boundaries.
2 Select a boundary.
3 Select Review.
4 Select an option:
• To edit the appearance of the boundary on the chart, select Display Options.
• To change the boundary lines or name, select Edit Boundary.
• To edit the boundary alarm, select Alarm.

Linking a Boundary to a SmartMode Layout

You can link a boundary to a SmartMode layout to automatically open the layout when entering or exiting the
boundary. For example, you can set a boundary around your marina, and automatically open the Docking layout
when you approach the marina.
1 Select Where To > Manage User Data > Boundaries.
2 Select a boundary.
3 Select Review > Link SmartMode™ > SmartMode™.
4 Select Entering, and select a layout.
5 Select Exiting, and select a layout.

Setting a Boundary Alarm

Boundary alarms alert you when you are within a specified distance of a set boundary. This can be helpful when
attempting to avoid certain areas or when you should be very alert in certain areas.
1 Select Where To > Boundaries.
2 Select a boundary.
3 Select Review > Alarm.
4 Select an option:
• To set an alarm for when your boat is a specified distance from the boundary, select Warning Dist., enter a
distance, and select Done.
• To set an alarm for when you enter or exit an area boundary or a circle boundary, select Area to show
Entering or Exiting.

Disabling all Boundary Alarms

Select Where To > Manage User Data > Boundaries > Alarms.

68 Navigation with a Chartplotter

Deleting a Boundary
1 Select Where To > Boundaries.
2 Select a boundary.
3 Select Review > Edit Boundary > Delete.

Deleting All Saved Waypoints, Tracks, Routes, and Boundaries

Select Where To > Manage User Data > Delete User Data > Delete All User Data > OK.

Sailing Features
Setting the Vessel Type for Sailing Features
You must select a sailing vessel type to use the sailing features.
1 Select > My Vessel > Vessel Type.
2 Select Sailboat or Sailing Catamaran.

Sail Racing
You can use the device to increase the likelihood that your boat will cross the start line of a race exactly when
the race begins. When you synchronize the race timer with the official race countdown timer, you are alerted
at one-minute intervals as the race start approaches. When you combine the race timer with the virtual start
line, the device measures your speed, bearing, and remaining time on the countdown timer. The device uses this
data to indicate whether your boat will cross the start line before, after, or at the correct time to start the race.

Starting Line Guidance

Sailing start line guidance is a visual representation of the information you need to cross the start line at the
optimal time and speed.
After you set the starboard and port start line pins, and the target speed and time, and after you start the race
timer, a predictor line appears. The predictor line extends from your current location toward the start line and
the laylines that extend from each pin.
The end point and color of the predictor line indicate where the boat will be when the timer expires, based on
your current boat speed.
When the end point is before the start line, the line is white. This indicates the boat must increase speed to
reach the start line on time.
When the end point is past the start line, the line is red. This indicates the boat must reduce speed to avoid a
penalty for reaching the start line before the timer expires.
When the end point is on the start line, the line is white. This indicates the boat is moving at an optimal speed to
reach the start line when the timer expires.
By default, the start line guidance window and the race timer window appear in the Sail Racing combination
screen.
Setting the Starting Line
The start line guidance window is added to the Sail Racing combination screen by default.
1 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Options > Start Line Guidance > Start Line.
2 Select an option:
• To mark the port and starboard starting line marks as you sail past them, select Ping Marks.
• To mark the port and starboard starting line marks by entering their coordinates, select Enter Coordinates.
• To switch the position of the port and starboard marks after you have set them, select Swap Port &
Starbd..

Sailing Features 69
Using the Starting Line Guidance
You can use the starting line guidance feature to help get you cross the start line, at the optimal speed during a
sailing race.
1 Mark the starting line (Setting the Starting Line, page 69).
2 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Options > Start Line Guidance > Target Speed, and select
your target speed when crossing the starting line.
3 Select Target Time, and select the target time to cross the starting line.
4 Select Back.
5 Start the racing timer (Starting the Race Timer, page 70).

Starting the Race Timer

The race timer is added to the Sail Racing combination screen by default.
1 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Start.
NOTE: You can also access this from the Sailing SmartMode screen and the navigation chart.
2 When necessary, select Sync to synchronize with the official race timer.

Stopping the Race Timer

From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Stop.

Setting the Distance between the Bow and the GPS Antenna
You can enter the distance between the bow of your boat and the location of your GPS antenna. This helps
ensure the bow of your boat crosses the starting line at the precise start time.
1 From the Sail Racing combination screen, select Options > Start Line Guidance > Start Line > GPS Bow Ofst..
2 Enter the distance.
3 Select Done.

70 Sailing Features
Laylines Settings
To use the laylines features, you must connect a wind sensor to the chartplotter.
When in sailing mode (Setting the Vessel Type for Sailing Features, page 69), you can display laylines on the
navigation chart. Laylines can be very helpful when racing.

From the Navigation chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel > Laylines > Setup.
Sailing Ang.: Allows you to select how the device calculates laylines. The Actual option calculates the laylines
using the measured wind angle from the wind sensor. The Manual option calculates the laylines using
manually entered windward and leeward angles. The Polar Table option calculates the laylines based on the
imported polar table data (Importing a Polar Table Manually, page 72).
Windward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the windward sailing angle.
Leeward Ang.: Allows you to set a layline based on the leeward sailing angle.
Tide Correction: Corrects the laylines based on the tide.
Layline Filter: Filters the layline data based on the time interval entered. For a smoother layline that filters out
some of the changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a higher number. For laylines that display
a higher sensitivity to changes in the boat's heading or true wind angle, enter a lower number.

Polar Tables
WARNING
This feature allows you to load and use data from a third party. Garmin makes no representations about the
accuracy, reliability, completeness or timeliness of the data generated by third parties. Any use or reliance on
data generated by third parties is at your own risk.
You can use polar table data with your chartplotter. You can assign polar data types in data fields, and you can
use polar data to calculate optimal laylines and starting line guidance.

Sailing Features 71
Importing a Polar Table Manually
If you save the polar table file as polar.plr and place it in the Garmin/polars/ folder on the memory card, the
chartplotter imports the data automatically after you insert the memory card. If it does not import the data
automatically, or if you want to load a different set of data, you can initiate the import manually.
1 Save the polar table as a .plr file in the Garmin/polars/ folder on the memory card.
2 Insert the memory card containing the polar data file into the chartplotter (Memory Cards, page 12).
3 Select > My Vessel > Polar Table > Import from Card.
4 If necessary, select the card slot and the polar table file.
After the polar table is imported, you can remove the memory card.
If you need to import a different set of polar tables based on your sailing plans or conditions, you must manually
import the new polar-table data. The chartplotter supports one set of data at a time.

Showing Polar Data in Data Fields

Before you can view polar data, you must import a polar table from a memory card (Importing a Polar Table
Manually, page 72).
1 Open the screen to which you want to add polar data.
2 Select Options > Edit Overlays.
3 Select the data field to change.
4 Select Sailing.
5 Select the polar data to display in the data field.
• To show the boat speed from the polar table at the current true wind speed and angle, select Polar Speed.
• To show the optimal boat speed at the target wind angle, select Target Speed.
• To show the optimal wind angle at the current true wind speed, select Target True Wind Angle.
• To show Target TWA converted to apparent using target speed, select Target App. Wind Angle.
• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the optimal boat speed shown as speed,
select Δ Polar Speed.
• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the optimal boat speed as a percentage,
select Δ Polar Speed Percent.
• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the target boat speed shown as speed, select
Δ Target Speed.
• To show the difference between the current boat speed and the target boat speed shown as a percentage,
select Δ Target Speed Percent.
• To show the difference between the true wind angle and target true wind angle, select Δ Target True Wind
Angle.
• To show the difference between the apparent wind angle and target apparent wind angle and the true
wind angle, select Δ Target App. Wind Angle.
TIP: You can also use the polar table data when calculating laylines and starting line guidance.

72 Sailing Features
Setting the Keel Offset
You can enter a keel offset to compensate the water depth reading for the transducer installation location. This
allows you to view the depth of the water below the keel or the true depth of the water, depending on your
needs.
If you want to know the water depth below the keel or the lowest point of your boat and the transducer is
installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the distance from the transducer
location to the keel of the boat.
If you want to know the true water depth and the transducer is installed below the water line, measure the
distance from the bottom of the transducer up to the water line.
NOTE: This option is only available when you have valid depth data.
1 Measure the distance:
• If the transducer is installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the
distance from the transducer location to the keel of the boat. Enter this value as a positive number.
• If the transducer is installed at the bottom of the keel and you want to know the true depth of the
water, measure the distance from the transducer to the water line. Enter this value in as a negative
number.

2 Complete an action:
• If the transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select > My Vessel > Depth and
Anchoring > Keel Offset.
• If the transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select > Communications > NMEA 2000
Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Keel Offset.
3 Select if the transducer is installed at the water line, or select if the transducer is installed at the
bottom of the keel.
4 Enter the distance measured in step 1.

Sailing Features 73
Sailboat Autopilot Operation
WARNING
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot is a tool that enhances your
capability to operate your boat. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid
navigational hazards and never leave the helm unattended

CAUTION
When engaged, the autopilot controls only the rudder. You and your crew remain responsible for the sails while
the autopilot is engaged.
In addition to heading hold, you can use the autopilot to maintain a wind hold. You can also use the autopilot to
control the rudder while tacking and gybing.

Wind Hold
You can set the autopilot to maintain a specific bearing relative to the apparent or true wind angle. You must
connect a compatible wind sensor the same NMEA 2000 network as the autopilot system to perform a wind
hold or wind-based steering maneuvers.

Autopilot status information

Standby and appear in gray when the autopilot is in standby mode.

Wind Hold and appear in green when the autopilot is engaged in wind hold.

Wind gauge
Shows the true wind speed (TWS) or apparent wind speed (AWS)

Rudder position indicator

NOTE: This functionality is available only when a rudder sensor is connected.

Changing the Wind Hold Type

With the wind hold engaged, select Options > Wind Hold Type.
The wind hold type changes from Apparent to True, or vice versa.

74 Sailing Features
Engaging Wind Hold
Before you can engage wind hold, you must connect a NMEA 2000 wind sensor to the autopilot.
Although a NMEA 2000 wind sensor is preferred, you can connect a NMEA 0183 wind sensor to the autopilot to
use wind hold.
1 When the autopilot is in standby mode, select Options.
2 Select an option:
• To engage an apparent wind hold, select Engage App. Wind Hold.
• To engage a true wind hold, select Engage True Wind Hold.
TIP: You can quickly engage the last type of wind hold used by selecting Wind Hold from standby mode.
Engaging Wind Hold from Heading Hold
Before you can engage wind hold, you must connect a NMEA 2000 wind sensor to the autopilot.
Although a NMEA 2000 wind sensor is preferred, you can connect a NMEA 0183 wind sensor to the autopilot to
use wind hold.
1 With heading hold engaged, select Options.
2 Select an option:
• To change from heading hold to apparent wind hold, select Engage App. Wind Hold.
• To change from heading hold to true wind hold, select Engage True Wind Hold.
Adjusting the Wind Hold Angle
You can adjust the wind hold angle on the autopilot when wind hold is engaged.
• To adjust the wind hold angle in increments of 1°, select <1° or 1°>.
NOTE: Holding <1° or 1°> for a few seconds automatically transitions the autopilot from Wind Hold to
Heading Hold and initiates rudder steering.
• To adjust the wind hold angle in increments of 10°, select <<10° or 10°>>.
NOTE: You can adjust the settings so that the step turn size is smaller or larger than 10°Adjusting the Step
Steering Increment, page 121.

Tack and Gybe

You can set the autopilot to perform a tack or gybe while heading hold or wind hold is engaged.
Tacking and Gybing from Heading Hold
1 Engage a heading hold (Engaging the Autopilot, page 122).
2 Select Options.
3 Select an option.
The autopilot steers your boat through a tack or gybe.
Tacking and Gybing from Wind Hold
Before you can engage wind hold, you must have a wind sensor installed.
1 Engage wind hold (Engaging Wind Hold, page 75).
2 Select Options.
3 Select an option.
The autopilot steers your boat through a tack or gybe, and information about the progress of the tack or gybe
appears on the screen.
Setting a Tack Delay
The tack delay allows you to delay steering a tack after you initiate the maneuver.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Sailing Setup > Tack Delay.
2 Select the length of the delay.
3 If necessary, select Done.

Sailing Features 75
Enabling the Gybe Inhibitor
NOTE: The gybe inhibitor does not prevent you from manually performing a gybe using the helm or step
steering.
The gybe inhibitor prevents the autopilot from performing a gybe.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Sailing Setup > Gybe Inhibitor.
2 Select Enabled.
Adjusting the Tack and Gybe Speed
You can adjust the turn rate speed when performing tack and gybe maneuvers. You can adjust the speed for
each maneuver separately.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Sailing Setup.
2 Select Tack Speed or Gybe Speed, and adjust the speed.
The higher you set the speed, the faster the turn rate during the maneuver.
NOTE: The turn rate is also affected by the vessel speed.

Heading Line and Angle Markers

The heading line is an extension drawn on the map from the bow of the boat in the direction of travel. Angle
markers indicate relative position from the heading or course over ground, which are helpful for casting or
finding reference points.

Setting the Heading Line and Angle Markers

The heading line is an extension drawn on the map from the bow of the boat in the direction of travel. Angle
markers indicate relative position from the heading or course over ground, which are helpful for casting or
finding reference points.
You can show the heading line and the course over ground (COG) line on the chart.
COG is your direction of movement. Heading is the direction the bow of the boat is pointed, when a heading
sensor is connected.
1 From a chart, select Options > Layers > My Vessel > Heading Line > Angle Markers.
2 If necessary, select Source, and select an option:
• To automatically use the available source, select Auto.
• To use the GPS antenna heading for COG, select GPS Heading (COG).
• To use data from a connected heading sensor, select Heading.
• To use data from both a connected heading sensor and the GPS antenna, select COG and Heading.
This displays both the heading line and the COG line on the chart.
3 Select Display, and select an option:
• Select Distance > Distance, and enter the length of the line shown on the chart.
• Select Time > Time, and enter the time used to calculate the distance your boat will travel in the specified
time at your present speed.

Viewing Sailing Vessel Data

After you have connected a compatible device, such as the MSC™ 10 compass, you can view vessel data, such
as heave, pitch, and heel.
1 Select an option based on the type of screen you are viewing:
• From a full screen view, select Options > Edit Overlays.
• From a combination screen, select Options > Edit Combo > Overlays.
• From a SmartMode screen, select Options > Edit Layout > Overlays.
TIP: To quickly change the data shown in an overlay box, hold the overlay box.
2 Select Data.
3 Select the data to add to the page, such as Heave, Trim (Pitch), or Heel Angle.

76 Sailing Features
 Sonar Fishfinder
When properly connected to a transducer, your compatible chartplotter can be used as a fishfinder. Chartplotter
models without an xsv or xs in their names require a Garmin sonar module and transducer to display sonar
information.
For more information about which transducer is best for your needs, go to garmin.com/transducers.
Different sonar views can help you view the fish in the area. The sonar views available vary depending on the
type of transducer and sonar module connected to the chartplotter. For example, you can view certain Panoptix™
sonar screens only if you have a compatible Panoptix transducer connected.
There are four basic styles of sonar views available: a full-screen view, a split-screen view that combines two
or more views, a split-zoom view, and a split-frequency view that displays two different frequencies. You can
customize the settings for each view in the screen. For example, if you are viewing the split-frequency view, you
can separately adjust the gain for each frequency.
If you do not see an arrangement of sonar views to suit your needs, you can create a custom combination
screen (Creating a New Combination Page, page 19). You can also add sonar views to SmartMode layouts
(Adding a SmartMode Layout, page 19).

Stopping the Transmission of Sonar Signals

• To disable the active sonar, from the sonar screen, select Options > Transmit.
• To disable all sonar transmissions, press , and select Disable All Sonar Trans..

Traditional Sonar View

There are several full-screen views available, depending on the transducer that is connected.
The full-screen Traditional sonar view shows a large image of the sonar readings from a transducer. The range
scale along the right side of the screen shows the depth of detected objects as the screen scrolls from the right
to the left.

Depth information

Suspended targets or fish

Bottom of the body of water

Sonar Fishfinder 77
Split-Frequency Sonar View
In the split-frequency sonar view, the two sides of the screen show a full-view graph of sonar data of different
frequencies. You can use this view if you have installed multiple transducers or a transducer that supports
multiple frequencies.
NOTE: When using a single-band CHIRP transducer connected to a supported chartplotter or sonar module, the
split-frequency sonar view alternates between the two frequencies, which slows the scroll speed. A channel
indicator appears next to the sonar frequency on each side of the screen to help identify this behavior.

Garmin ClearVü Sonar View

NOTE: To receive Garmin ClearVü scanning sonar, you need a compatible transducer. For information about
compatible transducers, go to garmin.com/transducers.
Garmin ClearVü high-frequency sonar provides a detailed picture of the fishing environment around the boat in a
detailed representation of structures the boat is passing over.

Traditional transducers emit a conical beam. The Garmin ClearVü scanning sonar technology emits a beam
similar to the shape of the beam in a copy machine. This beam provides a clearer, picture-like image of what is
beneath the boat.

78 Sonar Fishfinder
Garmin SideVü Sonar View
NOTE: Not all models provide built-in Garmin SideVü sonar support. If your model does not provide built-in
SideVü sonar, you need a compatible sonar module and compatible SideVü transducer.
If your model does provide built-in SideVü sonar, you need a compatible SideVü transducer.
SideVü scanning sonar technology shows you a picture of what lies to the sides of the boat. You can use this as
a search tool to find structures and fish.

Port side of the boat

Starboard side of the boat

The transducer on your vessel

Logs

Old tires

Trees

Water between the vessel and the bottom

Distance from the side of the boat

Sonar Fishfinder 79
SideVü Scanning Technology
Instead of a more common conical beam, the SideVü transducer uses a flat beam to scan the water and bottom
to the sides of your boat.

Measuring Distance on the Sonar Screen

You can measure the distance between two points on the SideVü sonar view.
1 From the SideVü sonar view, select .
2 Select a location on the screen.
3 Select Measure.
A push pin appears on the screen at the selected location.
4 Select another location.
The distance and angle from the pin is listed in the upper-left corner.
TIP: To reset the pin and measure from the current location of the pin, select Set Reference.

Panoptix Sonar Views

To receive Panoptix sonar, you need a compatible transducer.
The Panoptix sonar views allow you to see all around the boat in real time. You can also watch your bait
underwater and bait schools in front of or below your boat.
The LiveVü sonar views provide you a view of the live movement either in front of or below your boat. The
screen updates very quickly, producing sonar views that look more like live video.
The RealVü 3D sonar views provide three-dimensional views of either what is in front of or below your boat. The
screen updates with each sweep of the transducer.
To see all five Panoptix sonar views, you need one transducer to show the down views and a second transducer
to show the forward views.
To access the Panoptix sonar views, select Sonar, and select a view.

80 Sonar Fishfinder
LiveVü Down Sonar View
This sonar view shows a two-dimensional view of what is below the boat and can be used to see a bait ball and
fish.

Panoptix down view history in a scrolling sonar view

Boat

Range

Trails

Drop shot rig

Bottom

Sonar Fishfinder 81
LiveVü Forward Sonar View
This sonar view shows a two-dimensional view of what is in front of the boat and can be used to see a bait ball
and fish.

Boat

Range

Fish

Trails

Bottom

82 Sonar Fishfinder
RealVü 3D Forward Sonar View
This sonar view shows a three-dimensional view of what is in front of the transducer. This view can be used
when you are stationary and you need to see the bottom and the fish approaching the boat.

Color legend

Boat

Ping indicator

Fish

Bottom

Range

Sonar Fishfinder 83
RealVü 3D Down Sonar View
This sonar view shows a three-dimensional view of what is below the transducer and can be used when you are
stationary and want to see what is around your boat.

Color legend

Boat

Sonar beam

Range

Fish

Bottom

84 Sonar Fishfinder
RealVü 3D Historical Sonar View
This sonar view provides a three-dimensional view of what is behind your boat as you are moving and shows the
entire water column in 3D, from the bottom to the top of the water. This view is used for finding fish.

Color legend

Boat

Range

Bottom

Structure

Fish

Sonar Fishfinder 85
LiveVü Layer
You can enable the LiveVü Layer view on the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view only when using a compatible
transducer, such as a Panoptix PS70-TH.
The LiveVü Layer view adds the LiveVü down view to the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view.
To enable the LiveVü Layer view on the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view, select Options > LiveVü Layer.

RealVü 3D Historical bottom, structure, and fish

LiveVü down view structure and fish

LiveVü down view bottom

86 Sonar Fishfinder
True Motion
You can enable the True Motion feature on the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view only when using a compatible
transducer, such as a Panoptix PS70-TH.
The True Motion feature on the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view uses data from additional sensors connected to
the chartplotter, such as speed and heading sensors, to show a more geographically accurate historical view.
To enable the True Motion feature on the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view, select Options > True Motion.

Standard RealVü 3D Historical view

RealVü 3D Historical view with the True Motion feature enabled

Fish

Garmin FrontVü Sonar View

The Panoptix Garmin FrontVü sonar view increases your situational awareness by showing obstructions under
the water, up to 91 meters (300 feet) in front of the boat.
The ability to effectively avoid forward collisions with Garmin FrontVü sonar decreases as your speed rises
above 8 knots.
To see the Garmin FrontVü sonar view, you must install and connect a compatible transducer, such as a PS21
transducer. You may need to update the transducer software.

Sonar Fishfinder 87
Triple Beam Sonar View
The Triple Beam sonar view is available only when using a compatible transducer, such as the Panoptix
PS70-TH.
This sonar view shows three traditional sonar views on one screen, so you can simultaneously see separate
sonar readings from the port side, the starboard side, and the center of the boat. You can add each separate
view to combo pages as needed.
You can adjust the angle and width of the three sonar beams in the Options menu. Other sonar options and
settings, such as the sonar Gain, are synchronized across all three views.

Port transducer beam

Center transducer beam

Starboard transducer beam

88 Sonar Fishfinder
LiveScope Sonar View
This sonar view shows a live view of what is in front of or below the boat and can be used to see fish and
structures.

Depth information

Suspended targets or fish

Bottom of the body of water

Sonar Fishfinder 89
Zooming in a Panoptix LiveVü or LiveScope Sonar View
You can zoom in on the Panoptix LiveVü and LiveScope 2D sonar views.
NOTE: The scrolling history is hidden while the screen is in zoom mode.
1 From a Panoptix LiveVü or LiveScope 2D sonar view, spread two fingers apart to zoom in on the area.
An inset window appears and displays a small version of the full-screen image. The boxed area in the
inset shows the location of the zoomed area.

2 If necessary, tap or drag within the inset window to view a different area of the full-screen view.
3 If necessary, spread two fingers apart to zoom in.
4 If necessary, pinch two fingers together to zoom out.
To exit zoom mode, select Back or pinch two fingers together to zoom out until the screen returns to a
full-screen view.

Perspective View
This sonar view shows a live view of what is around and ahead of your boat and can be used to see shorelines,
fish, and structures. This view is best used in shallow water of 50 feet (15 meters) or less.
To see this sonar view, you must install a compatible LiveScope transducer on compatible a perspective mode
mount.

90 Sonar Fishfinder
Sonar Views in Combo Screens
You can add one or more available sonar views to a custom combination screen (Creating a New Combination
Page, page 19). If more than one source of sonar data is available, you can show sonar screens using different
sonar sources in separate windows of a custom combo screen.
If you have more than one source of sonar data available, you are prompted to select the source to use when
creating a custom combo. After you create the combo, you can change the source used in a window of the
combo screen later (Selecting a Sonar Source, page 91).

Selecting the Transducer Type

This chartplotter is compatible with a range of accessory transducers, including the Garmin ClearVü
transducers, which are available at garmin.com/transducers.
If you are connecting a transducer that was not included with the chartplotter, you may need to set the
transducer type to make the sonar function properly.
NOTE: Not all chartplotters and sonar modules support this feature.
1 Complete an action:
• From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation > Transducers.
• Select > My Vessel > Transducers.
2 Select the transducer that you want to change, and select Change Model.
3 Select an option:
• To enable the chartplotter to detect the transducer automatically, select Auto Detect.
• To select the transducer manually, select the option that matches the installed transducer, such as Dual
Beam (200/77 kHz) or Dual Freq (200/50 kHz).
NOTICE
Manually selecting a transducer could result in damage to the transducer or reduced transducer performance.
NOTE: If you select the transducer manually, disconnect that transducer, and then connect a different
transducer, you should reset this option to Auto Detect.

Selecting a Sonar Source

When you have more than one transducer providing data for a particular sonar view, you can select the source
to use for that sonar view. For example, if you have two transducers providing Garmin ClearVü data, you can
select the source to use for the Garmin ClearVü sonar view.
1 Open the sonar view for which you will change the source.
If the sonar view is in a combo screen, you must select the view you want to change.
2 Select Options > Sonar Setup > Source.
3 Select the source for this sonar view.

Renaming a Sonar Source

You can rename a sonar source to easily identify that source. A sonar source is associated with the chartplotter
or sounder module with a connected transducer. For example, you can use "Bow" as the name of the
chartplotter installed on the bow of your boat with a connected transducer.
1 Select > Communications > BlueNet™ Network.
2 Select the chartplotter or sounder module you want to rename.
3 Select Change Name.
4 Enter the name.

Sonar Fishfinder 91
Sonar Sharing
You can view the sonar data from all compatible sources on the Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine
Network. You can view sonar data from a compatible external sonar module, such as a GCV™ sonar module. In
addition, you can view the sonar data from other chartplotters that have a built-in sonar module.
Each chartplotter on the network can display sonar data from every compatible sonar module and transducer on
the network, no matter where the chartplotters and transducers are mounted on your boat. For example, from
one GPSMAP 8417 device mounted at the back of the boat, you can view the sonar data from another GPSMAP
device and Garmin ClearVü transducer mounted at the front of your boat.
When sharing sonar data, the values of some sonar settings, such as Range and Gain, are synchronized across
the devices on the network. The values of other sonar settings, such as the Appearance settings, are not
synchronized and should be configured on each individual device.
In addition, you can synchronize the scroll rates of the various traditional and Garmin ClearVü sonar views to
make the split views more cohesive (Synchronizing Sonar Scroll Rates, page 92).
NOTE: Using multiple transducers simultaneously can create cross talk, which can be removed by adjusting the
Interference sonar setting.

Synchronizing Sonar Scroll Rates

When you have multiple traditional and Garmin ClearVü sonar views in a combo screen, you can synchronize the
scroll rates to make the split views more cohesive.
1 In a combo screen with any combination of traditional and Garmin ClearVü sonar screens, select a sonar
screen.
2 Select Options.
3 Select Sonar Setup or ClearVü Setup.
4 Select Advanced > Scroll Sync.

Pausing and Resuming the Sonar Display

NOTE: Pausing the sonar display affects only the sonar view on the device where you pause the sonar display.
The transducer continues to transmit and receive sonar signals, and other connected displays continue to show
live sonar data.
From a sonar view, select an option:
• Select .
• Swipe or drag the screen in the direction of the scrolling sonar.
To resume sonar scrolling after pausing, select .
NOTE: If you pause a full-screen sonar view that is part of a combo, you can select Back to return to the combo
screen while the sonar remains paused.

Viewing Sonar History

You can scroll the sonar display to view historical sonar data.
NOTE: Not all transducers save historical sonar data.
1 From a sonar view, pause the sonar display (Pausing and Resuming the Sonar Display, page 92).
2 Swipe or drag the screen in the direction of the scrolling sonar to view the history.
3 Select to exit history and resume sonar scrolling.

92 Sonar Fishfinder
Creating a Waypoint on the Sonar Screen
1 From a sonar view, pause the sonar display (Pausing and Resuming the Sonar Display, page 92).
2 If necessary, scroll through the sonar display history until you find the location where you want to create a
waypoint.
3 Select a location on the sonar view where you want to create the waypoint.
4 Select .
5 If necessary, edit the waypoint information.

Adjusting the Level of Detail

You can control the level of detail and noise shown on the sonar screen either by adjusting the gain for
traditional transducers or by adjusting the brightness for Garmin ClearVü transducers.
If you want to see the highest intensity signal returns on the screen, you can lower the gain or brightness to
remove lower intensity returns and noise. If you want to see all return information, you can increase the gain or
brightness to see more information on the screen. This also increases noise, and can make it more difficult to
recognize actual returns.
1 From a sonar view, select Options.
2 Select Gain or Brightness.
3 Select an option:
• To increase or decrease the gain or brightness manually, select Up or Down.
• To allow the chartplotter to adjust the gain or brightness automatically, select an automatic option.

Adjusting the Color Intensity

You can adjust the intensity of colors and highlight areas of interest on the sonar screen by adjusting the color
gain for traditional transducers or the contrast for some transducers. This setting works best after you have
adjusted the level of detail shown on the screen using the gain or brightness settings.
If you want to highlight smaller fish targets or create a higher intensity display of a target, you can increase
the color gain or contrast setting. This causes a loss in the differentiation of the high intensity returns at the
bottom. If you want to reduce the intensity of the return, you can reduce the color gain or contrast.
1 From a sonar view, select Options.
2 Select an option based on sonar view:
• Select Contrast.
• Select Sonar Setup > Appearance > Color Gain.
3 Select an option:
• To increase or decrease the color intensity manually, select Up or Down.
• To use the default setting, select Default.

Sonar Fishfinder 93
Sonar Setup
NOTE: Not all options and settings apply to all models, sonar modules, and transducers.
These settings apply to the following types of transducers.
• Traditional
• Garmin ClearVü
• SideVü
These settings do not apply to Panoptix transducers.
From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup.
Scroll Speed: Sets the rate at which the sonar scrolls from right to left (Setting the Scroll Speed, page 95).
In shallow water, you can select a slower scroll speed to extend the length of time the information is
displayed on screen. In deeper water, you can select a faster scroll speed. Automatic scroll speed adjusts the
scrolling speed to the speed the boat is traveling.
Noise Reject: Reduces the interference and the amount of clutter shown on the sonar screen (Sonar Noise
Rejection Settings, page 96).
Appearance: Configures the appearance of the sonar screen (Sonar Appearance Settings, page 96).
Alarms: Sets sonar alarms (Sonar Alarms, page 97).
Advanced: Configures various sonar display and data source settings (Advanced Sonar Settings, page 98).
Installation: Configures the transducer (Transducer Installation Settings, page 98).

Setting the Zoom Level on the Sonar Screen

1 From a sonar view, select Options > Zoom > > Mode.
2 Select an option:
• To set the depth and zoom automatically, select Auto.
If necessary, select Set Zoom to modify the zoom setting. Select View Up or View Down to set the depth
range of the magnified area, and select Zoom In or Zoom Out to increase or decrease the magnification of
the magnified area.
• To set the depth range of the magnified area manually, select Manual.
If necessary, select Set Zoom to modify the zoom setting. Select View Up or View Down to set the depth
range of the magnified area, and select Zoom In or Zoom Out to increase or decrease the magnification of
the magnified area.
• To magnify one particular area of the screen, select Magnify.
If necessary, select Magnify to increase or decrease the magnification level.
TIP: You can drag the magnification box to a new location on the screen.
• To zoom in on the sonar data from the bottom depth, select Bottom Lock.
If necessary, select Span to adjust the depth and placement of the bottom lock area.
To cancel the zoom, deselect the Zoom option.
Enabling a Split Zoom Sonar View
When the zoom is set to Auto, Manual, or Bottom Lock, you can enable a split zoom view to show both the
standard view and the zoomed-in view side-by-side.
From a sonar view, select Options > Zoom > > Split Zoom.
To disable the split zoom view, select Split Zoom again.

94 Sonar Fishfinder
Setting the Scroll Speed
You can set the rate at which the sonar image moves across the screen. A higher scroll speed shows more
detail until there is no additional detail to show, at which point it starts stretching out the existing detail. This
can be useful while moving or trolling, or when you are in very deep water where the sonar is pinging very slowly.
A lower scroll speed displays sonar information on the screen longer.
For most situations, the Default setting provides a good balance between a quickly scrolling image and less
distorted targets.
1 From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Scroll Speed.
2 Select an option:
• To adjust the scroll speed automatically using speed-over-ground or water speed data, select Auto.
The Auto setting selects a scroll rate to match the boat speed, so targets in the water are drawn with
the correct aspect ratio and appear less distorted. When viewing Garmin ClearVü/SideVü sonar views or
searching for structure, it is recommend to use the Auto setting.
• To scroll faster, select Up.
• To scroll more slowly, select Down.

Adjusting the Range

You can adjust the range of the depth scale for traditional and Garmin ClearVü sonar views. You can adjust the
range of the width scale for the SideVü sonar view.
Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower or outer third of the
sonar screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.
Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a bottom
that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as long as it
appears within the range you have set.
1 From a sonar view, select Options > Range.
2 Select an option:
• To allow the chartplotter to adjust the range automatically, select Auto.
• To increase or decrease the range manually, select Up or Down.
TIP: From the sonar screen, you can select or to manually adjust the range.
TIP: When viewing multiple sonar screens, you can select Select to choose the active screen.

Sonar Fishfinder 95
Sonar Noise Rejection Settings
From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Noise Reject.
Interference: Adjusts the sensitivity to reduce the effects of interference from nearby sources of noise.
The lowest interference setting that achieves the desired improvement should be used to remove
interference from the screen. Correcting installation issues that cause noise is the best way to eliminate
interference.
Color Limit: Hides part of the color palette to help eliminate fields of weak clutter.
By setting the color limit to the color of the undesired returns, you can eliminate the display of undesired
returns on the screen.
Smoothing: Removes noise that is not part of a normal sonar return, and adjusts the appearance of returns,
such as the bottom.
When smoothing is set to high, more of the low-level noise remains than when using the interference control,
but the noise is more subdued because of averaging. Smoothing can remove speckle from the bottom.
Smoothing and interference work well together to eliminate low-level noise. You can adjust the interference
and smoothing settings incrementally to remove undesirable noise from the display.
Surface Noise: Hides surface noise to help reduce clutter. Wider beam widths (lower frequencies) can show
more targets, but can generate more surface noise.
TVG: Adjusts the time varying gain, which can reduce noise.
This control is best used for situations when you want to control and suppress clutter or noise near the water
surface. It also allows for the display of targets near the surface that are otherwise hidden or masked by
surface noise.

Sonar Appearance Settings

From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.
Color Scheme: Sets the color scheme.
Color Gain: Adjusts the intensity of colors (Adjusting the Color Intensity, page 93).
A-Scope: Displays a vertical flasher along the right side of the screen that shows instantaneously the range to
targets along a scale.
Depth Line: Shows a quick-reference depth line.
Edge: Highlights the strongest signal from the bottom to help define the hardness or softness of the signal.
View Selection: Sets the direction of the Garmin SideVü sonar view.
Fish Symbols: Sets how the sonar interprets suspended targets.

Shows suspended targets as symbols and background sonar information.

Shows suspended targets as symbols with target depth information and background sonar informa­
tion.

Shows suspended targets as symbols.

Shows suspended targets as symbols with target depth information.

Pic. Advance: Allows the sonar picture to advance faster by drawing more than one column of data on the
screen for each column of sonar data received. This is especially helpful when you are using the sonar in
deep water, because the sonar signal takes longer to travel to the water bottom and back to the transducer.
The 1/1 setting draws one column of information on the screen per sonar return. The 2/1 setting draws two
columns of information on the screen per sonar return, and so on for the 4/1 and 8/1 settings.
Echo Stretch: Adjusts the size of the echoes on the screen to make it easier to see separate returns on the
screen.

96 Sonar Fishfinder
 When targets are difficult to see , echo stretch makes the target returns more pronounced and easier to
see on the screen. If the echo stretch value is too high, the targets blend together. If the value is too low ,
the targets are small and more difficult to see.

You can use echo stretch and filter width together to obtain the preferable resolution and noise reduction.
With echo stretch and filter width set to low, the display has the highest resolution, but is the most
susceptible to noise. With echo stretch set to high and filter width set to low, the display has a lower
resolution, but has wider targets. With echo stretch and filter width set to high, the display has the lowest
resolution, but is the least susceptible to noise. It is not recommended to set echo stretch to low and filter
width to high.
Overlay Data: Sets the data shown on the sonar screen.

Sonar Alarms
WARNING
The sonar alarms feature is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent grounding in all
circumstances. It is your obligation to ensure safe operation of the vessel.

CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
NOTE: Not all options are available on all transducers.
From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Alarms.
You can also open the sonar alarms by selecting > Alarms > Sonar.
Shallow Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is less than the specified value.
Deep Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is greater than the specified value.
FrontVü Alarm: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth in front of the vessel is less than the specified value,
which can help you avoid running aground (Setting the Garmin FrontVü Depth Alarm, page 103). This alarm is
available only with Panoptix Garmin FrontVü transducers.
Water Temp.: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer reports a temperature that is 2°F (1.1°C) above or
below the specified temperature.
Contour: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer detects a suspended target within the specified depth
from the surface of the water and from the bottom.
Fish: Sets an alarm to sound when the device detects a suspended target.
• sets the alarm to sound when fish of all sizes are detected.
• sets the alarm to sound only when medium or large fish are detected.
• sets the alarm to sound only when large fish are detected.

Sonar Fishfinder 97
Advanced Sonar Settings
From a Traditional sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Advanced.
Shift: Allows you to set the depth range on which the sonar is focused. This allows you to zoom in a higher
resolution in the focused depth.
When using shift, bottom tracking may not work effectively, because the sonar looks for data within the depth
range of the focused area, which may not include the bottom. Using shift also can impact the scroll speed,
because data outside the depth range of the focused area is not processed, which reduces the time required
to receive and display the data. You can zoom in to the focused area, which enables you to evaluate target
returns more closely at a higher resolution than just zooming alone.
Btm. Srch. Limit: Limits the search for the bottom to the depth selected when the Range setting is set to Auto.
To minimize the length of time it takes to find the bottom, you can select a depth to limit the search for the
bottom. The device will not search for the bottom deeper than the selected depth.
Range Sync > Off: The range for all sonar views in a combo screen are independent of one another.
Range Sync > On: This setting option is available only when viewing a combo screen using at least two
traditional and Garmin ClearVü views in a combo screen. The range is synchronized for all traditional and
Garmin ClearVü views in the combo screen.
Range Sync > Same Transducer Only: This is the default setting. The ranges are synchronized for views from
each transducer in the combo screen, but not between different transducers.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to a dual-band CHIRP transducer.
Scroll Sync: This setting option is available only when viewing a combo screen using at least two traditional
and Garmin ClearVüsonar views in a combo screen. The scroll rates are synchronized for all traditional and
Garmin ClearVü views in the combo screen.

Transducer Installation Settings

These settings apply to the following types of sonar.
• Traditional
• Garmin ClearVü
• Garmin SideVü
From an applicable sonar view, select an option.
• From a Traditional sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.
• From a Garmin ClearVü sonar view, select Options > ClearVü Setup > Installation.
• From a Garmin SideVü sonar view, select Options > SideVü Setup > Installation.
Transmit Rate: Sets the length of time between sonar pings. Increasing the transmit rate increases the scroll
speed, but it may also increase self-interference.
Reducing the transmit rate increases the spacing between transmit pulses and can resolve self-interference.
This option is available on the Traditional sonar view only.
Transmit Power: Reduces transducer ringing near the surface. A lower transmit power value reduces transducer
ringing, but can also reduce the strength of the returns. This option is available on the Traditional sonar view
only.
Filter Width: Defines the edges of the target. A shorter filter more clearly defines the edges of the targets but
may allow more noise. A longer filter creates softer target edges and may also reduce noise. This option is
available on the Traditional sonar view only.
Flip Left/Right: Switches the SideVü view orientation from left to right. This option is available on the SideVü
sonar view only.
Restore Sonar Defaults: Restores the sonar settings to the factory default values.
Transducers: View details about installed transducers and save details to a memory card.
Transducers > Change Model: Allows you to change an installed transducer type (Selecting the Transducer
Type, page 91).

98 Sonar Fishfinder
Transducers > Manual Configuration: Allows you to set manual transducer configuration parameters on a
compatible sonar module. See the installation instructions for your compatible sonar module for more details
on connecting and manually configuring a transducer.

Sonar Frequencies
NOTE: The frequencies available depend on the transducers being used.
Adjusting the frequency helps adapt the sonar for your particular goals and the present depth of the water.
Higher frequencies use narrow beam widths, and are better for high-speed operation and rough sea conditions.
Bottom definition and thermocline definition can be better when using a higher frequency.
Lower frequencies use wider beam widths, which can let the fisherman see more targets, but could also
generate more surface noise and reduce bottom signal continuity during rough sea conditions. Wider beam
widths generate larger arches for fish target returns, making them ideal for locating fish. Wider beam widths
also perform better in deep water, because the lower frequency has better deep water penetration.
CHIRP frequencies allow you to sweep each pulse through a range of frequencies, resulting in better target
separation in deep water. CHIRP can be used to distinctly identify targets, like individual fish in a school, and
for deep water applications. CHIRP generally performs better than single frequency applications. Because some
fish targets may show up better using a fixed frequency, you should consider your goals and water conditions
when using CHIRP frequencies.
Some transducers also provide the ability to customize preset frequencies for each transducer element, which
enables you to change the frequency quickly using the presets as the water and your goals change.
Viewing two frequencies concurrently using the split-frequency view allows you to see deeper with the lower
frequency return and, at the same time, see more detail from the higher frequency return.
NOTICE
Always be aware of local regulations on sonar frequencies. For example, to protect orca whale pods, you might
be prohibited from using frequencies between 50 to 80 kHz within 1/2 mile of an orca whale pod. It is your
responsibility to use the device in compliance with all applicable laws and ordinances.

Selecting the Transducer Frequency

NOTE: You cannot adjust the frequency for all sonar views and transducers.
You can select which frequencies appear on the sonar screen.
NOTICE
Always be aware of local regulations on sonar frequencies. For example, to protect orca whale pods, you might
be prohibited from using frequencies between 50 to 80 kHz within ½ mile of an orca whale pod. It is your
responsibility to use the device in compliance with all applicable laws and ordinances.
1 From a sonar view, select Options > Frequency.
2 Select a frequency suited to your needs and water depth.
For more information on frequencies, see Sonar Frequencies, page 99.
Creating a Frequency Preset
NOTE: Not available with all transducers.
You can create a preset to save a specific sonar frequency, which allows you to change frequencies quickly.
1 From a sonar view, select Options > Frequency.
2 Select Manage Frequencies > New Preset.
3 Enter a frequency.

Sonar Fishfinder 99
Turning On the A-Scope
NOTE: This feature is available in the Traditional sonar views.
The a-scope is a vertical flasher along the right side of the view, showing you what is underneath the transducer
right now. You can use the a-scope to identify target returns that may be missed when the sonar data is
quickly scrolling across the screen, such as when your boat is moving at high speeds. It can also be helpful for
detecting fish that are close to the bottom.

The a-scope above shows fish returns and a soft bottom return .
1 From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance > A-Scope.
2 If necessary, select > Peak Hold to adjust the length of time the sonar returns are displayed.

Heave Compensation
In wavy conditions, the record of the bottom on the sonar screen may raise up and down with the vessel as it is
affected by waves. You can activate the heave compensation feature to adjust for the sea condition and provide
steady sonar recordings.
To use the heave compensation feature, you must meet specific requirements:
• You must install at least one compatible transducer connected to the chartplotter, or a compatible sonar
module on the network with a transducer installed and connected to it.
• You must install at least one MSC 10 heading and attitude sensor and connect it to the same NMEA 2000
network as the chartplotter or chartplotters where you want to use the heave compensation feature.
• You must configure the positions of these connected sensors on the vessel.
Configuring Sensors for Heave Compensation
You must mount and connect at least one compatible transducer and at least one MSC 10 heading sensor
before you can configure them for heave compensation.
Before the heave compensation feature can accurately adjust the sonar readings to account for the affects of
waves on the vessel, you must configure the software to identify the location of the sensors on the vessel.
1 Select > My Vessel > Device Position.
2 Select a connected compatible transducer.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to enter values for each axis of the transducer position in relation to the
vessel.
4 Select a connected MSC 10 heading sensor.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to enter values for each axis of the heading-sensor position in relation to
the vessel.
6 Repeat the previous steps for additional compatible transducers and heading sensors if applicable.

100 Sonar Fishfinder

Using Heave Compensation on a Sonar View
Before you can use the heave compensation feature on a sonar view, you must install and connect a compatible
transducer and heading sensor, and configure their locations on the vessel.
When the necessary equipment is installed, the heave compensation feature activates automatically on the
applicable sonar views.
1 Open a Traditional or RealVü sonar view.
2 Observe the icon in the lower-left corner of the sonar view.

The heave compensation feature is working correctly.

There is a configuration error with one or more of the sensors required for heave compen­
sation. You can select the message banner for more information.

The necessary transducer, sensor, or both are not installed or configured correctly.
No icon present Heave compensation is not applicable to this sonar view.
Heave compensation is disabled.

Turning On Heave Compensation

When the appropriate transducer and sensors are installed and configured correctly to activate the heave
compensation feature, you can turn on and turn off the feature as needed.
1 From a sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation > Transducers.
2 Select the name of the transducer you configured for heave compensation.
3 Select Heave Compensation.

Panoptix Sonar Setup

Adjusting the RealVü Viewing Angle and Zoom Level
You can change the viewing angle of the RealVü sonar views. You can also zoom in and out of the view.
From a RealVü sonar view, select an option:
• To adjust the viewing angle diagonally, select .
• To adjust the viewing angle horizontally, select .
• To adjust the viewing angle vertically, select .
• To adjust the viewing angle, swipe the screen in any direction.
• To zoom in, spread two fingers apart.
• To zoom out, pinch two fingers together.

Adjusting the RealVü Sweep Speed

You can update how quickly the transducer sweeps back and forth. A faster sweep rate creates a less detailed
image, but the screen refreshes faster. A slower sweep rate creates a more detailed image, but the screen
refreshes more slowly.
NOTE: This feature is not available for the RealVü 3D Historical sonar view.
1 From a RealVü sonar view, select Options > Sweep Speed.
2 Select an option.

Sonar Fishfinder 101

LiveVü Forward and Garmin FrontVü Sonar Settings
From the LiveVü Forward or Garmin FrontVü sonar view, select Options.
Gain: Controls the level of detail and noise shown on the sonar screen.
If you want to see the highest intensity signal returns on the screen, you can lower the gain to remove lower
intensity returns and noise. If you want to see all return information, you can increase the gain to see more
information on the screen. This also increases noise, and can make it more difficult to recognize actual
returns.
Depth Range: Adjusts the range of the depth scale.
Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower portion of the sonar
screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.
Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a
bottom that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as
long as it appears within the range you have set.
Forward Range: Adjusts the range of the forward scale.
Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically adjusts the forward scale in relation to the depth.
Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range. The bottom can appear on the screen as
long as it appears within the range you have set. Manually reducing this option can reduce the effectiveness
of the FrontVü Alarm, reducing your reaction time to low depth readings.
Transmit Angle: Adjusts the focus of the transducer to the port or starboard side. This feature is available only
with RealVü capable Panoptix transducers, such as the PS31 transducer.
Transmit: Stops the active transducer from transmitting.
FrontVü Alarm: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth in front of the vessel is less than the specified value
(Setting the Garmin FrontVü Depth Alarm, page 103). This is available only with Panoptix Garmin FrontVü
transducers.
Sonar Setup: Adjusts the setup of the transducer and the appearance of the sonar returns.
Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page 20).
Setting the LiveVü and Garmin FrontVü Transducer Transmit Angle
This feature is available only with RealVü capable Panoptix transducers, such as the PS30, PS31, and PS60.
You can change the transducer transmit angle to aim the transducer at a particular area of interest. For
example, you might aim the transducer to follow a bait ball or focus on a tree as you pass it.
1 From a LiveVü or Garmin FrontVü sonar view, select Options > Transmit Angle.
2 Select an option.

102 Sonar Fishfinder

Setting the Garmin FrontVü Depth Alarm
WARNING
Garmin FrontVü sonar and the Garmin FrontVü depth alarm are tools for situational awareness only, and may
not prevent groundings in all circumstances. As vessel speeds approach and exceed 8 knots, your ability to
effectively respond to the information provided by the sonar and/or alarm decreases. It is your responsibility to
remain aware of your surroundings while underway and to operate your vessel in a safe and prudent manner.
Failure to do so could result in an accident leading to property damage, personal injury, or death.

CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
NOTE: This alarm is available only with Panoptix Garmin FrontVü transducers.
You can set an alarm to sound when the depth is below a specified level. For best results, you should set the
bow offset when using the front collision alarm (Setting the Bow Offset, page 105).
1 From the Garmin FrontVü sonar view, select Options > FrontVü Alarm.
2 Select On.
3 Enter the depth at which the alarm is triggered, and select Done.
On the Garmin FrontVü screen, a depth line shows the depth at which the alarm is set. The line is green when
you are in a safe depth. The line turns yellow when you are going faster than the forward range gives you time
to react (10 seconds). It turns red and sounds an alarm when the system detects an obstruction or the depth is
less than the entered value.
LiveVü and Garmin FrontVü Appearance Settings
From a LiveVü or Garmin FrontVü Panoptix sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.
Color Scheme: Sets the color palette.
Color Gain: Adjusts the intensity of colors shown on the screen.
You can select a higher color gain value to see targets higher in the water column. A higher color gain value
also allow you to differentiate low intensity returns higher in the water column, but this causes a loss in the
differentiation of the returns at the bottom. You can select a lower color gain value when targets are near the
bottom, to help you distinguish between targets and high intensity returns such as sand, rock, and mud.
Trails: Sets the how long the trails appear on the screen. The trails show the movement of the target.
Bottom Fill: Colors the bottom brown to distinguish it from the water returns.
LiveVü and Garmin FrontVü Layout Settings
From a LiveVü or Garmin FrontVü Panoptix sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Layout.
Grid Overlay: Shows a grid of range lines.
Scroll History: Shows the sonar history on the side of the screen.
Beam Icon: Selects the icon used to show the direction of the transducer beam.
On-screen Control: Shows the on-screen buttons.
Compress Range: In forward views, compresses the forward range farther away from the boat and expands the
range closer to the boat. This allows you to see closer objects more clearly while keeping farther objects on
the screen.

Sonar Fishfinder 103

RealVü Appearance Settings
From a RealVü sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.
Point Colors: Sets a different color palette for the sonar return points.
Bottom Colors: Sets the color scheme for the bottom.
Bottom Style: Sets the style for the bottom. When you are in deep water, you can select the Points option and
manually set the range to a shallower value.
Color Key: Shows a legend of the depths the colors represent.
On-screen Control: Shows or hides the on-screen buttons.

Panoptix Transducer Installation Settings

From a Panoptix sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.
Install Depth: Sets the depth below the water line where the Panoptix transducer is mounted. Entering the actual
depth at which the transducer is mounted results in a more accurate visual presentation of what is in the
water.
Bow Offset: Sets the distance between the bow and the forward view Panoptix transducer installation location.
This allows you to view the forward distance from the bow instead of the transducer location.
This applies to Panoptix transducers in the Garmin FrontVü, LiveVü Forward, and RealVü 3D Forward sonar
views.
Beam Width: Sets the width of the down view Panoptix transducer beam. Narrow beam widths allow you to see
deeper and farther. Wider beam widths allow you to see more coverage area.
This applies to Panoptix transducers in the Garmin FrontVü, LiveVü Down, and LiveVü Forward sonar views.
Stabilization > Auto Stabilize: Enables the internal attitude heading sensors to detect the installation angle
of the Panoptix transducer automatically. When this setting is turned on, you cannot manually specify the
installation angle for the transducer.
Stabilization > Pitch Angle: Available only when Auto Stabilize is turned off. Allows you to enter the specific
installation angle for the transducer. Many forward view transducers are installed at a 45-degree angle and
down view transducers are installed at a zero-degree angle.
Stabilization > Flipped: Sets the orientation of the Panoptix sonar view when the down view transducer is
installed with the cables pointing toward the port side of the boat.
This applies to Panoptix transducers in the LiveVü Down, RealVü 3D Down, and RealVü 3D Historical sonar
views.
Calibrate Compass: Calibrates the internal compass in the Panoptix transducer (Calibrating the Compass,
page 105).
This applies to Panoptix transducers with an internal compass, such as the PS21-TR transducer.
Orientation: Controls if the transducer is in down or forward installation mode. The Auto setting uses the AHRS
sensor to determine the orientation.
This applies to PS22 transducers.
Restore Sonar Defaults: Restores the sonar settings to the factory default values.

104 Sonar Fishfinder

Setting the Bow Offset
For forward view Panoptix transducers, you can enter a bow offset to compensate the forward distance
readings for the transducer installation location. This allows you to view the forward distance from the bow
instead of the transducer installation location.
This feature applies to Panoptix transducers in the Garmin FrontVü, LiveVü Forward, and RealVü 3D Forward
sonar views.
1 Measure the horizontal distance from the transducer to the bow.

2 From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation > Bow Offset.
3 Enter the distance measured, and select Done.
On the applicable sonar view, the forward range shifts by the distance you entered.
Calibrating the Compass
Before you can calibrate the compass, the transducer must be installed far enough away from the trolling motor
to avoid magnetic interference, and deployed in the water. Calibration must be of sufficient quality to enable the
internal compass.
NOTE: The compass may not work if you mount the transducer on the motor.
NOTE: For best results, you should use a heading sensor such as the SteadyCast™ heading sensor. The heading
sensor shows the direction the transducer is pointing relative to the boat.
NOTE: Compass calibration is available only for transducers with an internal compass, such as the PS21-TR
transducer.
You can begin turning your boat before calibrating, but you must fully rotate your boat 1.5 times during
calibration.
1 From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.
2 If necessary, select Use AHRS to turn on the AHRS sensor.
3 Select Calibrate Compass.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Sonar Fishfinder 105

LiveScope and Perspective Sonar Settings
From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options.
Gain: Controls the level of detail and noise shown on the sonar screen.
If you want to see the highest intensity signal returns on the screen, you can lower the gain to remove
lower intensity returns and noise. If you want to see all return information, you can increase the gain to see
more information on the screen. Increasing the gain also increases noise, and can make it more difficult to
recognize actual returns.
Depth Range: Adjusts the range of the depth scale.
Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower portion of the sonar
screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.
Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a
bottom that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as
long as it appears within the range you have set.
Available in LiveScope sonar view.
Forward Range: Adjusts the range of the forward scale.
Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically adjusts the forward scale in relation to the depth.
Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range. The bottom can appear on the screen as
long as it appears within the range you have set.
Available in LiveScope sonar view.
Range: Adjusts the range.
Allowing the device to adjust the range automatically keeps the bottom within the lower or outer third of the
sonar screen, and can be useful for tracking a bottom that has minimal or moderate terrain changes.
Manually adjusting the range enables you to view a specified range, which can be useful for tracking a
bottom that has large terrain changes, such as a drop-offs or cliffs. The bottom can appear on the screen as
long as it appears within the range you have set.
Available in Perspective sonar view.
Transmit: Stops the active transducer from transmitting.
Sonar Setup: Adjusts the setup of the transducer and the appearance of the sonar returns (LiveScope and
Perspective Sonar Setup, page 106).
Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page 20).

LiveScope and Perspective Sonar Setup

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup.
Appearance: Configures the appearance of the sonar screen (LiveScope and Perspective Appearance Settings,
page 107).
Layout: Configures the layout of the sonar screen (LiveScope and Perspective Layout Settings, page 107).
Noise Reject: Reduces noise and interference and attempts to remove returns that are not actually targets in the
water.
Ghost Reject: Reduces the occurrence of "ghost" images, which are duplicated or reflected images that are not
actually targets in the water. The Ghost Reject setting sends more transmit power forward in the water to
see farther with less noise generated by the bottom. Adjusting the Ghost Reject and Noise Reject settings
together reduces the occurrence of "ghost" images most effectively. This feature is available in LiveScope
Forward orientation only.
TVG: Adjusts the time varying gain, which can reduce noise.
This control is best used for situations when you want to control and suppress clutter or noise near the water
surface. It also allows for the display of targets near the surface that are otherwise hidden or masked by
surface noise.
Overlay Data: Sets the data shown on the sonar screen.
Installation: Configures the transducer (LiveScope and Perspective Transducer Installation Settings, page 107).

106 Sonar Fishfinder

LiveScope and Perspective Appearance Settings
From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Appearance.
Color Scheme: Sets the color palette.
Color Gain: Adjusts the contrast of colors shown on the screen.
You can select a higher color gain value to see minor variances in targets with large color changes. You can
select a lower color gain value to see more similar colors in the same situation.
Trails: Sets the how long the trails appear on the screen. The trails show the movement of the target.
Bottom Fill: Colors the bottom brown to distinguish it from the water returns. Not available in Perspective mode.

LiveScope and Perspective Layout Settings

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Layout.
Grid Overlay: Shows a grid of range lines. The Grid option shows a square grid. The Radial option shows a
circular grid with radial angle lines.
Scroll History: Shows the sonar history on the side of the screen. Not available in Perspective mode.
Beam Icon: Selects the icon used to show the direction of the transducer beam.
Beam Overlay: Enables an outline to show where the transducers are oriented in relation to each other, when
two or more calibrated Panoptix transducers are connected.
On-screen Control: Shows the on-screen buttons.
Reverse Range: Adjusts the amount of range shown behind the transducer.
Compress Range: In forward views, compresses the forward range farther away from the boat and expands the
range closer to the boat. This allows you to see closer objects more clearly while keeping farther objects on
the screen.

LiveScope and Perspective Transducer Installation Settings

From the LiveScope or Perspective sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Installation.
Install Depth: Sets the depth below the water line where the Panoptix transducer is mounted. Entering the actual
depth at which the transducer is mounted results in a more accurate visual presentation of what is in the
water.
Stabilization > Auto Stabilize: Enables the internal attitude heading sensors to detect the installation angle
of the Panoptix transducer automatically. When this setting is turned on, you cannot manually specify the
installation angle for the transducer.
Stabilization > Pitch Angle: Available only when Auto Stabilize is turned off. Allows you to enter the specific
installation angle for the transducer. Many forward view transducers are installed at a 45-degree angle and
down view transducers are installed at a zero-degree angle.
Stabilization > Flipped: Sets the orientation of the Panoptix sonar view when the down view transducer is
installed with the cables pointing toward the port side of the boat.
This applies to Panoptix transducers in the LiveVü Down, RealVü 3D Down, and RealVü 3D Historical sonar
views.
Calibrate Compass: Calibrates the internal compass in the Panoptix transducer (Calibrating the Compass,
page 105).
This applies to LiveScope transducers with an internal compass.
Orientation: Controls if the transducer is in down or forward installation mode. The Auto setting uses the AHRS
sensor to determine the orientation.
Focus: Adjusts the sonar view to compensate for the speed of sound in water. The Auto setting uses the
temperature of the water to calculate the speed of sound.
Heading Source: Allows the system to reference the heading source from either the transducer or a compatible
Garmin trolling motor This may help avoid interference from the trolling motor when the transducer is
installed on the barrel. This setting appears only when a compatible Garmin trolling motor is detected.
Heading Offset: Adjusts the referenced heading to match the actual heading, if needed. This setting appears
only when a compatible Garmin trolling motor is set as the heading source.

Sonar Fishfinder 107

Restore Sonar Defaults: Restores the sonar settings to the factory default values.

Radar
WARNING
The marine radar transmits microwave energy that has the potential to be harmful to humans and animals.
Before beginning radar transmission, verify that the area around the radar is clear. The radar transmits a beam
approximately 12° above and below a line extending horizontally from the center of the radar.
To avoid possible personal injury, do not look directly at the antenna at close range when the radar is
transmitting. Eyes are the most sensitive part of the body to electromagnetic energy.
When you connect your compatible chartplotter to an optional Garmin marine radar, such as a GMR™ GMR
Fantom™ 6 radar or a GMR 24 xHD, you can view more information about your surroundings.
The radar transmits a narrow beam of microwave energy as it rotates to a 360° pattern. When the transmitted
energy contacts a target, some of that energy is reflected back to the radar.

Radar Interpretation
Reading and interpreting the radar display takes practice. The more you use the radar, the better you will
become at relying on the radar display when you really need it.
Radar can be useful in many situations, such as avoiding collisions when you have limited visibility, for example
when it is dark or foggy, tracking weather, seeing what is ahead of you, and locating birds and fish.
The radar overlay feature can help you interpret the radar display more easily, because it overlays the radar
returns on top of the chart. This can help you identify the difference between a radar return of a land mass,
bridge, or rain cloud. Showing the AIS vessels on the radar overlay can also help you identify features on the
radar display.
In the screenshot below, the radar overlay is turned on. This screen also shows a video feed. We can easily
identify a few items on the radar screen.

Land

Vessel

Radar Overlay
When you connect your chartplotter to an optional Garmin marine radar, you can use overlay radar information
on the Navigation chart or on the Fishing chart.
Data appears on the radar overlay based on the most recently used radar mode and all settings configurations
applied to the radar overlay are also applied to the last-used radar mode.

108 Radar
Radar Overlay and Chart Data Alignment
When using the Radar overlay, the chartplotter aligns radar data with chart data based on the boat heading,
which is based by default on data from a magnetic heading sensor connected using a NMEA 0183 or NMEA
2000 network. If a heading sensor is not available, the boat heading is based on GPS tracking data.
GPS tracking data indicates the direction in which the boat is moving, not the direction in which the boat
is pointing. If the boat is drifting backward or sideways due to a current or wind, the Radar overlay may
not perfectly align with the chart data. This situation should be avoided by using boat-heading data from an
electronic compass.
If the boat heading is based on data from a magnetic heading sensor or an automatic pilot, the heading data
could be compromised due to incorrect setup, mechanical malfunction, magnetic interference, or other factors.
If the heading data is compromised, the Radar overlay may not align perfectly with the chart data.

Transmitting Radar Signals

NOTE: As a safety feature, the radar enters standby mode after it warms up. This gives you an opportunity to
verify the area around the radar is clear before beginning radar transmission.
1 With the chartplotter off, connect your radar as described in the radar installation instructions.
2 Turn on the chartplotter.
If necessary, the radar warms up and a countdown alerts you when the radar is ready.
3 Select Radar.
4 Select a radar mode.
A countdown message appears while the radar is starting up.
5 Select Options > Transmit Radar.

Stopping the Transmission of Radar Signals

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar To Standby.
TIP: Press > Radar To Standby from any screen to quickly stop radar transmission.

Setting Up the Timed Transmit Mode

To help conserve power, you can set up time intervals in which the radar will transmit and not transmit (standby)
signal transmissions.
NOTE: This feature is not available in dual radar modes.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Timed Transmit.
2 Select Timed Transmit to enable the option.
3 Select Stdby Time, enter the time interval between radar signal transmissions, and select Done.
4 Select Transmit Time, enter the duration of each radar signal transmission, and select Done.

Enabling and Adjusting a Radar No Transmit Zone

You can indicate areas within which the radar scanner does not transmit signals.
NOTE: GMR GMR Fantom and xHD2 radar models support two no-transmit zones. Most other GMR radar
models support one no-transmit zone. GMR 18 HD+ radar models do not support no-transmit zones.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Installation > No Transmit Zone.
The no-transmit zone is indicated by a shaded area on the radar screen.
2 Select Angle 1, and select the new location for the first angle.
3 Select Angle 2, and select the new location for the second angle.
4 Select Done.
5 If necessary, repeat for the second zone.

Radar 109
Adjusting the Radar Range
The range of the radar signal indicates the length of the pulsed signal transmitted and received by the radar.
As the range increases, the radar transmits longer pulses in order to reach distant targets. Closer targets,
especially rain and waves, also reflect the longer pulses, which can add noise to the Radar screen. Viewing
information about longer-range targets can also decrease the amount of space available on the Radar screen
for viewing information about shorter-range targets.
• Select to decrease the range.
• Select to increase the range.

Tips for Selecting a Radar Range

• Determine what information you need to see on the Radar screen.
For example, do you need information about nearby weather conditions or targets and traffic, or are you more
concerned about distant weather conditions?
• Assess the environmental conditions where the radar is being used.
Especially in inclement weather, longer-range radar signals can increase the clutter on the Radar screen and
make it more difficult to view information about shorter-range targets. In rain, shorter-range radar signals can
enable you to view information about nearby objects more effectively, if the rain clutter setting is configured
optimally.
• Select the shortest effective range, given your reason for using radar and the present environmental
conditions.

MotionScope Doppler Radar Technology

The GMR GMR Fantom radar uses the Doppler effect to detect and highlight moving targets to help you avoid
potential collisions, find flocks of birds, and track weather formations. The Doppler effect is the frequency shift
in the radar echo due to the relative motion of the target. This allows for instant detection of any targets moving
toward or away from the radar.
The MotionScope feature highlights the moving targets on the radar display so you can navigate around other
boats or severe weather, or toward fishing spots where birds are feeding at the surface.
The moving targets are color-coded so you can tell at a glance which targets are moving toward or away from
you. On most color schemes, green indicates the target is moving away from you and red indicates the target is
moving toward you.
On some models, you can also adjust the M-Scope Sensitivity setting to change the speed threshold for target
highlighting. A higher setting highlights slower targets, and a lower setting highlights only faster targets.

110 Radar
Enabling Guard Zones
You can enable one or two guard zones to alert you when anything comes within specified areas around your
boat.

WARNING
This feature is intended to enhance situational awareness and may not prevent collisions in all circumstances.
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel an for remaining aware of obstacles or
hazards in or around the water. Failure to do so could result in an accident causing property damage, serious
personal injury, or death.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Guard Zones.
2 Select Guard Zone 1 or Guard Zone 2.

Defining a Circular Guard Zone

Before you can define the boundaries of the guard zone, you must enable a guard zone (Enabling Guard Zones,
page 111).
You can define a circular guard zone that completely surrounds your boat.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Guard Zones.
2 Select Guard Zone 1 or Guard Zone 2, and then select .
3 Select Circle.
4 Select the location of the outer guard zone circle.
5 Select the location of the inner guard zone circle to define the width of the guard zone.
6 Select Done.

Defining a Partial Guard Zone

You can define the boundaries of a guard zone that does not completely surround your boat.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Guard Zones.
2 Select Guard Zone 1 or Guard Zone 2, and then select .
3 Drag the cursor to the location of the outer guard-zone corner .

4 Select Corner 2.
5 Drag the cursor to the location of the inner guard-zone corner to define the width of the guard zone.
6 Select Done.

Radar 111
MARPA
WARNING
This feature is intended to enhance situational awareness and may not prevent collisions in all circumstances.
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel and for remaining aware of obstacles or
hazards in or around the water. Failure to do so could result in an accident causing property damage, serious
personal injury, or death.
Mini-automatic radar plotting aid (MARPA) enables you to identify and track targets and is primarily used for
collision avoidance. To use MARPA, you assign a MARPA tag to a target. The radar system automatically tracks
the tagged object and provides you with information about the object, including the range, bearing, speed, GPS
heading, nearest approach, and time to nearest approach. MARPA indicates the status of each tagged object
(acquiring, lost, tracking, or dangerous), and the chartplotter can sound a collision alarm if the object enters your
safe zone.
Before you can use MARPA, you must have a heading sensor connected and an active GPS signal. The heading
sensor must provide the NMEA 2000 parameter group number (PGN) 127250 or the NMEA 0183 HDM or HDG
output sentence.

MARPA Targeting Symbols

Acquiring a target. Concentric, dashed green rings radiate from the target while the radar is locking
onto it.

Target has been acquired. A solid green ring indicates the location of a target that the radar has
locked onto. A dashed green line attached to the circle indicates the projected course over ground or
the GPS heading of the target.

Dangerous target is in range. A red ring flashes from the target while an alarm sounds and a message
banner appears. After the alarm has been acknowledged, a solid red dot with a dashed red line
attached to it indicates the location and the projected course over ground or the GPS heading of the
target. If the safe-zone collision alarm has been set to Off, the target flashes, but the audible alarm
does not sound and the alarm banner does not appear.

Target has been lost. A solid green ring with an X through it indicates that the radar could not lock
onto the target.

Closest point of approach and time to closest point of approach to a dangerous target.

Acquiring MARPA Targets Automatically

You can acquire MARPA targets automatically based on MotionScope, guard zones, or boundaries.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > MARPA > Auto Acquire.
2 Select , and adjust additional settings (optional).

Removing MARPA Targets Automatically

You can enable the MARPA Auto Remove setting to remove lost targets from the target list automatically. While
enabled, lost targets are removed when new targets are acquired while the target list is at full capacity.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > MARPA.
2 Select Auto Remove > On.

112 Radar
Assigning a MARPA Tag to an Object
Before you can use MARPA, you must have a heading sensor connected and an active GPS signal. The heading
sensor must provide the NMEA 2000 parameter group number (PGN) 127250 or the NMEA 0183 HDM or HDG
output sentence.
1 From a radar screen, select an object or location.
2 Select Acquire Tgt. > MARPA Target.

Removing a MARPA Tag from a Targeted Object

1 From the Radar screen, select a MARPA target.
2 Select MARPA Target > Remove.

Viewing Information about a MARPA-tagged Object

You can view the range, bearing, speed, and other information about a MARPA-tagged object.
1 From a radar screen, select a targeted object.
2 Select MARPA Target.

Viewing a List of AIS Threats

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > AIS > AIS List.
TIP: You can quickly access the AIS list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 If necessary, select Display Options to sort or filter the items in the list.

Showing AIS Vessels on the Radar Screen

AIS requires the use of an external AIS device and active transponder signals from other vessels.
You can configure how other vessels appear on the Radar screen. If any setting (except the AIS display range)
is configured for one radar mode, the setting is applied to every other radar mode. The details and projected
heading settings configured for one radar mode are applied to every other radar mode and to the Radar overlay.
1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > AIS.
2 Select an option:
• To indicate the distance from your location within which AIS vessels appear, select Display Range, and
select a distance.
• To show details about AIS-activated vessels, select Details > Show.
• To set the projected heading time for AIS-activated vessels, select Proj. Heading, and enter the time.
• To show the tracks of AIS vessels, select AIS Trails, and select the length of the track that appears.

VRM and EBL

The variable range marker (VRM) and the electronic bearing line (EBL) measure the distance and bearing from
your boat to a target object. On the Radar screen, the VRM appears as a circle that is centered on the present
location of your boat, and the EBL appears as a line that begins at the present location of your boat and
intersects the VRM. The point of intersection is the target of the VRM and the EBL.
You can set up to two independent VRM/EBL indicators on the chartplotter radar screen.
Showing and Adjusting a VRM and EBL
You can adjust the diameter of a VRM and the angle of an EBL, which moves the intersection point of the VRM
and the EBL. A VRM and EBL configured for one mode are applied to all other radar modes.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > VRM/EBLs.
2 Select VRM/EBL 1 or VRM/EBL 2 to enable the VRM/EBL lines on the radar screen.
3 To adjust the position of a VRM/EBL target, select > Adjust, and select a new location for the intersection
point of the VRM and the EBL
4 Select Done.

Radar 113
Quickly Measuring the Range and Bearing to a Target Object
1 From a Radar screen, select the target location.
2 Select VRM/EBLs.
A list of VRM/EBL options appear.
3 Select Drop VRM/EBL 1 or Drop VRM/EBL 2.
The VRM/EBL intersection is set at the target location. The range and bearing to the target location appear in
the upper-left corner of the screen.
Changing an EBL Bearing Reference
You can change the bearing reference of the EBL so that it uses the heading of the boat or north.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > VRM/EBLs.
2 If necessary, select VRM/EBL 1 or VRM/EBL 2 to enable the VRM/EBL lines on the radar screen.
3 Select > EBL Reference to change the EBL reference.
North uses the cardinal direction of north as a reference, and Relative uses the heading of the vessel as a
reference.
NOTE: You can have different EBL Reference settings for each of the VRM/EBLs.
Changing the Origin of a VRM and EBL
You can change the origin of the VRM and EBL lines so that they center on a location other than your vessel.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > VRM/EBLs.
2 If necessary, select VRM/EBL 1 or VRM/EBL 2 to enable the VRM/EBL lines on the radar screen.
3 Select > Set Floating Origin.
4 Select a location on the radar screen where you want to center the VRM and EBL and select Done
To return the VRM and EBL so that it is centered on the vessel, select Reset Floating Origin.
Using VRM and EBL Quick Actions from the Radar Screen
You can quickly set and adjust VRM and EBLs using shortcuts directly from the radar screen.
1 Select an object or location on radar screen and select VRM/EBLs from the shortcut menu.
2 Select an option to quickly set or adjust a VRM and EBL:
• Drop VRM/EBL 1 or Drop VRM/EBL 2: Sets the intersection point of the VRM and EBL at the selected
location.
• Disable VRM/EBL 1 or Disable VRM/EBL 2: Disables the VRM and EBL and clears it from the radar screen.
• Float VRM/EBL 1 or Float VRM/EBL 2: Sets the origin point of the VRM and EBL at the selected location
instead of your vessel.
• Reset VRM/EBL 1 Origin or Reset VRM/EBL 2 Origin: Resets the origin point of the VRM and EBL so it is
centered on your vessel.

114 Radar
Echo Trails
The echo trails feature enables you to track the movement of vessels on the radar display. As a vessel moves,
you can see a faint trail of the vessel's wake. You can change the length of time the trail is displayed.

NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the settings configured for use in one radar mode may or may not be
applied to other radar modes or to the radar overlay.
NOTE: This feature is not available on xHD open array or HD/HD+ radome models.

Turning on Echo Trails

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Echo Trails > Display.

Adjusting the Length of the Echo Trails

1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Options > Echo Trails > Time.
2 Select the length of the trail.

Clearing the Echo Trails

You can remove the echo trails from the radar screen to reduce the clutter on the screen.
From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options > Echo Trails > Clear Trails.

Radar Settings
NOTE: Not all options and settings are available on all radar and chartplotter models.
NOTE: You can optimize the radar display for each radar mode.

Radar Gain
Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Automatically
The automatic gain setting for each radar mode is optimized for that mode, and may differ from the automatic
gain setting used for another mode.
NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not
be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.
NOTE: Not all options are available on all radar models.
1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Gain.
2 Select an option:
• To adjust the gain automatically for changing conditions, select Auto Low or Auto High.
• To adjust the gain automatically to show birds over the surface of the water, select Auto Bird.
NOTE: This option is not available on xHD open array or HD/HD+ radome models.

Radar 115
Adjusting Gain on the Radar Screen Manually
For optimal radar performance, you can manually adjust the gain.
NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not
be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.
1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Gain.
2 Select Up to raise the gain, until light speckles appear across the Radar screen.
Data on the Radar screen is refreshed every few seconds. As a result, the effects of manually adjusting the
gain may not appear instantly. Adjust the gain slowly.
3 Select Down to lower the gain until the speckles disappear.
4 If boats, land, or other targets are within range, select Down to lower the gain until the targets begin to blink.
5 Select Up to raise the gain until the boats, land, or other targets appear steadily lit on the Radar screen.
6 Minimize the appearance of nearby large objects, if necessary.
7 Minimize the appearance of side-lobe echoes, if necessary.
Minimizing Nearby Large-Object Interference
Nearby targets of significant size, such as jetty walls, can cause a very bright image of the target to appear on
the Radar screen. This image can obscure smaller targets located near it.
NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not
be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.
1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Gain.
2 Select Down to lower the gain until the smaller targets are clearly visible on the Radar screen.
Reducing the gain to eliminate nearby large-object interference may cause smaller or distant targets to blink
or disappear from the Radar screen.
Minimizing Side-Lobe Interference on the Radar Screen
Side-lobe interference may appear to streak outward from a target in a semi-circular pattern. Side-lobe effects
can be avoided by reducing the gain or reducing the radar range.
NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the gain setting configured for use in one radar mode may or may not
be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.
1 From a Radar screen or the Radar overlay, select Options > Gain.
2 Select Down to lower the gain until the semi-circular, streaked pattern disappears from the Radar screen.
Reducing the gain to eliminate side-lobe interference may cause smaller or distant targets to blink or
disappear from the Radar screen.

116 Radar
Radar Filter Settings
Adjusting Sea Clutter on the Radar Screen
You can adjust the appearance of clutter caused by choppy sea conditions. The sea clutter setting affects the
appearance of nearby clutter and targets more than it affects the appearance of distant clutter and targets. A
higher sea clutter setting reduces the appearance of clutter caused by nearby waves, but it can also reduce or
eliminate the appearance of nearby targets.
NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the sea clutter setting configured for use in one radar mode may or
may not be applied to other radar modes or to the radar overlay.
NOTE: Not all options and settings are available on all radar and chartplotter models.
1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Filters > Sea Clutter.
2 Select an option:.
• Select an Auto option based on the sea conditions.
• Select Up or Down to adjust the appearance of sea clutter until other targets are clearly visible on the
radar screen. Select a setting that reflects the present sea conditions.
Clutter caused by sea conditions may still be visible.
When using a compatible radar model, the chartplotter adjusts the sea clutter based on the sea conditions
automatically.
Adjusting Rain Clutter on the Radar Screen
You can adjust the appearance of clutter caused by rain. Reducing the radar range also can minimize rain clutter
(Adjusting the Radar Range, page 110).
The rain clutter setting affects the appearance of nearby rain clutter and targets more than it affects the
appearance of distant rain clutter and targets. A higher rain clutter setting reduces the appearance of clutter
caused by nearby rain, but it can also reduce or eliminate the appearance of nearby targets.
NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the rain clutter settings configured for use in one radar mode may or
may not be applied to other radar modes or to the radar overlay.
1 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Filters > Rain Clutter.
2 Select Up or Down to decrease or increase the appearance of nearby rain clutter until other targets are
clearly visible on the radar screen.
Clutter caused by rain may still be visible.
Averaging Multiple Scans on the Radar Screen
You can average the results of multiple scans on the radar screen. This can be an effective method to filter out
noise and enhances the detection of consistent targets. Averaging is most effective when using a longer range.
1 From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Filters > Scan Average.
2 Select an option.
The High setting filters out the most noise.

Radar 117
Radar Options Menu
From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Options.
MotionScope™: Uses the Doppler effect to detect and highlight moving targets to help you avoid potential
collisions, find flocks of birds, and track weather formations (MotionScope Doppler Radar Technology,
page 110). This option is only available on GMR Fantom models.
Pulse Exp.: Increases the duration of the transmit pulse, which helps maximize the energy directed toward
targets. This helps to enhance the detection and identification of targets. This option is only available on xHD
radome and xHD2 open array models.
Target Size: Adjusts the size of targets, by adjusting the pulse compression processing. Select smaller targets
for a sharp, high resolution radar image. Select larger targets to display larger echos for point targets, like
boats and buoys. This option is only available on GMR Fantom models.
Echo Trails: Enables you to track the movement of vessels on the radar screen. This option is not available on
xHD open array or HD/HD+ radome models.
VRM/EBLs: Shows the variable range marker (VRM) circle and the electronic bearing line (EBL) to allow you to
measure the distance and bearing from your boat to a target object (VRM and EBL, page 113).
Guard Zone: Sets a safe zone around your boat and sounds an alarm when anything enters the zone (Enabling
Guard Zones, page 111).
Timed Transmit: Helps conserve power by transmitting radar signals at set intervals.

Radar Setup Menu

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup.
Source: Selects the radar source when more than one radar is connected to the network.
Chart Display: Shows the chart under the radar image. When enabled, the Layers menu appears.
Orientation: Sets the perspective of the radar display.
Crosstalk Rej.: Reduces the appearance of clutter caused by interference from another nearby radar source.
Rotation Spd.: Sets the preferred speed at which the radar rotates. The High Speed option can be used to
increase the refresh rate. In some situations, the radar automatically rotates at the normal speed to improve
detection, for example, when a longer range is selected or when MotionScope or Dual range is used.
Appearance: Sets the color scheme, look-ahead speed, and navigation appearance.
Installation: Allows you to configure the radar for the installation, such as setting the front of the boat and the
antenna park position.
Reducing Cross Talk Clutter on the Radar Screen
You can reduce the appearance of clutter caused by interference from another nearby radar source, when the
cross talk reject setting is on.
NOTE: Depending upon the radar in use, the cross talk reject setting configured for use in one radar mode may
or may not be applied to other radar modes or to the Radar overlay.
From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Crosstalk Rej..

Radar Appearance Settings

From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Appearance.
NOTE: These settings do not apply to the radar overlay.
Bkgd. Color: Sets the color for the background.
Frgd. Color: Sets the color scheme for the radar returns.
Brightness: Sets the brightness of various radar features, such as range rings and tracking symbols.
Look-Ahead Speed: Shifts your present location toward the bottom of the screen automatically as your speed
increases. Enter your top speed for the best results.

118 Radar
Radar Installation Settings
Front of Boat: Compensates for the physical location of the radar when it is not on the boat axis (Measuring and
Setting the Front-of-Boat Offset, page 119).
Antenna Configuration: Sets the radar antenna size and sets the position in which the radar stops (Setting a
Custom Park Position, page 119).
No Transmit Zone: Sets the area in which the radar does not transmit signals (Enabling and Adjusting a Radar
No Transmit Zone, page 109).
Measuring and Setting the Front-of-Boat Offset
The front-of-boat offset compensates for the physical orientation of the radar scanner on a boat, if the radar
scanner does not align with the bow-stern axis. The front-of-boat offset setting configured for use in one radar
mode is applied to every other radar mode and to the radar overlay.
1 Using a magnetic compass, take an optical bearing of a stationary target located within viewable range.
2 Measure the target bearing on the radar.
3 If the bearing deviation is more than +/- 1 degree, set the front-of-boat offset.
4 From a radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Installation > Front of Boat.
5 Select Up or Down to adjust the offset.
Setting a Custom Park Position
By default, the antenna is stopped perpendicular to the pedestal when it is not spinning. You can adjust this
position.
1 From the radar screen, select Options > Radar Setup > Installation > Antenna Configuration > Park Position.
2 Use the slider bar to adjust the position of the antenna when stopped, and select Back.

Radar My Vessel Layer Settings

From a radar screen, select Options > Layers > My Vessel.
Heading Line: Shows an extension from the bow of the boat in the direction of travel on the radar screen.
Range Rings: Shows the range rings that help you to visualize distances on the radar screen.
Bearing Ring: Shows a bearing relative to your heading or based on a north reference, to help you determine the
bearing to an object shown on the radar screen.

Radar Overlay Chart Settings

You can quickly access and adjust the chart settings you want to appear on the radar overlay screen. From a
radar overlay screen, select Options > .
You can access and adjust all available chart settings, which are saved with the radar overlay (Chart Layers,
page 47)

Selecting a Different Radar Source

1 Select an option:
• From a radar screen or the radar overlay, select Options > Radar Setup > Source.
• Select > Communications > Preferred Sources > Radar.
2 Select the radar source.

Radar 119
 Autopilot
WARNING
You can use the autopilot feature only at a station installed next to a helm, throttle, and helm control device.
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot is a tool that enhances your
capability to operate your boat. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid
navigational hazards and never leave the helm unattended.
Always be prepared to promptly regain manual control of your boat.
Learn to operate the autopilot on calm and hazard-free open water.
Use caution when operating the autopilot near hazards in the water, such as docks, pilings, and other boats.
The autopilot system continuously adjusts the steering of your boat to maintain a constant heading (heading
hold). The system also allows manual steering and several modes of automatic-steering functions and patterns.
When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible Garmin autopilot system, you can engage and control the
autopilot from the chartplotter. For information about compatible Garmin autopilot systems, go to garmin.com.
When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible Yamaha autopilot system, you can control the autopilot
®

from the chartplotter using the Yamaha autopilot screen and overlay bar (Yamaha Autopilot, page 128). For
information about compatible Yamaha autopilot systems, contact your Yamaha dealer.

Autopilot Configuration
NOTICE
To avoid damage to your boat, the autopilot system should be installed and configured by a qualified marine
installer. Specific knowledge of marine steering and electrical systems is required for proper installation and
configuration.
The autopilot system must be configured to work properly with your boat. You can configure the autopilot
using a chartplotter on the same NMEA 2000 network as the autopilot. For configuration instructions, go to
support.garmin.com, and download the configuration guide for your specific autopilot model.

Selecting the Preferred Heading Source

NOTICE
For best results, use the autopilot CCU internal compass for the heading source. Using a third-party GPS
compass can cause the data to be delivered erratically and may result in excessive delays. The autopilot needs
timely information, and therefore cannot often use third-party GPS compass data for GPS location or speed.
If a third-party GPS compass is used, the autopilot will likely report loss of navigation data and speed source
periodically.
If you have more than one heading source on the network, you can select a your preferred source. The source
could be a compatible GPS compass or a magnetic heading sensor.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Preferred Sources
2 Select a source.
If the selected heading source is unavailable, the autopilot screen does not display any data.

Opening the Autopilot Screen

Before you can open the autopilot screen, you must have a compatible Garmin autopilot installed and
configured.
Select Vessel > Autopilot.

120 Autopilot
Autopilot Screen

Actual heading (when in standby mode)

Intended heading (when engaged)

Actual heading

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

Step turn to port (to adjust the intended heading by amount shown)

Step turn to starboard (to adjust the intended heading by amount shown)

Rudder position indicator (available when a rudder sensor is connected)

Adjusting the Step Steering Increment

1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Step Turn Size.
2 Select an increment.

Setting the Power Saver

You can adjust the level of rudder activity.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Power Mode Setup > Power Saver.
2 Select a percentage.
Selecting a higher percentage reduces rudder activity and heading performance. The higher the percentage,
the more the course deviates before the autopilot corrects it.
TIP: In choppy conditions at low speeds, increasing the Power Saver percentage reduces rudder activity.

Autopilot 121
Enabling the Shadow Drive™ Feature
WARNING
If the Shadow Drive feature is disabled, steering the boat manually will not disengage the autopilot system. You
must use the helm control or connected chartplotter to disengage the autopilot system.
NOTE: The Shadow Drive feature is not available on all autopilot models.
If the Shadow Drive feature has been disabled, you must enable it again before you can steer the boat manually
to disengage the autopilot system.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Shadow Drive Setup.
2 If Disabled is shown, select Shadow Drive to enable the Shadow Drive feature.
The Shadow Drive feature is enabled. You can repeat these steps to disable the feature again.

Autopilot Overlay Bar

NOTE: Not all options are available on all autopilot models.

Autopilot status

Engages and disengages heading hold

Steers left

Actual heading

Rudder position indicator (available only when a rudder sensor is connected)

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

Steers right

Engages the last used steering pattern

Engages follow route mode (available only when autopilot is in standby status and navigating using Go
To, Route To, or Auto Guidance)

Opens the full autopilot screen and menu

Engaging the Autopilot

When you engage the autopilot, the autopilot takes control of the helm and steers the boat to maintain your
heading.
From any screen, select Engage.
Your intended heading shows in the center of the Autopilot screen.

122 Autopilot
Adjusting the Heading Using the Helm
NOTE: You must enable the Shadow Drive feature before you can adjust the heading using the helm while the
autopilot is engaged .
With the autopilot engaged, manually steer the boat using the helm.
Shadow Drive and at the top of the heading screen appear in yellow, and you have full steering control
using the helm.
When you release the helm and maintain a specific heading for a few seconds, the autopilot resumes a
heading hold at the new heading.

Adjusting the Heading with the Chartplotter in Step Steering Mode

1 Engage a heading hold (Engaging the Autopilot, page 122).
2 Select an option:
• Select <1° or 1°> to initiate a single 1° turn.
• Select <<10° or 10°>> to initiate a single 10° turn.
• Hold <1° or 1°> to initiate a rate-controlled turn.
The boat continues to turn until you let go of the key.
• Hold <<10° or 10°>> to initiate a sequence of 10° turns.

Steering Patterns
WARNING
You are responsible for the safe operation of your boat. Do not begin a pattern until you are certain the water is
clear of obstacles.
The autopilot can steer the boat in preset patterns for fishing, and it can perform other specialty maneuvers
such as U-turns and Williamson turns.

Following the U-Turn Pattern

You can use the u-turn pattern to turn the boat around 180 degrees and maintain the new heading.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > U-Turn.
2 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following the Circles Pattern

You can use the circles pattern to steer the boat in a continuous circle, in a specified direction, and at a
specified time interval.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Circles.
2 If necessary, select Time, and select a time for the autopilot to steer one complete circle.
3 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following the Zigzag Pattern

You can use the zigzag pattern to steer the boat from port to starboard and back, over a specified time and
angle, across your present heading.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Zigzag.
2 If necessary, select Amplitude, and select a degree.
3 If necessary, select Period, and select a length of time.
4 Select Engage Zigzag.

Autopilot 123
Following the Williamson Turn Pattern
You can use the Williamson turn pattern to steer the boat around with the intent of running alongside the
location where the Williamson turn pattern was initiated. The Williamson turn pattern can be used in man
overboard situations.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Williamson Turn.
2 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Following an Orbit Pattern

You can use the orbit pattern to steer the boat in a continuous circle around the active waypoint. The size of the
circle is defined by your distance from the active waypoint when you begin the orbit pattern.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Orbit.
2 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following the Cloverleaf Pattern

You can use the cloverleaf pattern to steer the boat to repeatedly pass over an active waypoint. When you begin
the cloverleaf pattern, the autopilot drives the boat toward the active waypoint and begins the cloverleaf pattern.
You can adjust the distance between the waypoint and the location where the autopilot turns the boat for
another pass over the waypoint. The default setting turns the boat at a range of 1000 ft. (300 m) from the active
waypoint.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Cloverleaf.
2 If necessary, select Length, and select a distance.
3 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Setting Up and Following a Search Pattern

You can use the search pattern to steer the boat in increasingly larger circles outward from the active waypoint,
forming a spiral pattern. When you begin the search pattern, the autopilot immediately drives the boat in a circle
centered on the active waypoint and expands the spiral as it completes each circle.
You can adjust the distance between each circle in the spiral. The default distance between circles is 50 ft.
(20 m).
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Pattern Steering > Search.
2 If necessary, select Search Spacing, and select a distance.
3 Select Engage Port or Engage Starboard.

Cancelling a Steering Pattern

• Physically steer the boat.
NOTE: Shadow Drive feature must be enabled to cancel a steering pattern by physically steering the boat.
• Select or to cancel a pattern using step steering mode.
• Select Standby.

Adjusting the Autopilot Response

The Response setting allows you to adjust the autopilot responsiveness for varying sea and wind conditions.
For advanced autopilot configuration, see the configuration guide included with your autopilot system.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Response.
2 Adjust the rudder response.
If you want the rudder to be more responsive and move more quickly, increase the value. If the rudder is too
responsive and moving too quickly, decrease the value.

124 Autopilot
Enabling Auto Response
When using the autopilot system on a Sailboat or a Sailing Catamaran vessel, you can set the response setting
to Auto so that the autopilot system automatically adjusts the response setting based on sea conditions.
The Auto setting automatically lowers the response setting to Low (4) in calm sea conditions, and raises it
to Normal in rough sea conditions. The autopilot system uses pitch and roll information to determine sea
conditions, as well as wind data, if available.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Response.
2 Select Auto repeatedly until it shows the preferred sensitivity level, Low through High.
The response setting will adjust automatically based on sea conditions. The higher you set the auto
response setting, the system will be more sensitive to pitch, roll, and wind data when adjusting the response.

Low-Speed Autopilot Mode

If you operate the autopilot system at very low speeds, when trolling for example, you can enable a low-speed
mode that is more responsive in these situations.
The low-speed autopilot mode must be enabled before you can use it, and is available only for Power Planing
Hull or Power Displacement Hull vessels with the Speed Source set to GPS.

Enabling and Disabling Low-Speed Autopilot Mode

By default, the low-speed autopilot mode is disabled, and you must enable it in the autopilot settings before you
can use it.
1 From the autopilot screen, select Options > Autopilot Setup > Autopilot Installation Setup > Speed Source
Setup.
2 Select Autopilot Low Speed.
Low-speed autopilot mode is enabled.
3 Select Autopilot Low Speed again to disable low-speed autopilot mode.

Engaging and Disengaging Low Speed Autopilot Mode

You must enable low-speed autopilot mode in the Autopilot Installation Setup menu before you can engage
low-speed autopilot mode.
1 When driving the boat at a low speed (under 1 kn.), engage the heading hold.
A message banner appears asking if you would like to engage the low-speed autopilot heading hold.
2 Select Low Speed to engage low-speed mode.
NOTE: If you select Cancel or do nothing, the autopilot remains in normal heading hold.
The autopilot system operates with increased sensitivity and reaction for better performance at low speeds.
3 To disengage low-speed mode, disengage the autopilot or increase the boat speed above 12 kn.

Enabling the Autopilot Controls on a Garmin Watch

You can control the Garmin autopilot with a compatible Garmin watch. Go to garmin.com for a list of compatible
Garmin watches.
NOTE: Smart notifications are not available on your watch when the autopilot remote control is enabled.
1 Select Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Autopilot Control > Enable > New
Connection.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Autopilot 125
Customizing the Autopilot Button Actions
Before you can set the autopilot button actions, you must install and configure a compatible Garmin autopilot.
You can select up to three autopilot actions for your Garmin watch to perform.
NOTE: Available autopilot actions depend on the autopilot installed.
1 On the chartplotter, select Communications > Wireless Devices > Connect IQ™ Apps > Autopilot Control >
Button Actions.
2 Select a button.
3 Select an action.

Controlling the Autopilot with a GRID 20 Remote Control

NOTE: You can control the autopilot with a GRID 20 remote control only when the steering buttons are visible
on the screen. When including the autopilot screen as part of a combo, you may have to click on the autopilot
window in the combo to make it full screen before you are able to use the GRID 20 remote control.
• Press the knob to change the mode.
• While in step steering mode, turn the knob to steer.
Each turn of the knob produces a 1-degree step turn.
• While in autopilot response mode, turn the knob to adjust the Response setting.
• While in rudder steering mode, hold the joystick to the right or left to steer.

Reactor™ Autopilot Remote Control

WARNING
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot is a tool that enhances your
capability to operate your boat. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid
navigational hazards and never leave the helm unattended.
You can wirelessly connect a Reactor autopilot remote control to the chartplotter to control the compatible
Reactor autopilot system.
For more information about using the remote, see the Reactor autopilot remote control instructions at
garmin.com

Pairing a Reactor Autopilot Remote Control With a Chartplotter

1 Select Options > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > Autopilot Remote.
2 If necessary, select Enable.
3 Select New Connection.
4 On the remote control, select > Pair with MFD.
The chartplotter beeps and shows a confirmation message.
5 On the chartplotter, select Yes to complete the pairing process.

Changing the Functions of the Reactor Autopilot Remote Control Action Keys
You can change the patterns or actions assigned to the Reactor autopilot remote control action keys.
1 Select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Wireless Remotes > Autopilot Remote > Button Actions.
2 Select an action key to change.
3 Select a pattern or action to assign to the action key.

126 Autopilot
Updating the Reactor Autopilot Remote Control Software
You can update the Reactor autopilot remote control software using the chartplotter.
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot on the computer.
2 Go to garmin.com/software/autopilot_remote_control, and select Software.
3 Select Download.
4 Read and agree to the terms.
5 Select Download.
6 Choose a location, and select Save.
7 Double-click the downloaded file.
8 Select Next.
9 Select the drive associated with the memory card, and select Next > Finish.
10 On the chartplotter, insert the memory card into the card slot.
11 Select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Autopilot Remote > Update Software.

Power Steering Mode

CAUTION
When using a jog lever in power steering mode, the autopilot system does not establish a heading hold. You are
responsible for the safe operation of your boat.
When using a GNA™ 10 adapter to connect a jog lever to an autopilot system installed on a power displacement
hull vessel, you can enable an optional power steering mode to use the jog lever to steer the vessel with no
autopilot intervention. When using the jog lever in power steering mode, it behaves differently than using it in the
standard autopilot heading hold or when using the autopilot to follow a route.
When using a jog lever while in standard autopilot heading hold, pressing or holding the jog lever port or
starboard turns the boat until you release the jog lever. The autopilot system then resumes a heading hold for
your new heading, making adjustments as needed to maintain the new heading.
When using a jog lever while following a route using the autopilot system, pressing or holding the jog lever
port or starboard stops following the route and turns the boat until you release the jog lever. The autopilot
system then resumes a heading hold for your new heading, making adjustments as needed to maintain the new
heading. It does not resume the initial route.
When using the jog lever while in power steering mode, pressing or holding the jog lever port or starboard turns
the boat until you release the jog lever. The autopilot system does not establish a heading hold and the rudder
stays in the position where you released the jog lever.

Enabling Power Steering Mode

Before you can select the option to Engage Power Steering on the chartplotter or helm control device, you must
first enable power steering mode in the autopilot settings.
NOTE: The option to enable power steering mode is available only when the GNA 10 adapter is installed
correctly and the vessel type is set to power planing.
From the autopilot page, select > Autopilot Setup > Power Steering.
The Power Steering setting is enabled, and the option to Engage Power Steering is now available in the autopilot
menu.

Autopilot 127
Yamaha Autopilot
WARNING
You can use the autopilot feature only at a station installed next to a helm, throttle, and helm control device.
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot is a tool that enhances your
capability to operate your boat. It does not relieve you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid
navigational hazards and never leave the helm unattended.
Always be prepared to promptly regain manual control of your boat.
Learn to operate the autopilot on calm and hazard-free open water.
Use caution when operating the autopilot near hazards in the water, such as docks, pilings, and other boats.
The autopilot system continuously adjusts the steering of your boat to maintain a constant heading (heading
hold).
When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible Yamaha autopilot system, you can view the autopilot
information using the Yamaha autopilot screen and overlay bar. For information about compatible Yamaha
autopilot systems, contact your Yamaha dealer.

Yamaha Autopilot Screen

Actual heading

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

128 Autopilot
Yamaha Autopilot Settings
From a Yamaha engine screen, select Options > Autopilot Setting.
Pattern Set: Allows you to select an autopilot pattern.
Direction: Sets a port or starboard direction for the pattern.
Spacing: Sets the spacing for the pattern.
Length: Sets the length of the pattern.
Amplitude: Sets the angle for the zigzag pattern.
Initial Radius: Sets the radius of the spiral pattern.
Final Track Point Mode: Sets the mode for the autopilot when it reaches the end of a route. The FishPoint®
option maintains the position, but does not maintain the heading. The DriftPoint® option allows the boat to
drift with the wind or current while maintaining the selected heading, but does not maintain the position. The
StayPoint® option maintains the position and the heading. The Deceleration option stops the motor, but does
not maintain the position or heading. The No Deceleration option does not stop the motor.
Course Hold Offset: Sets a distance to navigate parallel to a route.
NOTE: Detailed information on the operation of the Yamaha Joystick and Autopilot system can be found in the
Quick Guide included with the latest Joystick/Autopilot kit.

Yamaha Autopilot Overlay Bar

Autopilot mode

Actual heading

Intended heading (heading the autopilot is steering toward)

Opens the full autopilot screen and menu

Autopilot 129
 Force Trolling Motor Control
®

WARNING
Do not run the motor when the propeller is out of the water. Contact with the rotating propeller may result in
severe injury.
Do not use the motor in areas where you or other people in the water may come into contact with the rotating
propeller.
Always disconnect the motor from the battery before handling or working with the propeller, propeller drive
motor, electrical connections, or electronics enclosures to avoid serious injury or property damage.
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The autopilot features on the trolling
motor are tools that enhance your capability to operate your boat. They do not relieve you of the responsibility
of safely operating your boat. Avoid navigational hazards and never leave the motor controls unattended.
Learn to operate the autopilot on calm and hazard-free open water.
Use caution when operating the autopilot near hazards in the water, such as docks, pilings, and other boats.

CAUTION
When using the autopilot features, be prepared for sudden stops, acceleration, and turns.
When stowing or deploying the motor, be aware of slick surfaces around the motor. Slipping when stowing or
deploying the motor may result in injury.
You can connect the Force trolling motor to the chartplotter to view and control the motor using the chartplotter.

Connecting to a Trolling Motor

You can connect the chartplotter wirelessly to a compatible Garmin Force trolling motor on your boat to control
the trolling motor from the chartplotter.
1 Turn on the chartplotter and the trolling motor.
2 Enable the Wi‑Fi network on the chartplotter (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page 32).
3 If multiple chartplotters are connected on the Garmin Marine Network, make sure this chartplotter is the host
of the Wi‑Fi network (Changing the Wi‑Fi Host, page 32).
4 On the chartplotter, select > Communications > Wireless Devices > Garmin Trolling Motor.
5 On the trolling motor display panel, press three times to enter pairing mode.
on the trolling motor display panel is solid blue as it searches for a connection to the chartplotter, and
turns green when the connection is successful.
After the chartplotter and trolling motor connect successfully, enable the trolling motor overlay bar to control
the motor (Adding the Trolling Motor Controls to Screens, page 130).

Adding the Trolling Motor Controls to Screens

After you have connected the chartplotter to the Force trolling motor, you must add the trolling motor control
bar to screens to control the trolling motor.
1 Open a screen from which you would like to control the trolling motor.
2 Select an option:
• From a full screen, select Options > Edit Overlays.
• From a combination screen, select Options > Edit > Overlays.
3 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
4 Select Trolling Motor Bar.
Repeat these steps to add the trolling motor controls to all of the screens from which you would like to control
the trolling motor.

130 Force Trolling Motor Control

®
Trolling Motor Control Bar
The trolling motor control bar allows you to control a Force trolling motor and see the status of the motor.
Select an item to engage it. The button illuminates when selected. Select the item again to disengage it.

Trolling motor battery status.

Turns the propeller on and off.

Reduces the speed.

Speed indicator.

Increases the speed.

Enables the cruise control at the current speed over ground (SOG).

Engages the propellor at full speed.

Trolling motor status.

Enables anchor lock, which uses the trolling motor to hold your position.

Steers the trolling motor.

When in anchor lock, jogs the anchor lock position forward, backward, left, or right.

Enables heading hold (set and maintain the current heading).

When the trolling motor is in heading hold, an autopilot bar appears in the trolling motor bar.

Opens the trolling motor settings.

Force Trolling Motor Control 131

®
Trolling Motor Settings
From the trolling motor bar, select .
Calibrate: Calibrates the trolling motor compass (Calibrating the Trolling Motor Compass, page 132) and sets
the trolling motor bow offset (Setting the Bow Offset, page 133).
Anchor Gain: Sets the response of the trolling motor when in anchor lock mode. If you need the trolling motor
to be more responsive and move quicker, increase the value. If the motor is moving too much, decrease the
value.
Navigation Gain: Sets the response of the trolling motor when navigating. If you need the trolling motor to be
more responsive and move quicker, increase the value. If the motor is moving too much, decrease the value.
Heading Hold Mode: Sets the heading hold mode. The Vessel Align option attempts to keep the boat pointing in
the same direction regardless of drift. The Go To option attempts to navigate a straight line in the requested
direction.
Arrival Mode: Sets the behavior of the trolling motor when you reach the end of a route. With the Anchor Lock
setting, the trolling motor holds the position using the anchor lock feature when the boat reaches the end of
the route. With the Manual setting, the propeller turns off when the boat reaches the end of the route.
CAUTION
You are responsible for the safe operation of your boat. When using the Manual setting for the Arrival Mode
option, you must be ready to take control of the boat.
Auto Power On: Turns on the trolling motor when you apply power to the system.
Prop. Stow Side: Sets which side of the trolling motor the propellor rotates to when stowing the trolling motor.
This is helpful when you store other items near the stowed propellor.
Shortcut Keys: Enables the shortcut keys on the trolling motor remote control to work with this particular
chartplotter. The keys work with only one chartplotter at a time.
Restore Defaults: Resets the trolling motor settings to the factory default values.

Assigning a Shortcut to the Trolling Motor Remote Control Shortcut Keys

You can quickly open commonly used screens by assigning a shortcut key on the trolling motor remote control.
You can create a shortcut to screens, such as sonar screens and charts.
NOTE: If you have more than one chartplotter on the network, you can assign shortcut keys to one chartplotter
only.
1 Open a screen.
2 Hold a shortcut key.
TIP: The shortcut is also saved to the Pinned category with the shortcut key number.

Calibrating the Trolling Motor Compass

You must calibrate the compass in the trolling motor before you can use the autopilot features.
1 Drive the boat to an open area of calm water.
2 From the trolling motor bar, select > Calibrate > Compass Cal..
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

132 Force Trolling Motor Control

®
Setting the Bow Offset
Based on the installation angle, the trolling motor may not align with the center line of your boat. For the best
results, you should set the bow offset.
1 Adjust the angle of the trolling motor so it aligns with the center line of your boat , pointing straight
forward.

2 From the trolling motor bar, select > Calibrate > Bow Offset.

Calibrating the Steering Alignment

The Garmin trolling motor shaft is aligned at the factory by Garmin, and should not need regular alignment.
Occasionally, due to an impact or an unexpected manual shaft rotation, the trolling motor steering may appear
off, or you may receive an error message regarding the steering alignment. You can perform this alignment
procedure to correct this type of error.
1 Deploy the trolling motor.
2 From the trolling motor bar, select > Calibrate > Steering Alignment.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions and select Begin.
NOTICE
The trolling motor will perform a number of steering motions during the calibration process.
4 Wait until the calibration process is complete.

Force Trolling Motor Control 133

®
 Digital Selective Calling
Networked Chartplotter and VHF Radio Functionality
When you connect a compatible VHF radio to your chartplotter, these features are enabled.
• The chartplotter can transfer your GPS position to your radio. If your radio is capable, GPS position
information is transmitted with DSC calls.
• The chartplotter can receive digital selective calling (DSC) distress and position information from the radio.
• The chartplotter can track the positions of vessels sending position reports.
If you have a Garmin NMEA 2000 VHF radio connected to your chartplotter, these features are also enabled.
• The chartplotter allows you to quickly set up and send individual routine call details to your Garmin VHF
radio.
• When you initiate a man-overboard distress call from your radio, the chartplotter shows the man-overboard
screen and prompts you to navigate to the man-overboard point.
• When you initiate a man-overboard distress call from your chartplotter, the radio shows the Distress Call page
to initiate a man-overboard distress call.
• You can initiate other SOS calls on the chartplotter and send them using the radio.
For information about installing and connecting a VHF radio, see the VHF radio installation instructions.

Turning On DSC
Select > Other Vessels > DSC.

DSC List
The DSC list is a log of the most recent DSC calls and other DSC contacts you have entered. The DSC list can
contain up to 100 entries. The DSC list shows the most recent call from a boat. If a second call is received from
the same boat, it replaces the first call in the call list.
You can view the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).

Viewing the DSC List

Before you can view the DSC list, the chartplotter must be connected to a VHF radio that supports DSC.
From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).

Adding a DSC Contact

You can add a vessel to your DSC list. You can make calls to a DSC contact from the chartplotter.
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List > Add Contact.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Enter the Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) of the vessel.
3 Enter the name of the vessel.

Incoming Distress Calls

If your chartplotter is connected to a compatible VHF radio, your chartplotter alerts you when your VHF radio
receives a DSC distress call. If position information was sent with the distress call, that information is also
available and recorded with the call.
designates a distress call in the DSC list and marks the position of the vessel on the Navigation chart at the
time of the DSC distress call.

134 Digital Selective Calling

Navigating to a Vessel in Distress
The icon designates a distress call in the DSC list and marks the position of a vessel on the Navigation chart
at the time of the DSC distress call.
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a position-report call.
3 Select Review > Navigate To.
4 Select Go To or Route To.

Man-Overboard Distress Calls Initiated from a VHF Radio

When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible VHF radio with NMEA 2000, and you initiate a man-
overboard DSC distress call from the radio, the chartplotter shows the man-overboard screen and prompts you
to navigate to the man-overboard point. If you have a compatible autopilot system connected to the network,
the chartplotter prompts you to start a Williamson’s turn to the man-overboard point.
If you cancel the man-overboard distress call on the radio, the chartplotter screen prompting you to activate
navigation to the man-overboard location disappears.

Man-Overboard and SOS Distress Calls Initiated from the Chartplotter

When your chartplotter is connected to a Garmin NMEA 2000 compatible radio and you mark an SOS or
man-overboard location, the radio shows the Distress Call page so you can quickly initiate a distress call.
For information on placing distress calls from your radio, see the VHF radio owner’s manual. For information
about marking an MOB or SOS location, see Marking a Man Overboard or Other SOS Location, page 57.

Position Tracking
You can connect a VHF radio to the same NMEA 2000 network as the chartplotter to send position reports and
track vessels that send position reports. The vessel must send the correct PGN data (PGN 129808; DSC Call
Information) to use this feature.
You can connect the chartplotter to a VHF radio using NMEA 0183, to send position reports and track vessels
that send position reports.
Every position report call received is logged in the DSC list (DSC List, page 134).

Viewing a Position Report

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a position-report call.
3 Select Review.
4 Select an option:
• To view the position report details, select .
• To view to a chart marking the location, select .

Navigating to a Tracked Vessel

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a position-report call.
3 Select Review > Navigate To.
4 Select Go To or Route To.

Digital Selective Calling 135

Creating a Waypoint at the Position of a Tracked Vessel
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a position-report call.
3 Select Review > Create Waypoint.

Editing Information in a Position Report

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a position-report call.
3 Select Review > Edit.
• To enter the name of the vessel, select Name.
• To select a new symbol, select Symbol, if available.
• To enter a comment, select Comment.
• To show a trail line for the vessel if your radio is tracking the position of the vessel, select Trail.
• To select a color for the trail line, select Trail Line.

Deleting a Position-Report Call

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a position-report call.
3 Select Review > Edit > Clear Report.

Viewing Vessel Trails on the Chart

You can view trails for all tracked vessels on some chart views. By default, a black line indicates the path of the
vessel, a black dot indicates each previously reported position of a tracked vessel, and a blue flag indicates the
last reported position of the vessel.
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select Options > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC Trails.
2 Select the number of hours to show tracked vessels on the chart.
For example, if you select 4 Hours, all trail points that are less than four hours old appear for all tracked
vessels.

Individual Routine Calls

When you connect the chartplotter to a Garmin VHF radio, you can use the chartplotter interface to set up an
individual routine call.
When setting up an individual routine call from your chartplotter, you can select the DSC channel on which you
want to communicate. The radio transmits this request with your call.

136 Digital Selective Calling

Selecting a DSC Channel
NOTE: The selection of a DSC channel is limited to those channels that are available in all frequency bands. The
default channel is 72. If you select a different channel, the chartplotter uses that channel for subsequent calls
until you call using another channel.
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a vessel or a station to call.
3 Select Review > Call with Radio > Channel.
4 Select an available channel.

Making an Individual Routine Call

NOTE: When initiating a call from the chartplotter, if the radio does not have an MMSI number programmed, the
radio will not receive call information.
1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select > Layers > Other Vessels > DSC > DSC List.
TIP: You can quickly access the DSC list from the messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings,
page 165).
2 Select a vessel or a station to call.
3 Select Review > Call with Radio.
4 If necessary, select Channel, and select a new channel.
5 Select Send.
The chartplotter sends information about the call to the radio.
6 On your Garmin VHF radio, complete the call.

Making an Individual Routine Call to an AIS Target

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select an AIS target.
2 Select AIS Vessel > Call with Radio.
3 If necessary, select Channel, and select a new channel.
4 Select Send.
The chartplotter sends information about the call to the radio.
5 On your Garmin VHF radio, complete the call.

Gauges and Graphs

The gauges and graphs provide various information about the engine and environment. To view the information,
a compatible transducer or sensor must be connected to the network.

Gauges and Graphs 137

Viewing the Gauges
1 Select Vessel.
2 Select a gauge, such as Vessel.

3 Select or to view a different gauge page, if applicable.

Engine Alert Icons

If an icon lights up on the gauges page, it indicates an issue with the motor.

Low oil level or oil pressure alert

Temperature alert

Battery voltage alert

Check engine alert

Changing the Data Shown in a Gauge

1 Open a gauge page.
2 Select Options > Edit Gauge Pages.
3 Select a gauge to edit.
TIP: You can hold any gauge to quickly change the data.
4 Select Replace Data.
5 Select a data type.
6 Select the data to display.

138 Gauges and Graphs

Customizing the Gauges
You can add a gauge page, change the layout of the gauge page, change how the gauges are displayed, and
change the data in each gauge.
1 Open a gauge page.
2 Select Options > Edit Gauge Pages.
3 If necessary, select a gauge view or gauge to edit.
4 Select an option:
• To change the data shown in a gauge, select the gauge and select Replace Data.
• To change the layout of the gauges on the page, select Change Layout.
• To add a page to this set of gauge pages, select Add Page.
• To remove a page from this set of gauge pages, select Remove Page.
• To change the order of this page in the set of gauge pages, select Move Page Left or Move Page Right.
• To restore this page to the original view, select Restore Default View.

Customizing Engine Gauge and Fuel Gauge Limits

You can configure the upper and lower limits and the range of desired standard operation of a gauge.
NOTE: Not all options are available for all gauges.
1 From an applicable gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Set Gauge Limits.
2 Select a gauge to customize.
3 Select an option:
• To set the minimum value of the standard operating range, select Rated Min..
• To set the maximum value of the standard operating range, select Rated Max..
• To set the lower limit of the gauge lower than the rated minimum, select Scale Min..
• To set the upper limit of the gauge higher than the rated maximum, select Scale Max..
4 Select the limit value.
5 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set additional gauge limits.

Selecting the Number of Engines Shown in Gauges

You can show information for up to four engines.
1 From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Engine Selection > Num. Engines.
2 Select an option:
• Select the number of engines.
• Select Auto Configure to automatically detect the number of engines.

Customizing the Engines Shown in Gauges

Before you can customize how the engines are shown in the gauges, you must manually select the number of
engines (Selecting the Number of Engines Shown in Gauges, page 139).
1 From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Engine Selection > Num. Engines.
2 Select First Engine.
3 Select the engine to display in the first gauge.
4 Repeat for the remaining engine bars.

Enabling Status Alarms for Engine Gauges

You can enable the chartplotter to display engine status alarms.
From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Status Alarms > On.
When an engine alarms is triggered, a gauge status alarm message appears and the gauge may become red
depending on the type of alarm.

Gauges and Graphs 139

Enabling Some Engine Gauge Status Alarms
1 From the engine gauges screen, select Options > Installation > Status Alarms > Custom.
2 Select one or more engine gauge alarms to turn on or off.

Yamaha Engine Gauges

Select Vessel > YAMAHA to view the Yamaha engine gauges. This screen varies based on the engine network
and throttle controller.

140 Gauges and Graphs

 Data fields
Hold to replace the data.

Current time
Hold to view trip data.

Select to toggle the autopilot bar on and off (Helm Master EX).
®

Select to set the joystick button for Set Point functions (Helm Master).

Tank level information

Hold a tank to view detailed tank level sensor information.

Status icons
GPS signal strength (Helm Master)

Select to set the Fish Point settings (Helm Master/Helm Master EX).
Select to set the trolling speed (Helm Master/Helm Master EX/Mechanical RC/Digital Electronic RC
(6X6/6X7)).

Data fields
Hold to replace the data.

Shift position

Tachometer and trim angle

Hold to change the background.

Engine information
Hold to replace the data and change the gauge appearance.

Engine Condition Icons

Orange icons indicate engine conditions.

Yamaha security system is on.

Engines are under synchronization control.

Engines are warming up.

Gauges and Graphs 141

Engine Alert Icons
Red icons indicate engine abnormalities.
NOTICE
Consult your Yamaha dealer if the problem cannot be located and corrected.

Low cooling water pressure.

Low oil pressure.

Stop the engine. Check the engine oil level, and add more oil if necessary.
NOTICE
Do not continue to run the engine if this indicator is on. Serious engine damage will occur.

Engine overheating.
Stop the engine immediately. Check the cooling water inlet, and clear it if it is blocked.
NOTICE
Do not continue to run the engine if this indicator is on. Serious engine damage will occur.

Low battery voltage.

Check the battery and battery connections, and tighten all loose battery connections.
Return to port soon if tightening the battery connections does not increase the battery voltage. Consult
your Yamaha dealer immediately.
NOTE: Do NOT stop the engine when this alert is on. If you do, you may not be able to restart the
engine.

Water in the fuel.

Water has collected in the fuel filter (fuel separator).
Stop the engine immediately and consult the engine manual to drain the water from the fuel filter.
NOTE: Gasoline mixed with water might cause damage to the engine.

Check engine/maintenance alert.

Consult your Yamaha dealer immediately. The check engine alert also appears when more than 100
hours have elapsed since the previous maintenance.

Engine alert notification. (Helm Master)

Engine emission issue.

Setting Up the Gauges

Configuring the Number of Engines
1 From a gauges screen, select Options > Num. Engines.
2 Select the number of engines.

142 Gauges and Graphs

Configuring the Tank Level Sensors
1 From a gauges screen, select Options > Tank Preset.
2 Select a tank level sensor to configure.
3 Select Name, enter a name, and select Done.
4 Select Type, and select the type of sensor.
5 Select Style, and select the style of sensor.
6 Select Tank Capacity, enter the capacity of the tank, and select Done.
7 Select Calibration, and follow the on-screen instructions to calibrate the tank levels.
If you do not calibrate the tank levels, the system uses default settings for the tank levels.
Changing the Data Shown
1 From a data screen, hold a customizable item.
2 Select a data type.
3 Select the data to display.
Yamaha Engine Data Settings
NOTICE
Be sure the settings are set correctly. If not, the engine screen will not display the correct information.
From a Yamaha engine screen, select Options.
Trip: Displays information about the trip, such as distance and hours, and allows you to reset these values.
Maintenance Reminder: Displays maintenance information, enables you to set the maintenance intervals, and
allows you to reset the time elapsed since the previous maintenance.
Tank Preset: Sets the tank name, fluid type, sensor style, and tank capacity, and calibrates the sensor.
Trim Assist: Turns the trim assist feature on or off. Available on the Helm Master system equipped with a digital
engine control (DEC) system.
Steer Friction: Sets the friction on the steering wheel. The friction adjusts automatically according to the engine
speed. Available on the Helm Master system equipped with a digital engine control (DEC) system.
Lock to Lock: Sets the number of times the steering wheel can be turned between locks, fully to port and fully to
starboard.
Speed Control: Sets the speed source to GPS or RPM. Using GPS as the Speed Source is available only with
the Helm Master EX system equipped with an autopilot or joystick. GPS is not available on the Helm Master
system.
Autopilot Setting: Configures the Yamaha autopilot settings. Available on the Helm Master EX system equipped
with an autopilot. For Garmin autopilot information, see (Autopilot, page 120).
Joystick and Set Point: Sets the joystick thrust, trim angle and preset, fine tuning distance, and fish point
settings. Available on the Helm Master system and the Helm Master EX system equipped with a joystick.
Trim Assist Preset: Sets up the trim assist presets. Available on the Helm Master system equipped with a
digital engine control (DEC) system.
Fuel Flow Offset: Sets the offset for the fuel flow data.
Off Timer: Turns off the system one hour after the engine is turned off.
Battery Management: Configures the battery management system, such as setting the type and capacity of
the batteries. Also displays the battery status. Available on Helm Master EX systems equipped with Battery
Management System (BMS).
Calibration: Calibrates various features, such as the Trim Zero Set and compass.
Reset: Resets the engine and gateway data.

Gauges and Graphs 143

Mercury Engine Gauges
®

NOTE: This feature is available only when connected to the Mercury SmartCraft Connect gateway. The available
data varies based on the engine network and may include RPM, engine hours, coolant pressure, oil pressure, and
other data.
Select Vessel > Mercury to view the Mercury engine gauges.

Engine voltage or Mercury Steering Angle7

Boat status

Boat speed

Fuel

Transmission gear

Engine speed

Trim tabs

Engine trim

TIP: To view additional engine details, select Options > Engine Data.

7 The Mercury Steering Angle may appear on the display, depending on the engine model and configuration, and its location on the display may vary.

144 Gauges and Graphs

Setting the Fuel Alarm
CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
Before you can set a fuel level alarm, you must connect a compatible fuel flow sensor to the chartplotter.
You can set an alarm to sound when the total amount of remaining onboard fuel reaches the level you specify.
1 Select > Alarms > Fuel > Total Fuel Onboard > On.
2 Enter the remaining amount of fuel that triggers the alarm, and select Done.

Synchronizing the Fuel Data with the Actual Vessel Fuel

If you are using fuel flow sensors, you must synchronize the fuel levels in the chartplotter with the actual
fuel in the vessel when you add fuel to your vessel. If you are using fuel tank sensors, the level is adjusted
automatically based on the tank level sensor data and it is not necessary to synchronize fuel levels manually
(Fuel Settings, page 214).
1 Select Vessel.
2 Select Engines or Fuel.
3 Select Options.
4 Select an option:
• If you have filled up all the fuel tanks on the vessel, select Fill Up All Tanks. The fuel level is set to
maximum capacity.
• If you have added less than a full tank of fuel, select Add Fuel to Boat, and enter the amount added.
• To specify the total fuel in the vessel tanks, select Set Total Fuel Onboard, and enter the total amount of
fuel in the tanks.

Viewing the Wind Gauges

Before you can view wind information, you must have a wind sensor connected to the chartplotter.
Select Vessel > Wind.

Configuring the Sailing Wind Gauge

You can configure the sailing wind gauge to show true or apparent wind speed and angle.
1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Edit Gauge Pages.
2 In the window on the left, select the Sailing Wind Gauge.
3 Select an option:
• To show true or apparent wind angle, select Needle, and select an option.
• To show true or apparent wind speed, select Wind Speed, and select an option.

Configuring the Speed Source

You can specify whether the vessel speed data displayed on the gauge and used for wind calculations is based
on water speed or GPS speed.
1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Edit Gauge Pages.
2 In the window on the left, select Compass Gauge.
3 Select Speed Display, and select an option:
• To calculate the vessel speed based on data from the water-speed sensor, select Water.
• To calculate the vessel speed based on GPS data, select Satellite Positioning.

Gauges and Graphs 145

Configuring the Heading Source of the Wind Gauge
You can specify the source of the heading displayed on the wind gauge. Magnetic heading is the heading data
received from a heading sensor, and GPS heading is calculated by your chartplotter GPS (course over ground).
1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Edit Gauge Pages.
2 In the window on the left, select Compass Gauge.
3 Select Heading Source, and select an option:
• To use heading data received from a heading sensor, select Magnetic.
• To use heading data calculated using GPS, select GPS.
NOTE: When moving at low speeds or when stationary, the magnetic compass source is more accurate than
the GPS source.

Customizing the Close-Hauled Wind Gauge

You can specify the range of the close-hauled wind gauge for both the upwind scale and the downwind scale.
1 From the wind gauge, select Options > Edit Gauge Pages.
2 In the window on the left, select Compass Gauge or Sailing Wind Gauge.
3 Select Replace Data > Sailing > Close Hauled Gauge.
The Compass Gauge or Sailing Wind Gauge is replaced by the Close Hauled Gauge.
4 Select an option:
• To set the maximum and minimum values that appear when the upwind close-hauled wind gauge appears,
select Change Upwind Scale, and set the angles.
• To set the maximum and minimum values that appear when the downwind close-hauled wind gauge
appears, select Change Downwind Scale, and set the angles.
• To view true or apparent wind, select Wind, and select an option.

Viewing Trip Gauges

Trip gauges show information for odometer, speed, time, and fuel for your present trip.
Select Vessel > Trip.

Resetting Trip Gauges

1 Select Vessel > Trip > Options.
2 Select an option:
• To set all the readings for the present trip to zero, select Reset Trip.
• To set the maximum speed reading to zero, select Reset Maximum Speed.
• To set the odometer reading to zero, select Reset Odometer.
• To set all the readings to zero, select Reset All.

Viewing Graphs
Before you can view graphs of various environmental changes, such as temperature, depth, and wind, you must
have an appropriate transducer or sensor connected to the network.
You can view graphs of sensor data by creating a new Combo page or by adding a graph to an existing Combo
page.
1 Create a new Combo page or open an existing Combo page (Creating a New Combination Page, page 19).
2 Select the window where you want to add a graph, and select Graphs.
3 Select the graph you want to add.
TIP: You can change the graph in an active combo window by selecting > Change Graph, and selecting a new
graph.

146 Gauges and Graphs

Setting the Graph Range and Time Scales
You can indicate the amount of time and the range of sensor data that appears in the depth, wind, and water
temperature graphs.
1 Select a graph in a Combo page, and select .
2 Select an option:
• To set a time-elapsed scale, select Duration. The default setting is 10 minutes. Increasing the time-
elapsed scale allows you to view variations over a longer period of time. Decreasing the time-elapsed
scale allows you to view more detail over a shorter period of time.
• To set the graph scale, select Scale. Increasing the scale allows you to view more variation in readings.
Decreasing the scale allows you to view more detail in the variation.

Disabling Graph Filtering

The wind speed and wind angle graph filtering smooths out sensor data before it is displayed on a graph. The
default setting is On. You can disable the filtering.
1 Select a graph in a Combo page, and select . .
2 Select Filter > Off.

inReach Messages
WARNING
Do not read or reply to notifications while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the
water can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.
You can connect a compatible inReach satellite communicator to the chartplotter to view, reply to, and send
messages from the chartplotter.
NOTICE
The inReach device must be connected to the chartplotter and receiving satellite signals to send and receive
messages using the chartplotter.
Messages received and sent by the inReach device are grouped as conversations that are identified using the
names or addresses of the contacts included in the messages.
All messages are limited to 160 characters, including the name, address, or phone number of the contact
or contacts included in the message. If you send a message to larger groups of contacts, this reduces the
available characters for the message itself. When composing a message, the available character information is
shown in real time on the chartplotter to help avoid exceeding the character limit.

Connecting an inReach Device to the Chartplotter

You can connect a compatible inReach device to the chartplotter to manage messages.
1 Bring the inReach device within 3 m (10 ft.) of the chartplotter.
2 Select an option:
• On an inReach Mini device, from the main menu, select Setup > ANT+ > Status > On.
• On an inReach Mini 2 device or inReach Messenger , from the main menu, select Settings > inReach
Remote > Status.
• On a GPSMAP 86i, from the main menu, select Setup > Sensors > inReach Remote > Enabled > On.
3 On the chartplotter, select Vessel > InReach® > Start Pairing.
The chartplotter begins searching for and connecting to the inReach device. This can take up to 60 seconds.
4 If necessary, compare the code on the inReach device to the chartplotter, and select OK if they match.
The inReach and chartplotter connect automatically when they are within range.

inReach Messages 147

Receiving Messages
When your inReach device receives a message, a pop-up notification appears briefly on the GPSMAP screen.
• To review the full message, select View Message.
• To dismiss the pop-up notification, select OK or wait for the notification to close automatically.

Replying to a Message
You can reply to an inReach message with a pre-written quick message or a custom message.
1 From the InReach® page, select Conversations.
TIP: You can also access inReach conversations from All Communications > Conversations in the
messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).
2 Highlight a conversation, and select View Conversation.
3 Select an option:
• To send a quick message, select Send Quick Message (Sending a Quick Message, page 149).
• To send a custom message, select Send Custom Message (Sending a Custom Message, page 149).
4 Review the message, and select Send.

Sending a Preset or Check-In Message

Preset or check-in messages are predefined messages that you prepare for specific contacts using the
Garmin Messenger™ app or on your account at explore.garmin.com. You cannot customize the text of check-in
messages, only the contacts who will receive it.
1 From the InReach® page, select Conversations > Send Preset Message.
TIP: You can also access inReach conversations from All Communications > Conversations in the
messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).
2 Select a preset or check-in message.
3 Select Send.

Starting a New Conversation

1 From the InReach® page, select Conversations > Start Conversation.
TIP: You can also access inReach conversations from All Communications > Conversations in the
messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).
2 Add recipients:
• To include an existing contact in the conversation, highlight the contact, and select Include.
• To include a new contact in the conversation, select Enter New Recipient, and provide the phone number,
email address, or inReach address for the new contact.
3 Select an option:
• To send a quick message, select Send Quick Message (Sending a Quick Message, page 149).
• To send a custom message, select Send Custom Message (Sending a Custom Message, page 149).
4 Review the message details, and select Send.

148 inReach Messages

Sending a Quick Message
Quick messages are predefined messages that you prepare on your account at explore.garmin.com. Quick
messages contain custom text, and are not assigned to a specific contact in your account. They can be used as
needed when sending or replying to inReach messages on the chartplotter.
1 From the InReach® page, select Conversations.
TIP: You can also access inReach conversations from All Communications > Conversations in the
messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).
2 Select an existing conversation or start a new conversation (Starting a New Conversation, page 148).
3 Select Send Quick Message, and select the preset message to send.
4 Review the message, and select Send.

Sending a Custom Message

1 From the InReach® page, select Conversations.
TIP: You can also access inReach conversations from All Communications > Conversations in the
messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).
2 Select an existing conversation or start a new conversation (Starting a New Conversation, page 148).
3 Select Send Custom Message.
4 Compose the message, and select Done.
5 Review the message, and select Send.

inReach SOS Calls

WARNING
Before you can use the SOS function, you must have an active satellite subscription on the connected inReach
device. Always test your device before you use it outdoors.
Ensure the inReach device has a clear view of the sky when using the SOS function, because this feature
requires satellite access to operate properly.

NOTICE
Some jurisdictions regulate or prohibit the use of satellite communications devices. It is the responsibility of the
user to know and follow all applicable laws in the jurisdictions where the device is intended to be used.
When a compatible inReach device is paired to the chartplotter, you can contact the Garmin Response center to
request help. From the chartplotter, you can initiate, cancel, and monitor the status of an inReach SOS call, as
well as communicate with the Garmin Response team while you wait for help to arrive.
You should only use the SOS function in a real emergency situation.

Sending an inReach SOS Call

You must pair a compatible inReach device with your chartplotter before you can send an inReach SOS call
using the chartplotter.
1 From any screen, select SOS.
2 Select Activate inReach SOS.
The chartplotter initiates an SOS call from the paired inReach device, and creates an entry on the Conversations
page. You can communicate with the Garmin Response team using this conversation.

CAUTION
When an inReach SOS call is active do not turn off or attempt to turn off the inReach device or connected
chartplotter. Doing so could prevent this feature from operating properly and could delay receipt of assistance
in the event of an emergency

inReach Messages 149

Communicating with the Garmin Response Team During an SOS Call
1 Send an inReach SOS call (Sending an inReach SOS Call, page 149).
A new entry for the SOS call appears in the Conversations page. The SOS conversation appears in red text.
2 Select the SOS conversation, and select View Conversation to view replies from the Garmin Response team.
NOTE: Replies from Garmin Response team also appear as message banners when received by the
chartplotter, and you can access new messages from the Warning Manager.
3 Select one or more actions:
• To view the full reply from the Garmin Response team, select the reply, and select View Message.
• To reply to the Garmin Response team, select Send Quick Message or Send Custom Message.
• To send information about your vessel to the Garmin Response team, select Send Vessel Data.

Cancelling an inReach SOS Call

You can cancel an inReach SOS call you sent using the chartplotter.
1 From the InReach® page, select Conversations.
TIP: You can also access inReach conversations from All Communications > Conversations in the
messages and warnings menu (Messages and Warnings, page 165).
2 Select the SOS conversation you want to cancel.
3 Select Cancel SOS, and confirm that you want to cancel the SOS call.

Digital Switching
Your chartplotter can be used to monitor and control circuits when connected to a compatible digital switching
system.
For example, you can control the interior lights and navigation lights on the vessel. You can also monitor live
well circuits.
For more information about purchasing and configuring a digital switching system, contact your Garmin dealer.

Adding and Editing a Digital Switching Page

You can add and customize digital switching pages on the chartplotter.
1 Select Vessel > Switching > Options > Setup.
2 Select Add Page or Edit Page.
3 Set up the page as needed:
• To enter a name for the page, select Name.
• To set up the switches, select Edit Switches.
• To add an image of the boat, select Add BoatView Image.
NOTE: You can use the default vessel image or use a custom image of your vessel. You should save the
custom image to the /Garmin folder on the memory card. You can also adjust the view and placement of
the image.

Garmin Boat Switch™

WARNING
Garmin strongly recommends using a professional installer with proper knowledge of electrical systems to
install the device. Incorrectly installing the device can result in serious bodily injury and damage to the vessel or
the battery.

Configuring the Garmin Boat Switch Device

Some digital switches controlled by the Garmin Boat Switch device must be configured before use.

150 Digital Switching

Configuring a Switch as Momentary
All latching and momentary channels on the Garmin Boat Switch device must be configured in the chartplotter
software as momentary switches for proper operation.
1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,
select > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.
2 Select the switch number.
3 Select Configuration > Momentary.
Naming a Switch
You can provide a custom name to be used instead of the default name for each switch.
1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,
select > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.
2 Select the switch number.
3 Select Name > Change Name.
4 Enter a new name.
5 Select Done.
Labeling a Switch
You can provide a custom label for each switch. The switch label is separate from the switch name.
1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,
select > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.
2 Select the switch number.
3 Select Label > Edit Label.
4 Enter a new label.
5 Select Done.
Showing and Hiding Switches
You can select which switches are hidden or displayed on the Garmin chartplotter.
1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,
select > My Vessel > Switching > NMEA Standard.
2 Select the switch number.
3 Select Visibility to show or hide the switch.

Digital Switching 151

Configuring the Navigation Light Option
NOTICE
It is your responsibility to comply with applicable laws, regulations, and standards related to the use and/or
operation of marine navigation lights. Garmin is not responsible for any fines, penalties, citations, or damages
that may be incurred due to any such lack of compliance.
By default, channels 1 and 2 are interlocked for navigation lighting to satisfy the international regulations for
preventing collisions at sea. Depending on the lighting specifics of your boat, you may need to configure the
Garmin Boat Switch device to use the wiring option you that applies to your installation type.
If you do not intend to connect navigation and anchor lights to the device, you can configure channels 1 and 2 to
operate independently as normal latching switches.
1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,
select Vessel > Switching.
2 Press and hold switch 1 for 5 seconds.
Switch 1 starts flashing.
3 Press and hold switch 2 for 5 seconds.
The switch stops flashing, and a message confirms the newly selected wiring option.
4 Repeat the previous two steps until the device is configured for the wiring option that applies to your
installation type.
NOTE: After selecting option C, the next configuration option in the cycle deactivates the interlocks so that
channels 1, 2, and 3 operate independently as normal latching switches.

Using the Bilge Pump Switches

You can manually operate connected bilge pumps by using switches 12 and 13 on the Garmin chartplotter.
1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,
select Vessel > Switching.
2 Select an option:
• Press and hold the bilge pump switch for one second to run the bilge pump for 2 minutes.
• Press and hold the bilge pump switch for three seconds to run the bilge pump continuously.
NOTE: Your Garmin chartplotter notifies you every 5 minutes while continuous mode is active.

Using Dimmable Lights

You can operate connected dimmable lights by using switches 17 through 21 on the Garmin chartplotter.
1 From a Garmin chartplotter connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the Garmin Boat Switch device,
select Vessel > Switching.
2 Select an option:
• Press a dimmable light switch to turn a light on or off.
NOTE: The light turns on at the dim level set when the light was last turned off.
• With a light on, press and hold a dimmable light switch dim the light, and release to stop dimming.
• With a light off, press and hold a dimmable light switch to turn on the light at 100% brightness.

152 Digital Switching

 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat
Power-Pole Anchor System
®

WARNING
Do not engage the Power-Pole Anchor System while underway. Doing so could cause result in an accident
causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
If a compatible Power-Pole anchor system is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, you can use the
chartplotter to control the Power-Pole anchor. The chartplotter automatically detects the Power-Pole anchor
system's C-Monster gateway on the NMEA 2000 network.
®

Enabling the Power-Pole Anchor or CHARGE™ Overlay

You must enable an overlay on the chartplotter to control the Power-Pole anchor system or a CHARGE power
management system on your vessel.
1 From the page to which you will add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.
TIP: To quickly select the overlay, select Toolbars then Anchor or Charge.
2 Select where you want to add the overlay.
3 Select Power-Pole® Anchor or Power-Pole® Charge.
After you enable the Power-Pole overlay on the chartplotter, you must set the Power-Pole installation mode to
match the Power-Pole anchor installation on the boat (Setting Up the Power-Pole Anchor, page 153).

Setting Up the Power-Pole Anchor

Before you can use the chartplotter to control the Power-Pole anchor, you must select the required installation
mode.
The default initial installation mode setting is None. While the installation mode is set to None, the chartplotter
control of the Power-Pole anchor(s) is inactive.
1 From the Power-Pole toolbar, select > Installation.
2 Select the installation mode that matches the anchor installation on the boat.
• To control a single port side Power-Pole anchor, select Port .
• To control a single starboard side Power-Pole anchor, select Starboard.
• To control dual Power-Pole anchors, select Dual.
3 Use the slider to set the desired speed for the anchor to deploy and retract.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 153

Power-Pole Overlay
Before you can control the Power-Pole anchor with the chartplotter, you must enable the overlay (Enabling the
Power-Pole Anchor or CHARGE™ Overlay, page 153) and set the Power-Pole installation mode (Setting Up the
Power-Pole Anchor, page 153).
The layout of the overlay varies based on the installation mode. Refer to your Power-Pole documentation for
more information.

Select to control both anchors simultaneously

Deselect to control the anchors independently

Select to fully retract the anchor

Select to fully extend the anchor

Hold to retract the anchor manually

Release to stop the anchor

Hold to extend the anchor manually

Release to stop the anchor

Select to open the menu

Select to enable the advanced boat control feature

NOTE: This option is available only when connected to a compatible Garmin trolling motor

PORT Port side anchor control buttons

STBD Starboard side anchor control buttons

154 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Power-Pole Advanced Boat Control
When the chartplotter is connected to a compatible Garmin trolling motor and a compatible Power-Pole anchor
system, you can enable advanced boat control functions that use both the Power-Pole anchors and the trolling
motor.
NOTE: You must enable Anchor Lock on the trolling motor before you can enable advanced boat control.
From the Power-Pole overlay, select to enable these advanced boat control functions.
NOTE: The first time you enable advanced boat control, you must perform a one-time process to set the max
depth and drag sensitivity. These settings can be adjusted later from the menu on the Power-Pole overlay.
Smart Anchor Selection: The system determines when to use the Anchor Lock function on the trolling motor or
the Power-Pole anchor system.
Drag Detection: If the Power-Pole shallow water anchors fail to hold the vessel's position, the anchors are
stowed automatically, the trolling motor attempts to return the vessel to the original position, and it redeploys
the anchors.
Anchor Jog: When using the trolling motor to move to a different anchor location, the system automatically
stows the anchors if necessary until the jog procedure is complete. The system then determines whether to
redeploy the anchors or use the trolling motor Anchor Lock function depending on the depth.
Trolling Motor Direction Control: When the Power-Pole anchors are deployed, you can rotate the angle of the
trolling motor as needed. This is helpful when you are using LiveScope on the trolling motor and you want to
view a different angle while anchored.
Auto-Stow: The system automatically stows Power-Pole anchors when you stow the trolling motor.
NOTE: If you want to continue using the Power-Pole anchors when stowing the trolling motor, you must
disable advanced boat control from the Power-Pole overlay.

CHARGE Overlay
Before you can add the CHARGE overlay, you must install a CHARGE power management system on your
vessel and connect it to a C-Monster control system. Both of these systems are Power-Pole products and
not produced by Garmin. After installing this hardware, you must configure the CHARGE power management
system and the C-Monster control system so the chartplotter can access and control the charge functions. See
the owner's manual provided with your CHARGE power management system for more information.
After installing and configuring the CHARGE power management system, you can enable the CHARGE overlay to
control the system using the chartplotter (Enabling the Power-Pole Anchor or CHARGE™ Overlay, page 153).
The layout of the overlay varies based on the size of the chartplotter model. Smaller models may show less text,
but the functions are the same.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 155

 Engine battery status.

CHARGE priority setting.

You can select an icon to quickly adjust the priority between the engine and the auxiliary
batteries.
The color of the bar indicates the battery-charging status. When a battery is being
charged, the bar near that battery appears green. When a battery is not receiving a
charge, the bar near that battery appears gray.

Auxiliary battery status.

Indicates that a battery is charging.

Indicates that a battery either is not charging or is being discharged into the other
battery.

Indicates that the CHARGE power management system is connected to shore power.

Select to start an emergency transfer of power from the auxiliary battery or batteries to
Emergency Transfer
the engine battery.

Enabling the Mercury Helm

WARNING
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The Mercury Helm does not steer the
boat for you and does not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely operate your boat could result in an
accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
With a Mercury engine configured to operate with the Mercury Helm engine control feature on the chartplotter,
you can enable one helm as the active Mercury Helm. The active Mercury Helm controls the Mercury engines
and Mercury chartplotter engine control overlays (for example Mercury Cruise). The overlays at non-active
helms are visible but disabled, so that users at a non-active helm cannot accidentally control the engine.
As you move around the boat, you can change the active Mercury Helm from station to station, up to four.
1 Select Settings > System > Station Information > Mercury Helm.
2 Make a selection.

Mercury Troll Control Features

WARNING
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The Mercury troll control features do not
steer the boat for you and do not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely operate your boat could result in
an accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can use the Mercury Troll overlay to set and adjust the
trolling speed from the chartplotter.

156 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Adding the Mercury Troll Control Overlay
When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can set and adjust the target speed using the Mercury
Troll overlay on the chartplotter.
1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.
TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.
2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
3 Select Mercury Troll.
4 Select Back.

Mercury Troll Overlay

When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can use the Mercury Troll overlay on the chartplotter to
set a target speed.

Select to decrease the target speed

Target speed

Select to increase the target speed

Actual speed

Enable Select to engage the Mercury Troll feature

Disable Select to disengage the Mercury Troll feature

Mercury Cruise Control

WARNING
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. Mercury Cruise Control does not steer
the boat for you and does not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely operate your boat could result in an
accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can set and adjust the cruise-control function using the
chartplotter.

Enabling the Mercury Cruise Control Overlay

1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.
TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.
2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
3 Select Mercury Cruise.
4 Select Back.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 157

Mercury Cruise Control Overlay

Select to decrease the target speed

Target speed

Select to increase the target speed

Actual speed

Enable Select to engage the cruise control

Disable Select to disengage the cruise control

Mercury Engine Details

WARNING
You are responsible for the maintenance of the engines on your vessel. Failure to properly maintain the engines
could result in an accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
When your chartplotter is connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can view engine data using the
Mercury Engine overlay on the chartplotter.

Adding the Mercury Engine Overlay

1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.
TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.
2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
3 Select Mercury Engine.
4 Select Back.

158 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Mercury Engine Overlay
You can use the Mercury Engine Overlay to view engine data (Adding the Mercury Engine Overlay, page 158).
NOTE: Due to space constraints on the overlay, some items may not appear if the vessel has multiple engines.

Port engine RPM

Starboard engine RPM

Total available fuel

Fuel usage

Sport Exhaust control (if supported) (Enabling the Mercury Engine Sport Exhaust Setting, page 159)

TIP: You can also view an overview of engine details on the Mercury gauges page (Mercury Engine Gauges,
®

page 144).

Enabling the Mercury Engine Sport Exhaust Setting

When your chartplotter is connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can use the Mercury Engine overlay
on the chartplotter to enable the Sport Exhaust setting. The Sport Exhaust setting alters the engine sound.
On the Mercury Engine overlay, select Sport Exhaust > On.
TIP: You can select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly open the overlay.
TIP: You can also enable the Sport Exhaust setting from the Mercury gauges page menu.

Mercury Active Trim Control

WARNING
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. Mercury Active Trim Control does not
control boat speed, does not steer the boat for you, and does not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely
operate your boat could result in an accident causing property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
When your chartplotter is connected to a compatible Mercury Active Trim system, you can control the system
using the Active Trim overlay on the chartplotter.

Adding the Mercury Active Trim Overlay

1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.
TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.
2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
3 Select Active Trim.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 159

Mercury Active Trim Overlay

When enabled, you can manually adjust the trim.

When enabled, you can change between Mercury active trim preset profiles.

Active trim system status.

Enable or Disable Select to turn the active trim system on or off.

Skyhook Digital Anchor Control

®

WARNING
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. The Skyhook digital anchor features do
not avoid navigational hazards. Failure to safely operate your boat could result in an accident causing property
damage, serious personal injury, or death.
When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can use the Skyhook digital anchor overlay on the
chartplotter to set and adjust the Skyhook, Drifthook, and Bowhook functions.
Skyhook Digital Anchor
When active, the boat attempts to maintain heading and position.
Drifthook: When active, the boat attempts to maintain heading, but the position may change.
Bowhook: When active, the boat attempts to keep the same position, but the heading may change.

Adding the Skyhook Digital Anchor Control Overlay

When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can add an overlay on the chartplotter to control the
Skyhook digital anchor functions.
1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.
TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.
2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
3 Select Mercury Skyhook.
4 Select Back.

160 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

Skyhook Digital Anchor Overlay
When connected to a compatible Mercury engine, you can use the Skyhook overlay on the chartplotter to control
the Skyhook digital anchor functions.
TIP: When the Skyhook digital anchor, Drifthook feature, or Bowhook feature is active, you can select Standby
on the menu bar to disengage the active digital anchor feature and resume manual control of the boat.

Information about the current heading and steering adjustments.

Adjusts the intended heading to port. The system steers the boat to the new heading.

Adjusts the intended heading to starboard. The system steers the boat to the new heading.

Drifthook Changes to Drifthook functionality.

Bowhook Changes to Bowhook functionality.

Drifthook Overlay
When the Skyhook overlay is enabled on the chartplotter, you can select Drifthook to change the Skyhook digital
anchor to use the Drifthook function.
TIP: When the Drifthook feature is active, you can select Standby on the menu bar to disengage the anchor and
resume manual control of the boat.

Adjusts the intended heading to port. The system steers the boat to the new heading.

Adjusts the intended heading to starboard. The system steers the boat to the new heading.

Drifthook Select again to return to Skyhook digital anchor functionality.

Bowhook Changes to Bowhook functionality.

Dometic Optimus Features

® ®

When connected to a compatible Optimus system, the chartplotter allows you to access and control the
system. You can enable the Optimus overlay to control the Optimus system (Activating the Optimus Overlay Bar,
page 161).
When necessary, the Optimus system provides messages with information, instructions, and alerts about faults
and hazards.
A no swimming icon indicates that you should not swim when certain Optimus modes are active. In these
modes, propeller control is automatic and could injure someone in the water.

Activating the Optimus Overlay Bar

1 From a chart, select Options > Edit Overlays.
2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
3 Select Optimus Bar.

Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat 161

Optimus Overlay Bar Overview
To use the overlay bar, you must connect your Optimus system to your chartplotter and add the overlay bar to
the necessary screens (Activating the Optimus Overlay Bar, page 161).

Control mode

Optimus control buttons

Rudder

Standby button

You must press a mode button on the overlay bar to engage or disengage the mode. When the mode is
engaged, the button is illuminated.
The overlay bar configuration and buttons vary, based on systems, modes, and equipment. Refer to your
Optimus documentation for more information.

Optimus Overlay Symbols

Autopilot heading hold

Autopilot track mode

Autopilot route mode

SeaStation position hold

®

SeaStation heading hold

Optimus Limp Home Mode

WARNING
In the event of a steering failure, Optimus Limp Home mode becomes available. Limp Home mode is a system
override that may severely limit your boat's control. It should only be used in an emergency if you are unable
to call for assistance. Proceed with extreme caution. Read the Optimus owner's manual and always wear a
personal flotation device (PFD).
You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel. Use of Limp Home mode does not relieve
you of the responsibility of safely operating your boat. Avoid navigational hazards and never leave the motor
controls unattended.
When available, the Limp Home button appears on the Optimus overlay bar. Refer to the Optimus owner's
manual before using Limp Home mode.
To engage Limp Home mode from any screen, select Where To > Warning Manager > Steering Limp Home.

162 Controlling Third-Party Equipment Installed on Your Boat

 Tide, Current, and Celestial Information
Tide and Current Overlays

Tide station overlay bar.

Current station overlay bar.

Name of the selected tide or current station.

Select to change to a different tide or current station.

Tide or current station graph.

Present time, indicated on the tide or current station graph as a white line.

You can select and to adjust the time on the tide or current station graph.

Present sunrise and sunset times.

Select to open the tide or current station information page.

Adding Tide and Current Overlays

1 From the page where you want to add the overlay, select Options > Edit Overlays.
TIP: You can also select Toolbars from the menu bar to quickly change the overlays.
2 Select Top Bar or Bottom Bar.
3 Select Tides or Currents.

Tide, Current, and Celestial Information 163

Tide Station Information
WARNING
Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted
water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the
water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
You can view information about a tide station for a specific date and time, including the tide height, and
when the next high and low tides will occur. By default, the Tides overlay bar on the chartplotter shows tide
information for the most recently viewed tide station, present date, and past hour.
From the Tides overlay bar, select .

Current Station Information

WARNING
Tide and current information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted
water-related guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the
water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
NOTE: Current station information is available with certain detailed maps.
You can view information about a current station for a specific date and time, including the current speed and
level of the current. By default, the Currents overlay bar on the chartplotter shows current information for the
most recently viewed current station and for the present date and time (Tide and Current Overlays, page 163).
From the Currents overlay bar, select .

Celestial Information
You can view information about sunrise, sunset, moonrise, moonset, moon phase, and the approximate sky view
location of the sun and moon. The center of the screen represents the sky overhead, and the outermost rings
represent the horizon. By default, the chartplotter shows celestial information for the present date and time.
From the Tides or Currents overlay bar, select , then select Celestial.

Viewing Tide Station, Current Station, or Celestial Information for a Different Date
1 From a Tides or Currents overlay bar, select .
2 To view celestial information, select Celestial.
3 Select an option:
• To view information for a different date, select Change Date, and enter a date.
• To view information for today, select Current Date and Time.
• If available, to view information for the day after the date shown, select Next Day.
• If available, to view information for the day before the date shown, select Previous Day.

Viewing Information for a Different Tide or Current Station

1 From a Tides or Currents overlay bar, select .
2 Select Nearby Stations.
3 Select a station.

Viewing Almanac Information from the Navigation Chart

1 From a chart or 3D chart view, select a tide station or a current station icon.
2 Select the name of the station.

164 Tide, Current, and Celestial Information

 Messages and Warnings
You can open a menu to view important messages and warnings, and to access other communications such as
DSC.
Select .
During an active warning, an indicator ( ) replaces the icon on the menu bar ( ). This color-coded icon
conveys the nature of the warning, and if you have more than one message to review, it prioritizes the highest-
severity warning.

Color Severity

Red Hazards that require immediate action to avoid severe personal injury or death

Yellow Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product or property damage

Viewing Messages and Warnings

1 Select .
NOTE: This appears as an indicator ( ) if there is an active warning.
A window opens that shows messages and any active warnings.
2 Select an option:
• Select a message or an active warning.
• Select All Communications > Alarm History.
3 If necessary, select an item in the list.
4 Select Review.

Sorting and Filtering Messages

1 Select .
NOTE: This appears as an indicator ( ) if there is an active warning.
2 Select All Communications > Alarm History > Sort/Filter.
3 Select an option to sort or filter the message list.

Saving Messages to a Memory Card

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 Select .
NOTE: This appears as an indicator ( ) if there is an active warning.
3 Select All Communications > Alarm History > Save to Card.

Clearing all Messages and Warnings

1 Select .
NOTE: This appears as an indicator ( ) if there is an active warning.
2 Select All Communications > Alarm History > Clear Alarm History.

Messages and Warnings 165

 Media Player
If you have a compatible stereo or stereos connected to the chartplotter, you can control the audio using the
media player on the chartplotter:
• If you have a compatible Fusion stereo connected to the NMEA 2000 network or the Garmin Marine Network,
®

you can control the stereo using the chartplotter. The chartplotter should automatically detect the stereo.
• If you have multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus™ networking, you can
control the networked stereos and groups using the chartplotter. As long as you have one of the networked
Fusion stereos connected to the NMEA 2000 network or the Garmin Marine Network, the chartplotter should
automatically detect the stereos.
• If you have a compatible third-party stereo connected to the NMEA 2000 network, you may be able to control
the stereo using the chartplotter.
NOTE: Not all features are available on all connected stereos.
NOTE: You can play media only from sources that are connected to the stereo.

Opening the Media Player

Before you can open the media player, you must connect a compatible device to the chartplotter.
Select Vessel > Media.
TIP: To quickly add the media overlay to a page, select Toolbars > Media > Add.

Media Player Icons

NOTE: Not all devices have these icons.

Icon Description

Saves or deletes a channel as a preset

Repeats all songs

Repeats one song

Scans for AM/FM radio stations

Skips to next or previous track (tap)
Fast forwards or rewinds (hold)

Shuffles

Increases the volume

Decreases the volume

Mutes volume

Expands the media player to full screen

166 Media Player

Selecting the Media Device and Source
You can select the media source connected to the stereo. When you have multiple stereo or media devices
connected on a network, you can select the device from which you want to play music.
NOTE: You can play media only from sources that are connected to the stereo.
NOTE: Not all features are available on all media devices and sources.
1 From the media screen, select Devices, and select the stereo.
2 From the media screen, select Source, and select the media source.
NOTE: The Devices button only appears when more than one media device is connected to the network.
NOTE: The Source button only appears for devices that support multiple media sources.

Adjusting the Volume and Audio Levels

Adjusting the Volume
NOTE: If your vessel's media system is set up in zones, the volume controls on the media screen adjust the
volume for the Home Zone (Selecting the Home Zone, page 169).
From the media screen, use the slider or and to adjust the volume.

Adjusting the Audio Level

You can use the equalizer to adjust the audio levels on a connected media device.
NOTE: If the media system has multiple zones, adjusting the audio level tone controls affects the home zone
only. You can change the home zone to adjust the audio levels in other zones (Selecting the Home Zone,
page 169).
1 From the media screen, select Options > Audio Levels.
2 Select or to adjust the audio levels you want to change.

Muting the Media Volume

1 From the media screen, select .
2 If necessary, select Select.

Automatic Volume Adjustment Based on Speed

If your stereo is connected to a NMEA 2000 network with a device that provides speed information such as an
engine, chartplotter, GPS antenna, water speed sensor, or wind speed sensor, you can set the stereo to adjust
the volume automatically based on the selected speed source (Enabling Automatic Volume Adjustment Based
on Speed, page 167).
For example, if a chartplotter with an internal GPS antenna or a stand-alone GPS antenna is on the same NMEA
2000 network as the stereo and you set the Speed Source to Speed Over Ground, the volume increases as your
speed increases.
NOTE: When the volume increases to adjust for speed, the actual volume output changes, but the volume-level
indicator bar and number stays the same.
For more information about connecting the stereo to a NMEA 2000 network, see the installation instructions for
your stereo.
Enabling Automatic Volume Adjustment Based on Speed
1 From the Media screen, select Options > Installation.
2 Select the name of the stereo.
3 Select Zones > Speed Vs Volume > Enable.
4 If needed, update the settings to select the speed source and volume settings.

Media Player 167

Automatic Volume Control Settings
Select Options > Installation, select the name of the stereo, then select Zones > Speed Vs Volume.
Enable: Enables the automatic volume control feature.
Speed Source: Sets the source that the stereo uses to determine the speed (Speed Source Information,
page 168).
Max/Min Speed: Sets the expected maximum and minimum speed range for the selected Speed Source. The
Minimum setting indicates the speed at which the volume plays at the level you set by turning the dial.
The Maximumsetting indicates the speed at which the volume plays at the highest level set in the Volume
Increase setting.
TIP: You should start by setting these values at the speeds you typically expect from your engine or sensor
and adjust them as needed.
Volume Increase: Sets the total volume increase for each zone when the selected Speed Source reaches the set
maximum speed set in the Max/Min Speed setting. The higher you set this level, the louder the volume will be
as you approach the set maximum speed.
NOTE: When the volume increases to adjust for speed, the actual volume output changes but the volume-
level indicator bar and number stays the same.
Speed Source Information
Select Options > Installation, select the name of the stereo, then select Zones > Speed Vs Volume > Speed
Source.
Engine Speed: Uses the RPM reading provided by a supported NMEA 2000 engine. The volume increases as
the engine RPM increases from the set Minimum speed to the set Maximum speed. If multiple supported
engines are connected, the stereo uses the average RPM reading from all engines.
Speed Over Ground: Uses the speed over ground (SOG) reading provided by a supported NMEA 2000 GPS
antenna or chartplotter with an internal GPS antenna. The volume increases as the SOG increases from the
set Minimum speed to the set Maximum speed.
Speed Through Water: Uses the speed through water (STW) reading provided by a supported NMEA 2000
water-speed sensor. The volume increases as the STW increases from the set Minimum speed to the set
Maximum speed.
Wind Speed: Uses the wind speed reading provided by a supported NMEA 2000 wind-speed sensor. The volume
increases as the wind speed increases from the set Minimum speed to the set Maximum speed.

Stereo Zones and Groups

NOTE: The Zones button appears only for stereos that support multiple speaker zones.
NOTE: The Groups option appears only when you have multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using
Fusion PartyBus networking.
If a connected stereo is set up to support multiple speaker zones, you can control the audio of the zones
individually from the media screen on the chartplotter. For example, you could make the audio quieter in the
cabin and louder on the deck (Adjusting the Zone Volume, page 169).
If you have multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus networking, you can create
stereo groups and control the networked stereos and groups using the chartplotter.
Depending on the capabilities of the stereo or stereos connected to the chartplotter, you may have multiple
options for controlling zone audio:
• For third-party stereos and compatible Fusion stereos, the Local Zones tab allow you to adjust the volume for
all of the enabled speaker zones on the connected stereo.
• For multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus networking, the Group Zones
tab allows you to adjust the volume for any zones on a stereo in the same group as Home Zone.
• For multiple Fusion stereos connected to one another using Fusion PartyBus networking, the Network tab
allows you to adjust the volume for any zone on any stereo connected to the Fusion PartyBus network.

168 Media Player

Selecting the Home Zone
If you have multiple stereos connected to the chartplotter, or have a stereo or stereos with multiple speaker
zones connected to the chartplotter, you must designate one speaker zone on one stereo as the home zone.
The playback and volume controls on the media screen adjust only the stereo or zone set as the home zone.
The playback information on the media screen shows the source playing on the Home Zone stereo.
It is recommended to set the home zone as the zone closest to the chartplotter.
NOTE: Some stereos may feature a global zone. Setting a global zone as the home zone allows the controls on
the media page to affect all of the zones on a stereo or media device.
NOTE: The Zones button only appears for stereos or media devices that support multiple media zones.
1 From the media screen, select Options > Home Zone.
2 If necessary, select a connected stereo.
3 Select the zone you want to set as the Home Zone.
The name of the selected home zone appears on the media screen.

Adjusting the Zone Volume

NOTE: The Zones button appears only for stereos that support multiple speaker zones.
1 From the media screen, select Zones.
A list of available zones appears.
2 If necessary, change the zone group to view the zone you want to adjust (Stereo Zones and Groups,
page 168).
3 Select and to adjust the volume for a zone.

Disabling a Speaker Zone

If your connected media device features speaker zones, you can disable unused zones.
1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation.
2 Select a connected stereo.
3 Select Zones.
4 Select the zone you want to disable.
5 Select Enable.
The green bar on the button turns gray to indicate that the zone is disabled. You can select Enable to enable
a disabled zone.

Creating a Group
If you have multiple Fusion stereos connected to each other using Fusion PartyBus networking, you can create
stereo groups and control the networked stereos and groups using the chartplotter. One stereo must be
connected to the chartplotter through the NMEA 2000 network.
See the installation instructions and owner's manual provided with your compatible Fusion stereo for full
information about how to install and configure a Fusion PartyBus network.
NOTE: There are some limitations when streaming sources on the Fusion PartyBus network. See the owner's
manual for your Fusion stereo for more information.
1 From the media screen, select Options > Groups.
2 Select the name of the stereo you want to be the primary stereo in the group, and select Set as Source.
3 Select the stereos you want to include in the group.
4 Select Done.

Media Player 169

Editing a Group
1 From the media screen, select Options > Groups.
2 Select the name of an existing group.
3 Select the stereos you want to add to or remove from the group.
4 Select Done.
Group Synchronization
By default, groups you create are not maintained when you turn off stereos in the group. If you turn off a single
stereo added to the group, it leaves the group. If you turn off the primary stereo in the group, the group is
dissolved. You can enable group synchronization to preserve group membership for a stereo after turning it off.
Group synchronization behaves differently based on how you turn the stereos off and on.
• If you turn a synchronized stereo off and on by using either the power button on the stereo or a physical
switch on the ignition wire (the red wire), all of the synchronized stereos in the group turn off and on together.
This applies to all of the synchronized stereos in the group, whether or not a stereo is the primary stereo in
the group.
NOTE: Selecting ALL OFF from the power menu on a stereo turns off all stereos on the network, even if they
are not in a group or have group synchronization enabled.
• If you turn a synchronized stereo off and on using a physical switch on the power wire (the yellow wire), the
other synchronized stereos in the group behave differently:
◦ If the synchronized stereo is the primary stereo in the group and you turn it off using a physical switch on
the power wire, the other synchronized stereos in the group remain on, but leave the group. When you turn
the primary stereo back on again, the other synchronized stereos rejoin the group.
◦ If the synchronized stereo is not the primary stereo in the group and you turn it off and on using a physical
switch on the power wire, all of the other synchronized stereos in the group remain on and grouped, and
the stereo rejoins the group when you turn it on again.
Enabling Group Synchronization
You must remove the stereo from an existing group before you can enable the Save Group setting. You cannot
update settings when a stereo is part of a group.
You must enable this setting on each stereo that you want to retain group settings after a power cycle.
1 From the Media screen, select Options > Installation.
2 Select the name of the stereo.
3 Select Power Options > Save Group.
The stereo retains group settings after a power cycle.
4 Repeat for additional stereos as needed.
NOTE: You must enable Save Group on all networked stereos for synchronization to work properly.

Playing Music
Browsing for Music
You can browse for music in some media sources.
1 From the media screen and an applicable source, select the button with the source name, such as USB.
2 Browse for, and select an item to play.
Enabling Alphabetical Search
You can enable the alphabetical search feature to find a song or album in a large list.
1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation.
2 Select the device.
3 Select Alpha Search.
4 Select the maximum number of tracks to appear in the search results.
To disable the alphabetical search feature, select Alpha Searching Off.

170 Media Player

Setting a Song to Repeat
1 From the media screen while a song is playing, select an option.
• Select Options > Repeat.
• Select Options > Browse > Repeat.
2 If necessary, select Single.
NOTE: Not all media devices and sources support the Single option for the Repeat control.

Setting All Songs to Repeat

NOTE: Not all media devices and sources support the All option for the Repeat control.
From the media screen, select an option:
• Select Options > Repeat > All.
• Select Options > Browse > Repeat > All.

Setting Songs to Shuffle

From the media screen, select an option:
• Select Options > Shuffle.
• Select Options > Browse > Shuffle.

Radio
For instructions on connecting an AM/FM antenna, see the stereo installation instructions.
To listen to SiriusXM radio, you must have the appropriate equipment and subscriptions (SiriusXM Satellite
®

Radio, page 173). For instructions on connecting a SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner, see the stereo installation
instructions.
To listen to DAB stations, you must have the appropriate equipment (DAB Playback, page 172). For instructions
on connecting a DAB adapter and antenna, see the installation instructions provided with your adapter and
antenna.

Setting the Tuner Region

1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation > Tuner Region.
2 Select an option.

Changing the Radio Station

1 From the media screen, select an applicable source, such as FM.
2 Select or to tune to a station.

Changing the Tuning Mode

You can change how you select a station for some media types, such as FM or AM radio.
NOTE: Not all tuning modes are available for all media sources.
Press the button between the and buttons to cycle between the tuning modes:
• To select a station manually, select MANUAL.
• To scan or stop on the next available station, select AUTO.
• To select a saved station preset, select FAVORITE.
• To select a category in some media sources, select CATEGORY.

Media Player 171

Presets
You can save your favorite AM stations and FM stations as presets for easy access.
You can save your favorite SiriusXM channels if the stereo is connected to an optional SiriusXM tuner and
antenna.
You can save your favorite DAB stations if the stereo is connected to the proper DAB equipment and set to the
correct tuner region. (DAB Playback, page 172)
Saving a Station as a Preset
1 From an applicable media screen, tune to the station to save as a preset.
2 Select Favorites > Add Current Channel.
Selecting a Preset
1 From an applicable media screen, select Favorites.
2 Select a preset from the list.
3 Select Tune to Channel.
Removing a Preset
1 From an applicable media screen, select Favorites.
2 Select a preset from the list.
3 Select Remove Current Channel.

DAB Playback
When you connect a compatible Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) module and antenna, such as the Fusion
MS-DAB100A to a compatible stereo, you can tune in to and play DAB stations
To use the DAB source, you must be in a region in which DAB is available, and select the tuner region (Setting
the DAB Tuner Region, page 172).

Setting the DAB Tuner Region

You must select the region you are in to receive DAB stations properly.
1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation > Tuner Region.
2 Select the region you are in.

Scanning for DAB Stations

1 Select the DAB source.
2 Select Scan to scan for available DAB stations.
When scanning is complete, the first available station in the first ensemble found begins playing.
NOTE: After the first scan is complete, you can select Scan again to re-scan for DAB stations. When the
re-scan is complete, the system starts playing the first station in the ensemble you were listening to when
you started the re-scan.

Changing DAB Stations

1 Select the DAB source.
2 If necessary, select Scan to scan for local DAB stations.
3 Select or to change the station.
When you reach the end of the current ensemble, the stereo automatically changes to the first available
station in the next ensemble.
TIP: You can hold or to change the ensemble.
Selecting a DAB Station from a List
1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Stations.
2 Select a station from the list.

172 Media Player

Selecting a DAB Station from a Category
1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Categories.
2 Select a category from the list.
3 Select a station from the list.

DAB Presets
You can save your favorite DAB stations as presets for easy access.
You can save up to 15 DAB-station presets.
Saving a DAB Station as a Preset
1 From the DAB media screen, select the station to save as a preset.
2 Select Browse > Favorites > Save Current.
Selecting a DAB Preset from a List
1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Favorites > View Presets.
2 Select a preset from the list.
Removing DAB Presets
1 From the DAB media screen, select Browse > Favorites.
2 Select an option:
• To remove one preset, select Remove Preset, and select the preset.
• To remove all presets, select Remove All Presets.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio

When you have a compatible Fusion stereo and SiriusXM Connect Tuner installed and connected to the
chartplotter, you may have access to SiriusXM satellite radio, depending on your subscription.

Locating a SiriusXM Radio ID

Before you can activate your SiriusXM subscription, you must have the radio ID of your SiriusXM Connect Tuner.
You can locate the SiriusXM Radio ID on the back of the SiriusXM Connect Tuner, on the back of its packaging,
or by tuning your chartplotter to channel 0.
1 Select Media > Source > SiriusXM.
2 Tune to channel 0.
The SiriusXM radio ID does not include the letters I, O, S, or F.

Activating a SiriusXM Subscription

1 With the SiriusXM source selected, tune to channel 1.
You should be able to hear the preview channel. If not, check the SiriusXM Connect Tuner and antenna
installation and connections, and try again.
2 Tune to channel 0 to locate the Radio ID.
3 Contact SiriusXM listener care by phone at (866) 635-2349 or go to siriusxm.com/activatenow to subscribe
in the United States.
4 Provide the Radio ID.
The activation process usually takes 10 to 15 minutes, but can take up to an hour. For the SiriusXM Connect
Tuner to receive the activation message, it must be turned on and receiving the SiriusXM signal.
5 If the service is not activated within the hour, go to http://care.siriusxm.com/refresh or contact SiriusXM
Listener Care by phone at 1-866-635-2349.

Media Player 173

Customizing the Channel Guide
SiriusXM radio channels are grouped in categories. You can select the categories of channels that appear in the
channel guide.
Select an option:
• If the media device is a compatible Fusion stereo, select Media > Browse > Channel.
• If the media device is a GXM™ antenna, select Media > Category.

Saving a SiriusXM Channel to the Presets List

You can save your favorite channels to the presets list.
1 Select Media.
2 Select the channel to save as a preset.
3 Select an option:
• If the media device is a compatible Fusion stereo, select Browse > Favorites.
• If the media device is a GXM antenna, select Options > Favorites > Add Current Channel.

Parental Controls
The parental control feature allows you to limit access to any SiriusXM channels, including those with mature
content. When the parental control feature is enabled, you must enter a passcode to tune to the locked
channels. You can also change the 4-digit passcode.
Unlocking SiriusXM Parental Controls
1 From the media screen, select Browse > Parental > Unlock.
2 Enter your passcode.
The default passcode is 0000.
Setting Parental Controls on SiriusXM Radio Channels
Before you can set parental controls, the parental controls must be unlocked.
The parental control feature allows you to limit access to any SiriusXM channels, including those with mature
content. When enabled, the parental control feature requires you to enter a passcode to tune to the locked
channels.
Select Browse > Parental > Lock/Unlock.
A list of channels appears. A checkmark indicates a locked channel.
NOTE: When you view the channels after setting parental controls, the display changes:
• indicates a locked channel.
• indicates an unlocked channel.
Clearing All Locked Channels on a SiriusXM Radio
Before you can clear all locked channels, the parental controls must be unlocked.
1 From the media screen, select Browse > Parental > Clear All Locked.
2 Enter your passcode.
Restoring Default Parental Control Settings Values
This process deletes all the settings information you have entered. When you restore the parental control
settings to their default values, the passcode value is reset to 0000.
1 From the media menu, select Installation > Factory Defaults.
2 Select Yes.

174 Media Player

Changing a Parental Passcode on a SiriusXM Radio
Before you can change the passcode, the parental controls must be unlocked.
1 From the media screen, select Browse > Parental > Change PIN.
2 Enter your passcode and select Done.
3 Enter a new passcode.
4 Confirm the new passcode.

Setting the Device Name

1 From the media screen, select Options > Installation > Set Device Name.
2 Enter a device name.
3 Select Select or Done.

Updating the Media Player Software

You can update the software on compatible connected stereos and accessories.
See the stereo Owner's Manual at support.garmin.com for instructions on updating the software.

Audio Return Channel

The HDMI Audio Return Channel (ARC) enables you to play the audio from the chartplotter over the stereo
system speakers and play HDMI audio on the chartplotter using only one HDMI cable.
ARC eliminates the need to connect a separate audio cable from the chartplotter to the stereo. Typically, in
systems without ARC, to play the audio from the chartplotter over the stereo system speakers, you would need a
separate cable.
The HDMI version 1.4 cables support ARC. When planning your stereo installation, you should check whether
your devices support ARC. Most devices that support ARC have an ARC label on the HDMI connector that
supports ARC.
NOTE: The Fusion MS-AV750 stereo supports ARC. You should update the stereo to use ARC with the
chartplotter.

Configuring a Stereo from the Chartplotter

You can configure various features of a compatible connected stereo using the chartplotter.
1 From the Media screen, select Options > Installation.
2 Select the name of the stereo.
3 Select a setting to configure.
NOTE: See the latest Owner's Manual for the stereo for more information about the settings you can
configure.

Configuring a Stereo from the Chartplotter 175

 SiriusXM Weather
WARNING
The weather information provided through this product is subject to service interruptions and may contain
errors, inaccuracies, or outdated information, and consequently should not be relied upon exclusively. Always
use common sense while navigating, and check alternate weather information sources prior to making safety-
related decisions. You acknowledge and agree that you shall be solely responsible for use of the weather
information and all decisions taken with respect to navigating in weather. Garmin will not be responsible for any
consequences of using SiriusXM weather information.
NOTE: SiriusXM data is not available in all regions.
A Garmin SiriusXM satellite weather receiver and antenna receives satellite weather data and shows it on
various Garmin devices, including the Navigation chart on a compatible chartplotter. The weather data for
each feature comes from reputable weather data centers such as the National Weather Service and the
Hydrometeorological Prediction Center. For more information, go to www.siriusxm.com/sxmmarine.

SiriusXM Equipment and Subscription Requirements

To use satellite weather, you must have a compatible satellite weather receiver. To use SiriusXM satellite
radio, you must have a compatible satellite radio receiver. Go to www.garmin.com for more information. You
must also have a valid subscription to receive satellite weather and radio. For more information, refer to the
instructions for your satellite weather and radio equipment.

Weather Data Broadcasts

Weather data is broadcast at different intervals for each weather feature. For example, radar is broadcast at
five-minute intervals. When the Garmin receiver is turned on, or when a different weather feature is selected, the
receiver must receive new data before it can be shown. You might experience a delay before weather data or a
different feature appears on the chart.
NOTE: Any weather feature can change in appearance if the source that provides the information changes.

Weather Warnings and Weather Bulletins

When a marine weather warning, weather watch, weather advisory, weather bulletin, or other weather statement
is issued, shading indicates the area to which the information applies. The aqua lines on the chart indicate the
boundaries of marine forecasts, coastal forecasts, and offshore forecasts. Weather bulletins may consist of
either weather watches or weather advisories.
To view information about the warning or bulletin, select the shaded area.

Color Marine Weather Group

Cyan Flash Flood

Blue Flood

Red Marine

Yellow Severe Storm

Red Tornado

Viewing Precipitation Information

Precipitation ranging from very light rain and snow, up to strong thunderstorms, is indicated in varying shades
and colors. Precipitation is shown either independently or with other weather information.
Select Charts > Precipitation.
The time stamp in the upper-left corner of the screen indicates the elapsed time since the weather data
provider last updated the information.

176 SiriusXM Weather

Storm Cell and Lightning Information
Storm cell are represented by the icon on the weather precipitation chart. They indicate both the present
position of a storm and the projected path of that storm in the immediate future.
Red cones appear with a storm cell icon, and the widest part of each cone points in the direction of the
projected path of the storm cell. The red lines in each cone indicate where the storm will most likely be in the
near future. Each line represents 15 minutes.
Lightning strikes are represented by the icon. Lightning appears on the weather precipitation chart if strikes
were detected within the last seven minutes. The ground-based lightning detection network detects cloud-to-
ground lightning only.
NOTE: This feature is not available on all devices and in all subscriptions.

Hurricane Information
The weather Precipitation chart can show the present position of a hurricane , a tropical storm, or a tropical
depression. A red line stemming from a hurricane icon indicates the projected path of the hurricane. Darkened
dots on the red line indicate the projected locations through which the hurricane will pass, as received from the
weather data provider.

Forecast Information
The Forecast chart shows city forecasts, marine forecasts, warnings, hurricane warnings, METARS, county
warnings, weather fronts and pressure centers, surface pressure, and weather buoys.

Viewing a Marine Forecast or an Offshore Forecast

1 Select Charts > Forecast.
2 Pan the chart to an offshore location.
The Marine Forecast or Offshore Forecast options appear when forecast information is available.
3 Select Marine Forecast or Offshore Forecast.

Viewing Forecast Information for Another Time Period

1 Select Charts > Forecast.
2 Select an option:
• To view the weather forecast for the next 48 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.
• To view the weather forecast for the previous 48 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.

SiriusXM Weather 177

Weather Fronts and Pressure Centers
Weather fronts appear as lines that indicate the leading edge of an air mass.

Front Symbol Description

Cold front

Warm front

Stationary front

Occluded front

Trough

Pressure-center symbols often appear near weather fronts.

Pressure-Center
Description
Symbol

Indicates a low-pressure center, which is a region of relatively lower pressure. Moving away
from a low-pressure center results in increased pressure. Winds flow counterclockwise
around low-pressure centers in the northern hemisphere.

Indicates a high-pressure center, which is a region of relatively higher pressure. Moving

away from a high-pressure center results in decreased pressure. Winds flow clockwise
around high-pressure centers in the northern hemisphere.

City Forecasts
City forecasts appear as weather symbols. The forecast is viewed in 12-hour increments.

Symbol Weather

Fair (sunny, hot, clear)

Partly cloudy

Cloudy

Rain (drizzle, sleet, showers)

Thunderstorms

Windy

Smoke (dusty, hazy)

Foggy

Snow (snow showers, flurries, blizzard, blowing snow, sleet, freezing rain, freezing drizzle)

178 SiriusXM Weather

Viewing Fish Mapping Data
NOTE: This feature requires a GXM 54 antenna and a SiriusXM Fish Mapping™ service subscription.
The Fish Mapping weather chart shows information that can help you locate fish species.
1 Select Charts > Fish Mapping.
2 If necessary, select Options > Layers, and turn on and off information.

Viewing Sea Conditions

The Sea Conditions feature shows information about surface conditions, including winds, wave height, wave
period, and wave direction.
Select Charts > Sea Conditions.

Surface Winds
Surface wind vectors appear on the Sea Conditions chart using wind barbs that indicate the direction from
which the wind is blowing. A wind barb is a circle with a tail. The line or flag attached to the tail of the wind
barb indicates the wind speed. A short line represents 5 knots, a long line represents 10 knots, and triangle
represents 50 knots.

Wind Barb Wind Speed

Calm

5 knots

10 knots

15 knots

20 knots

50 knots

65 knots

Wave Height, Wave Period, and Wave Direction

Wave heights for an area appear as variations in color. Different colors indicate different wave heights, as
shown in the legend.
The wave period indicates the time (in seconds) between successive waves. Wave period lines indicate areas
that have the same wave period.
Wave directions appear on the chart using red arrows. The direction of each arrow pointer indicates the
direction in which a wave is moving.

Viewing Forecast Sea Conditions Information for Another Time Period

1 Select Charts > Sea Conditions.
2 Select an option:
• To view forecasted sea conditions for the next 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple
times.
• To view the forecasted sea conditions for the previous 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select
multiple times.

SiriusXM Weather 179

Viewing Sea Temperature Information
The Sea Temperature weather chart shows the present water temperature and present surface pressure
conditions.
Select Charts > Sea Temperature.

Surface Pressure and Water Temperature Data

Surface-pressure information appears as pressure isobars and pressure centers. Isobars connect points of
equal pressure. Pressure readings can help to determine weather and wind conditions. High-pressure areas are
generally associated with fair weather. Low-pressure areas are generally associated with clouds and the chance
of precipitation. Isobars packed closely together show a strong pressure gradient. Strong pressure gradients are
associated with areas of stronger winds.
Pressure units are shown in millibars (mb), inches of Mercury (inHg), or hectopascals (hPa).
Colored shading indicates the surface temperature of the water, as shown in the legend in the corner of the
display.

Changing the Sea Surface Temperature Color Range

You can change the color range dynamically to view higher resolution sea surface temperature readings.
1 Select Charts > Sea Temperature > Options > Sea Temperature.
2 Select an option:
• To allow the chartplotter to adjust the temperature range automatically, select Auto Configure.
The chartplotter automatically finds the lower and upper limits for the current screen, and updates the
temperature-color scale.
• To enter the lower and upper limits for the temperature range, select Lower Limit or Upper Limit, and enter
the lower or upper limit.

Visibility Information
Visibility is the forecast maximum horizontal distance that can be seen at the surface, as shown in the legend
on the left of the screen. Variations in the visibility shading show the forecast change in surface visibility.
NOTE: This feature is not available on all devices and in all subscriptions.
Select Charts > Visibility.

Viewing Forecast Visibility Information for Another Time Period

1 Select Charts > Visibility.
2 Select an option:
• To view the visibility forecast for the next 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.
• To view the visibility forecast for the previous 36 hours, in 12-hour increments, select multiple times.

Viewing Buoy Reports

Report readings are taken from buoys and coastal observation stations. These readings are used to determine
air temperature, dew point, water temperature, tide, wave height and period, wind direction and speed, visibility,
and barometric pressure.
1 From a weather chart, select a buoy icon.
2 Select Buoy.

180 SiriusXM Weather

Viewing Local Weather Information near a Buoy
You can select an area near a buoy to view forecast information.
1 From a weather chart, select a location on the chart.
2 Select Local Weather.
3 Select an option:
• To view present weather conditions from a local weather service, select Current Condition.
• To view a local weather forecast, select Forecast.
• To view surface wind and barometric pressure information, select Sea Surface.
• To view wind and wave information, select Marine Bulletin.

Weather Overlay
The weather overlay superimposes weather and weather-related information on the Navigation chart, the
Fishing chart, and the Perspective 3D chart view. The Navigation chart and the Fishing chart can show weather
radar, height of cloud tops, lightning, weather buoys, county warnings, and hurricane warnings. The Perspective
3D chart view can show weather radar.
Weather overlay settings configured for use on one chart are not applied to another chart. The weather overlay
settings for each chart must be configured separately.
NOTE: The Fishing chart is available with premium charts, in some areas.

Viewing Weather Subscription Information

You can view information about the weather services you have subscribed to and how many minutes have
passed since the data for each service was updated.
From a weather chart, select Options > Subscription.

Viewing Video
WARNING
Do not view video or photos while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the water
can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.
Before you can view video, you must connect to a compatible source.
Compatible sources include video devices connected to the ports on the chartplotter and supported network
(IP-based) video cameras and thermal cameras connected to the Garmin network.
Protected HDMI content, HDCP, cannot be shared across the Garmin network to GPSMAP 8000 series or older
charplotters. HDCP content can be shared by a GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotter only to other GPSMAP 9000
series chartplotters connected to the Garmin BlueNet network.
Select Vessel > Video.

Selecting a Video Source

1 From the video screen, select Options > Source.
2 Select the source of the video feed.

Alternating Among Multiple Video Sources

If you have two or more video sources, you can alternate between them using a specific time interval.
1 From the video screen, select Options > Source > Alternate.
2 Select Time, and select the amount of time each video appears.
3 Select Source, and select the video sources to add to the alternating sequence.

Viewing Video 181

Networked Video Devices
NOTICE
A Garmin Power over Ethernet (PoE) Isolation Coupler (P/N 010-10580-10) must be used when connecting
third-party and PoE cameras, such as FLIR cameras, to legacy Garmin Marine Network devices. Connecting a
®

third-party camera directly to a legacy Garmin Marine Network chartplotter damages the Garmin chartplotter
and may damage the camera.
This isolation coupler is not needed when connecting a third-party camera to a Garmin BlueNet network.
In some jurisdictions it could be considered an invasion of privacy rights to take or publicly display photographs
or videos of people without their permission. It is your responsibility to know and comply with privacy laws and
rights within the applicable jurisdiction(s).
Before you can view and control video devices such as IP cameras and thermal cameras using your chartplotter,
you must have a compatible video device connected to your chartplotter. When connecting a PoE camera to a
Garmin Marine Network, you must install a Garmin Marine Network PoE isolation coupler. When connecting a
PoE camera to a Garmin BlueNet network, the isolation coupler is not necessary. Go to garmin.com for a list
of compatible devices or to purchase a PoE Isolation Coupler. Go to garmin.com/manuals/bluenet for more
information about Garmin BlueNet technology.
You can connect multiple supported video cameras to the Garmin network. You can select and view up to four
video sources at once. When the cameras are connected, the network detects them automatically and displays
them in the source list.

Using Video Presets on Networked Video Cameras

You can save, name, and activate video presets for each networked video source.
Saving Video Presets on a Networked Video Camera
1 From a video screen, touch the screen.
The video controls appear on the screen.
2 Hold a video preset button.
A green light indicates the setting is stored.
Naming Video Presets on a Networked Video Camera
1 From a video screen, select Options > Video Setup > Favorites.
2 Select a preset.
3 Select Rename.
4 Enter preset name.
Activating Video Presets on a Networked Video Camera
You can quickly return networked cameras to preset values.
1 From a video screen, touch the screen.
The video controls appear on the screen.
2 Select a video preset.
The camera restores the video settings saved for that preset.
TIP: You can also save and activate presets using the video menu.

182 Viewing Video

Camera Settings
Some cameras provide additional options to control the camera view.
NOTE: Not all options are available on all camera models and chartplotter models. Refer to the camera manual
for a list of available features. You may need to update the camera software to use this feature.
From the infrared video screen, select Options.
IR Blend: Selects the infrared effect to MSX (Multi-Spectral Dynamic Imaging) mode or CTV (Color Thermal
®

Vision™) mode, and allows you to blend the effects.

IR/Visible: Displays an infrared or visible light image.
Scan: Surveys the surrounding area.
Freeze: Pauses the camera image.
Change Colors: Selects the color scheme of the infrared image.
Change Scene: Selects the infrared image mode, such as day, night, MOB, or docking.
Video Setup: Opens more video options.

Video Settings
Some cameras provide additional setup options.
NOTE: Not all options are available on all camera models and chartplotter models. You may need to update the
camera software to use this feature.
From the video screen, select Options > Video Setup.
Set Input: Associates the camera with a video source.
Mirror: Reverses the image like a rearview mirror.
Standby: Places the camera in standby mode to conserve power and protect the lens when not in use.
Home Position: Sets the home position of the camera.
Scan Speed: Sets how quickly the camera moves during a scan.
Scan Width: Sets the width of the image captured by the camera during a scan.
Stabilization: Stabilizes the picture using mechanical means.
Low Light: Optimizes the video for low-light environments.
Aspect: Sets the aspect ratio.
Defog: Optimizes the video for foggy environments.
Dynamic Range: Sets the range to wide or standard.
E. Stabilization: Stabilizes the picture using software image processing.
Light: Controls the camera's integrated light source to help illuminate the environment.
Name: Allows you to enter a new name for this camera.
FLIR™ Menu: Provides access to the settings for the camera.

Associating the Camera to a Video Source

You may need to associate the camera with a video source.
1 From the video screen, select Options > Source.
2 Select the camera.
3 Select Video Setup > Set Input.
4 Select the video input.

Viewing Video 183

Video Camera Movement Control
NOTICE
Do not aim the camera at the sun or extremely bright objects. Damage to the lens may occur.
Always use the chartplotter controls or buttons to pan and tilt the camera. Do not manually move the camera
unit. Manually moving the camera may damage the camera.
NOTE: This feature is available only when a compatible camera is connected. You may need to update the
camera software to use this feature.
You can control the movements of the connected video cameras that support panning, tilting, and zooming.
Controlling Video Cameras Using On-Screen Controls
On-screen controls allow you to control pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras. Refer to the camera manual for a list of
available features.
1 From a video screen, touch the screen.
The video controls appear on the screen.
2 Select an option:
• To zoom in and out, use the zoom button.
• To pan or tilt the camera, use the compass rose.
TIP: Hold within the compass rose to continue to move the camera in the desired direction.
Controlling a Video Camera Using Gestures
When a networked video camera supports gesture responses, you can control pan-tilt-zoom cameras using
gestures directly on the chartplotter screen. Check your camera user manual for a list of available features.
TIP: Using gestures allows video control without displaying the video controls.
1 From a video screen, touch the screen.
2 Select an option:
• To zoom in and out with the camera, use pinch and zoom gestures.
• To pan or tilt the camera, swipe the screen in the desired direction.

Configuring the Video Appearance

NOTE: Not all options are available on all camera models and chartplotter models.
1 From the video screen, select Options > Video Setup.
2 Select an option:
• To show the video using a stretched aspect ratio, select Aspect > Stretch. The video cannot be stretched
beyond the dimensions provided by the connected video device, and it may not fill the entire screen.
• To show the video using a standard aspect ratio, select Aspect > Standard.
• To adjust the brightness, select Brightness, and select Up, Down, or Auto.
• To adjust the color saturation, select Saturation, and select Up, Down, or Auto.
• To adjust the contrast, select Contrast, and select Up, Down, or Auto.
• To allow the chartplotter to automatically select the source format, select Standard > Auto.

184 Viewing Video

Camera Tracking
When connected to a compatible camera, you can use advanced camera-tracking features.
• Hold the camera on a fixed compass direction (Compass Lock)
• Lock the camera at a fixed angle relative to the vessel (Vessel Lock)
• Track AIS, MARPA, or waypoint targets (also known as slew-to-cue)
To use any of the camera tracking features, you must connect compatible sensors and cameras to the
chartplotter using the Garmin Marine Network or the NMEA 2000 network.
To support Compass Lock and Vessel Lock functionality, you must connect these sensors and cameras:
• A tracking-capable marine camera, such as a newer model FLIR IP video camera
• A GPS antenna
• A heading sensor
NOTE: For the best camera tracking performance, the heading sensor should provide 9-axis data including
yaw, pitch, and roll.
In addition to the sensors and cameras needed to support Compass Lock and Vessel Lock, you must connect
these additional devices to the Garmin Marine Network to support AIS and MARPA tracking:
• To track targets using AIS, you must connect a compatible AIS receiver.
• To track targets using MARPA, you must connect a compatible radar device.

Setting the Camera Angle and Height

If the camera supports camera tracking and the required equipment is connected, you should configure the
camera angle and height for the best results when using the camera tracking feature.
You should make small adjustments until the camera view and camera tracking performance work as expected.
• The Camera Angle value specifies the angle at which the front of the camera points relative to the front of the
boat. A Camera Angle of zero degrees indicates the front of the camera is aligned with the front of the boat.
• The Camera Height value specifies how high the camera is mounted above the heading sensor.
• To set the camera angle, select Vessel > Video > Options > Installation > Camera Angle, and enter a value.
• To set the camera height, select Vessel > Video > Options > Installation > Camera Height, and enter a value.

Using Compass Lock

Your tracking-capable camera can lock onto a compass direction regardless of the vessel heading. Using
Compass Lock requires specific sensors and devices (Camera Tracking, page 185).
1 If necessary, from a video screen, select Options > Source, and select a compatible camera.
2 Drag the screen to aim the camera in the desired direction.
3 Select Options > Target Tracking > Compass Lock.
4 Select Back until you return to the video screen.
The camera view automatically adjusts to show the specified direction as the vessel moves.
5 If necessary, drag the screen to adjust the camera angle.
The Compass Lock continues to track using the adjusted camera angle.
6 To stop tracking, select Options > Target Tracking > Stop Tracking > Back.

Viewing Video 185

Using Vessel Lock
Your tracking-capable camera can lock on a target using information provided by other devices connected to
the chartplotter. Depending on the target you want to track, using Vessel Lock requires specific equipment
(Camera Tracking, page 185).
1 If necessary, from a video screen, select Options > Source, and select a compatible camera.
2 Select Options > Target Tracking and select an option:
• To track a vessel using AIS position information, select AIS List.
• To track a vessel or target using MARPA information, select MARPA List.
• To track a specific GPS coordinate location, select Waypoints
3 Select a target from the list, and select Review.
4 Verify the target details, and select Track with Camera.
5 Select Back until you return to the video screen.
The camera view automatically adjusts to show the selected vessel or target as either vessel moves.
6 If necessary, drag the screen to adjust the camera angle.
The Vessel Lock continues to track the vessel or target using the adjusted camera angle.
7 To stop tracking, select Options > Target Tracking > Stop Tracking > Back.

Garmin VIRB Action Cameras

®

WARNING
Do not view video or photos while operating the vessel. Failure to pay attention to the conditions on the water
can result in vessel damage, personal injury, or death.

NOTICE
In some jurisdictions it could be considered an invasion of privacy rights to take or publicly display photographs
or videos of people without their permission. It is your responsibility to know and comply with privacy laws and
rights within the applicable jurisdiction(s).
NOTE: Garmin VIRB Action Cameras are discontinued. Go to support.garmin.com for support for existing
cameras.
Most VIRB action cameras connect to the chartplotter from the camera menu (Connecting a VIRB Action
Camera, page 187).
The VIRB 360 camera connects using WPS (Connecting a VIRB 360 Action Camera, page 186).
In this manual, the term "VIRB action camera" refers to all models, except in the instructions on how to connect.
In that case, as listed above, the term "VIRB 360 camera" refers to only the 360 model.

Connecting a VIRB 360 Action Camera

You can connect a VIRB 360 action camera to the chartplotter using WPS. If you are connecting a VIRB camera,
connect through the camera settings (Connecting a VIRB Action Camera, page 187).
1 Set up the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page 32).
2 Bring the camera near the chartplotter.
3 On the VIRB 360 camera main menu, select Wireless > Wi-Fi.
4 If necessary, select the Wi-Fi toggle switch to enable the Wi‑Fi technology.
5 Press to select WPS, and press OK.
6 On the chartplotter, select Vessel > VIRB® > .
The camera searches for the Wi‑Fi network and connects.
You can control the camera using the chartplotter.

186 Viewing Video

Connecting a VIRB Action Camera
You connect a VIRB action camera to the chartplotter using the camera settings. If you are connecting a VIRB
360 camera, connect through the VIRB app (Connecting a VIRB 360 Action Camera, page 186).
1 Set up the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page 32).
2 From the VIRB camera main menu, select Wireless > Wi-Fi > Status to turn on Wi‑Fi wireless technology.
3 Select Mode > Connect.
4 Select Add New.
The camera searches for nearby Wi‑Fi networks.
5 Select the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network, and enter the network password.
The app and the camera connect to the chartplotter's Wi‑Fi network.
You can control the camera using the chartplotter.

Controlling the VIRB Action Camera with the Chartplotter

Before you can control a VIRB action camera with the chartplotter, you must connect the devices using a
wireless connection.
You can connect up to five VIRB action cameras to the chartplotter.
After you connect the VIRB action camera with the chartplotter, a new option is added to Vessel. You can start
and stop recording on the VIRB action camera using the chartplotter.
NOTE: The VIRB image shown on the chartplotter is a in a lower resolution than the VIRB action camera records.
To view the high-resolution video, view the video on a computer or television.
1 Select Vessel > VIRB®.
2 Select an option:
• To take a still photograph, select .
• To begin recording, select .
When recording, the remaining recording memory is shown.
• To stop recording, select again.
• If you have more than one VIRB action camera connected, use the arrows to select a different action
camera to control.
• To view stored videos or images, select .
• To pan and tilt the VIRB 360, drag your finger on the screen.
• To return the VIRB 360 view to the home position, select .
Controlling the VIRB Action Camera Video Playback
You can view VIRB action camera video and images using the chartplotter.
NOTE: The VIRB playback on the chartplotter is shown in the same quality as the live view on the chartplotter.
To view the high-resolution video, view the video on a computer or television.
1 From the VIRB® screen, select .
2 Wait a few seconds for the thumbnail images to load.
3 Select a video or image.
4 Control the playback using the on-screen buttons or menu options:
• To stop the video, select .
• To pause the video, select .
• To replay the video, select .
• To play the video, select .
• To skip ahead or back in the video, drag the slider.

Viewing Video 187

Deleting a VIRB Video
You can delete a video or image from the VIRB action camera.
1 Open the VIRB video or image to delete.
2 Select Options > Delete File.
Starting a VIRB Video Slideshow
You can view a slideshow of the videos and images on the VIRB action camera.
1 From the VIRB® screen, select .
2 Wait a few seconds for the thumbnail images to load.
3 Select a video or image.
4 Select Options > Start Slideshow.
To stop the slideshow, selcet Options > Stop Slideshow.
VIRB Action Camera Settings
NOTE: Not all options and settings apply to all camera models.
Select Vessel > VIRB® > Options.
Name: Allows you to enter a new name for the VIRB action camera.
Recording: Starts and stops recording.
Take Photo: Takes a still photograph.
Playback: Allows you to view video recordings and photos.
Freeze: Pauses the camera image.
Sleep: Puts the VIRB action camera into a low power mode to conserve battery power. Not available on the VIRB
360 camera.
Video Setup: Sets up the video (VIRB Action Camera Video Setup Settings, page 188).
Edit Overlays: Adjusts the data shown on the screen (Customizing the Data Overlays, page 20).
VIRB Action Camera Video Setup Settings
NOTE: Not all options and settings apply to all camera models.
Select Vessel > VIRB® > Options > Video Setup.
Aspect: Sets the video aspect ratio.
Video Mode: Sets the video mode. For example, you can select the Slow-Mo option to shoot slow motion
videos.
Video Size: Sets the size or pixel dimensions of videos.
Video FPS: Sets the frames per second.
Video Timestamp: Adds the date and time a video was recorded.
Photo Timestamp: Adds the date and time a photo was taken.
Photo Size: Sets the size or pixel dimensions of photos.
Field of View: Sets the zoom level.
Lens Mode: Sets which lens or lenses the camera uses while shooting video.
Mirror: Allows you to flip or mirror the video.
Rotation: Allows you to rotate the camera angle.

188 Viewing Video

Adding the VIRB Action Camera Controls to Other Screens
Before you can control a VIRB action camera with the chartplotter, you must connect the devices using a
wireless connection ( (Connecting a Wireless Device to the Chartplotter, page 32)).
You can add the VIRB action camera control bar to other screens. This allows you to start and stop recording
from other functions in the chartplotter.
1 Open the screen to which you want to add the VIRB action camera control bar.
2 Select Options > Edit Overlays > Bottom Bar > VIRB Bar.
When viewing a screen that has the VIRB action camera controls, you can select to open the full screen
view of the VIRB action camera.

HDMI Video Considerations

NOTICE
To prevent corrosion due to moisture, you must use Garmin GPSMAP accessory cables when connecting the
chartplotter to the video source or display. Do not connect a media player stick directly into the back of the
chartplotter. Using different cables or connecting a media player stick into the back of the chartplotter voids
your warranty.
These chartplotter models allow video input from HDMI video sources, such as a Chromecast™ device or a
Blu-Ray™ player.
On a GPSMAP 8000 series chartplotter, you can view protected HDMI content (HDCP content) on the MFD
chartplotter screen, and on the connected video source, but not on an external screen. You cannot view any
HDCP content on a screen connected to the GPSMAP 8700 black box. If necessary, check the video source's
manual to verify that HDCP can be turned off for the source. On a GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotter, you can
view HDCP content on an external monitor that supports industry HDCP standards.
HDMI video is shared across the Garmin BlueNet network and across the Garmin Marine Network, but it is
not shared across the NMEA 2000 network. HDCP content cannot be shared across the Garmin network to
GPSMAP 8000 series or older chartplotters. HDCP content can be shared by a GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotter
only to other GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotters connected to the Garmin BlueNet network.
The Garmin GPSMAP HDMI accessory cable is 4.5 m (15 ft) long. If you need a longer cable, you should use an
active HDMI cable only. You need an HDMI coupler to connect the two HDMI cables.
You can use an adapter cable to power a media player stick using a USB port on the chartplotter. The USB port
on a GPSMAP 8000 series chartplotter and the USB DRD port on a GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotter can supply
up to 2.5 W to power a media player stick. The USB port on a GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotter can supply up to
4.5 W to power a media player stick
You must make all cable connections in a dry environment.

Viewing Video 189

Devices
Item Device

HDMI source, such as a Chromecast device

GPSMAP chartplotter

Monitor, such as a computer or television

Connections
From To Cable

Garmin HDMI Cable

HDMI source's HDMI OUT port Chartplotter's HDMI IN port

Garmin HDMI Cable

Chartplotter's HDMI OUT port Monitor's HDMI IN port

Adapter cable to power the HDMI source,

if possible (2.5 W or 4.5 W maximum
Chartplotter's USB OTG/USB depending on chartplotter model and USB
HDMI source's USB port
DRD/USB port port)

Controlling HDMI Audio

You can control the audio for HDMI video sources.
1 From an HDMI video source, select Options.
2 Select an option:
• To turn off the audio, select Off.
The icon appears on the video screen.
• To play the HDMI audio, select On.
The icon appears on the video screen.
• To always play the HDMI audio, even when you are not viewing the HDMI video, select Always On.
The icon appears on the video screen.

Pairing the GC™ 100 Camera with a Garmin Chartplotter

Before you can connect a wireless device to the chartplotter wireless network, you must configure the
chartplotter Wi‑Fi network (Setting Up the Wi‑Fi Network, page 32).
NOTE: You may need to charge the camera's internal battery before you can pair it with a chartplotter. You can
charge the internal battery through the camera's powered mount or, alternatively, you can connect the camera
to a power source using a Micro-USB cable (not included). The Micro-USB port is located on the front of the
camera, behind a protective cap.
1 With the camera within an unobstructed 76 m (250 ft.) of the chartplotter, press three times.
The LED light will start flashing blue.
2 On the chartplotter, select Settings > Communications > Wireless Devices > Garmin Camera > Start.
The chartplotter will show a notification when it has paired with the camera.

190 Viewing Video

 Surround View Camera System
WARNING
Do not solely rely on this system for vessel docking and operation purposes.
Objects displayed by the cameras may be closer than they appear.
This system is only intended to enhance situational awareness when used properly. If used improperly, you
could become distracted by the display. Failure to pay attention to your surroundings during vessel docking and
operation could cause you to miss obstacles or hazards in or around the water, leading to an accident causing
property damage, personal injury, or death.
The Surround View Camera System is a set of dedicated cameras installed and configured to provide a
complete bird's-eye view of your vessel to easily see your immediate surroundings. You can also view video
feeds from any of the dedicated cameras in the system to help with maneuvering and docking.
The Surround View Camera System is available only on select vessels and is installed in the factory.
To view the surround view camera screen, from the home screen, select Vessel > Surround View.

Item Description Information

The bird's-eye view is always shown on the surround view camera screen.
Bird's-eye view You can include the bird's-eye view as part of a combo with another screen, such
as a chart.

By default, two individual camera feeds are shown on the surround view screen.
Individual camera
You can customize this to show only one camera instead.
feeds
You can quickly change which cameras are shown in these feeds.

Selected camera
This indicator shows which camera is shown in the individual camera feed.
indicator

You can enable and configure the visual bumper to show a line on the birds-eye
Visual bumper
view that can help you judge how close objects are to your boat.

You can enable this feature to help judge distances when maneuvering or
Distance marker
docking.

Changing a Camera
You can change which camera shows a live feed on the Surround View screen.
1 From the Surround View screen, touch the camera feed you want to change.
2 Touch , and touch the camera you want to view.

Surround View Camera System 191

Viewing a Camera Feed Full Screen
You can switch to a full-screen view any of the live camera feeds.
NOTE: You can also view each of the cameras in the Surround View Camera System in the Video screen.
1 From the Surround View screen, select the camera you want to view full screen.
2 Select .
The camera switches to a full-screen view, and you can zoom and pan using the controls.
To return to the Surround ViewSurround View screen, select .

Changing the Surround View Camera System Layout

You can change the layout of the Surround View screen to show one or two separate camera feeds in addition
to the bird's-eye view.
1 From the Surround View screen, select Options > Layout.
2 Select the layout.

Showing and Hiding the Visual Bumper

The visual bumper is an adjustable perimeter line you can set around your boat. The visual bumper appears on
the birds-eye view only, and can help you judge how close objects are to your boat.
1 From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Visual Bumper.
2 Select an option
• To show a standard visual bumper, select On
• To show a visual bumper that detects objects and indicates potential collisions, select Active (Object
Detection and Proximity Alert, page 193).

Adjusting the Visual Bumper

You must have the visual bumper shown on the bird's-eye view before you can adjust it.
1 From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Visual Bumper > .
2 Increase or decrease the range of the visual bumper line.
3 Select Back.

Showing the Distance Marker

You can show the distance marker to gain a better sense of distance when maneuvering or docking.
The distance markers shown on the bird's-eye view are determined by the cameras selected in the individual
camera feeds.
1 From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Distance Marker.
2 Select an option
• To show a standard distance marker, select On
• To show a distance marker that detects objects and indicates potential collisions, select Active (Object
Detection and Proximity Alert, page 193).

Surround View Camera Movement Control

You can use the chartplotter to control the movement of surround view cameras, including panning, tilting, and
zooming (Video Camera Movement Control, page 184).

192 Surround View Camera System

Renaming a Camera
You can change the name of any camera in the Surround View Camera System.
1 From the Surround View screen, select Options > Rename Cameras .
2 Select the camera you want to rename.
3 Enter a new name for the camera.
4 Select Options > Rename CamerasDone.

Setting the Camera to Mirrored Stern View

You can set the camera to display a mirrored stern view that displays the camera view as you would view it in a
mirror, such as a rearview mirror. A mirrored stern view is useful when docking the vessel.
From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Mirror Stern Camera.

Object Detection and Proximity Alert

WARNING
You are responsible for the configuring the desired ranges for these features. Garmin does not confirm the
efficacy of the ranges that you have selected.
Object detection and proximity alerts are tools for situational awareness only while docking your vessel and
may not prevent collisions in all circumstances. You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your
vessel, for remaining aware of your surroundings, and for using safe judgment on the water at all times.
These features are only intended for use while docking your vessel. Use of these features in other instances is
at your own risk.
Visibility, lighting, and other environmental conditions may affect the performance of this feature. You must
remain aware of your surroundings while docking your vessel.

CAUTION
The proximity beeper is off by default. To receive proximity alerts, you must enable and unmute the proximity
beeper and ensure that the Beeper setting is turned on (Enabling the Proximity Beeper, page 194). Failure to
make the proximity alert audible could lead to injury or property damage.
You can configure the Surround View Camera System to automatically detect objects within a specified range
and provide both visual and audible alerts. This is intended to assist with docking.
When the visual bumper, the distance marker, or both are set to Active, they automatically detect objects that
contact the bumper or marker and those areas change color to identify the objects to alert you to a potential
collision. This setting is shared with all compatible displays connected to the network.
You can also enable and configure an audible proximity beeper to sound when objects are detected in the
specified range. Some proximity beeper settings are shared on the network, but not all. You may have to
configure some settings on each display where you want to receive audible alerts (Enabling the Proximity
Beeper, page 194).

Surround View Camera System 193

 Proximity beeper alert notification. Indicates the area of the boat sending the proximity alert (port,
starboard, bow, and stern). The color of the shaded area indicates the estimated severity of the alert:
• Yellow: Level 1 - slow, repeated beep
• Orange: Level 2 - faster, repeated beep
• Red: Level 3 - continuous beep

Proximity beeper status (Object Detection and Proximity Alert, page 193)
TIP: You can select this icon to quickly mute and unmute the proximity beeper.

Gray shaded lines indicated objects detected on the distance marker

Red lines indicate objects detected on the virtual bumper

Enabling the Proximity Beeper

CAUTION
The proximity beeper is off by default. To receive proximity alerts, you must enable and unmute the proximity
beeper and ensure that the system Beeper setting is turned on. Failure to make the proximity alert audible could
lead to injury or property damage.
You can enable and configure the behavior of the proximity alert when objects are detected in the specified
regions of the boat. Some settings are shared with all of the connected chartplotters on the network, others
must be independently set on each chartplotter:
• The enabled and disabled regions of the vessel are shared on the network.
• The status of the beeper itself is not shared on the network. You must enable, disable, or mute the proximity
beeper on each chartplotter separately.
1 From the surround view camera screen, select Options > Proximity Beeper.
2 Select the region or regions of the boat where you want to enable the proximity beeper.
NOTE: You must select at least one region on the boat to enable the proximity beeper.
3 If necessary, select Beeper to unmute the proximity beeper.

194 Surround View Camera System

Proximity Beeper Mute Behavior
CAUTION
Even if the proximity beeper is enabled and unmuted, leaving the Surround View screen mutes the proximity
beeper. Return to the Surround View screen to unmute it.
The proximity beeper is muted and unmuted in multiple situations:
• On a touchscreen device, touching mutes and unmutes the beeper.
• On a keyed device, selecting Options > Proximity BeeperBeeper mutes and unmutes the beeper
• If you leave the Surround View screen, the proximity beeper is muted. Returning to the Surround View screen
unmutes the beeper.
• If you turn off all alarms on the chartplotter, the proximity beeper is also turned off (Sounds and Display
Settings, page 202).
• Because the feature is intended for docking, when underway, the proximity beeper is muted when the vessel
speed exceeds 16 kph (10 mph). When the vessel speed falls below 16 kph (10 mph), the beeper is unmuted.

LED Lighting Control

If you have installed a Garmin Spectra lighting controller, you can use the chartplotter to activate and change
™

connected LED lights. You can quickly turn LED lights on and off, and you can adjust the brightness, color, and
effects. You can also create groups of connected LED lights and specialized scenes to quickly toggle different
lights and lighting effects.
When a compatible Fusion stereo is connected to the same NMEA 2000 as the Garmin Spectra lighting
controller and chartplotter, you can control lights from the stereo and you can configure lights so they react to
music played on the stereo.
Before you can access LED lighting control on the chartplotter, you must install one or more Garmin Spectra
lighting controllers and connect your LED lights. See the installation instructions provided with the Garmin
Spectra lighting controller for installation details.
You can access LED lighting screen by selecting Vessel > Lighting.
WARNING
Setting some LED light effects or setting the LED lights to react to music may result in lights flashing at various
intervals. Consult your physician if you have epilepsy or are sensitive to bright or flashing lights.

NOTICE
Before you can control any connected lights using the chartplotter or a compatible stereo, you must first
initialize the lights (Initializing Connected LED Lights, page 196).
Using certain LED colors on your vessel, such as red and green, may violate the laws, regulations, and standards
related to the use and/or operation of marine navigation lights. It is the user's responsibility to comply with any
such applicable laws, regulations, and standards. Garmin is not responsible for any fines, penalties, citations, or
damages that may be incurred due to any such lack of compliance.

LED Light Controller Configuration

You can configure information about the connected Garmin Spectra lighting controllers and connected LED
lights. You must define the type of LED lights connected before you can use them in the software on your
connected chartplotter or stereo.

LED Lighting Control 195

Initializing Connected LED Lights
Before you can interact with any connected LED lights using the chartplotter or stereo, you must first initialize
the lights by providing information about the type of light source supported by the connected LEDs.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lights.
A list of all available lights is shown. Any light indicated with a yellow circle and Not Used as the Light Output
must be initialized before it's available for use by the system.
2 Select a light from the list on the left.
3 Select Light Output and select the type of LEDs connected:
• RGB: The connected dimmable LEDs support a full range of colors.
• RGBW: The connected dimmable LEDs support a full range of colors and high quality white light.
• CRGBW: The connected dimmable LEDs support a full range of colors and multiple temperature white
light.
• Single Channel: The dimmable LEDs support one dedicated color.
TIP: You can select Identify to illuminate the selected light to help identify and test the selected LED type.
4 Repeat this procedure for all connected lights until all of the intended LED lights are initialized.

Renaming an LED Light

You can provide a custom name to a connected LED light to make it easier to identify on the LED lighting control
screen and in configuration menus.
NOTE: Custom LED light names are synchronized across chartplotters and stereos connected to the same
Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network. Custom LED light names are not synchronized across the
NMEA 2000 network, so you should connect your devices using a Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine
Network connection for the best experience between devices.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lights.
A list of all available lights is shown.
2 Select a light you want to rename.
3 Select Rename, and enter a new name for the light.

Associating LED Lights with an Audio Zone

If a Garmin Spectra lighting controller is connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as a compatible Fusion
stereo, you can associate connected lights with an audio zone on the stereo. When lights are associated with
an audio zone on a stereo, you can configure the lights to synchronize with the music playing on the associated
audio zone.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lights.
A list of all available lights and light groups is shown.
2 Select a light you want to associate with an audio zone from the list on the left.
3 Select Audio Zones > Select Audio Zone.
A list of audio zones on all connected compatible Fusion stereos is shown.
4 Select the audio zone to which you want to associate the lights.

196 LED Lighting Control

Renaming an LED Lighting Controller
By default, all lighting controllers connected to the same NMEA 2000 network as the chartplotter are assigned a
general name. You can rename connected controllers for easier identification.
NOTE: Lighting controller information, such as the history of connected controllers and custom names, is
synchronized across chartplotters and stereos connected to the same Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin
Marine Network. This information is not synchronized across the NMEA 2000 network, so you should connect
your devices using a Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network connection for the best experience
between devices.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lighting Controllers.
A list of all connected lighting controllers is shown.
2 Select a lighting controller.
3 Select Rename, and enter a new name for the lighting controller.

Removing an LED Lighting Controller

When you connect a lighting controller to the same NMEA 2000 network as the chartplotter, the lighting
controller information is saved on the chartplotter, even if you disconnect the lighting controller. If you are
completely removing a controller or replacing it with a new controller, you can remove the saved information
about the old controller from the chartplotter.
NOTE: Lighting controller information, such as the history of connected controllers and custom names, is
synchronized across chartplotters and stereos connected to the same Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin
Marine Network. This information is not synchronized across the NMEA 2000 network, so you should connect
your devices using a Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network connection for the best experience
between devices.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lighting Controllers.
A list of all connected lighting controllers is shown. Disconnected controllers are indicated by a black X.
2 Select a lighting controller you want to remove.
3 Select Forget.

LED Lighting Control 197

LED Lighting Control Screen
You can access LED lighting screen by selecting Vessel > Lighting.

Turns off all connected lights and scenes.

Scenes Shows all created scenes.

Lights Shows all connected LED lights and light groups.

Creates a new scene.

Light, light group, or scene name and information.

Select to turn a light or light group on and off.
Select to start a scene.

Shows whether the light or light group on and off.

Quickly adjust the brightness of the light, light group, or scene.

Quickly edit the properties, color, and effects of a light, light group, or scene.

Turning LED Lights On and Off

1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Edit Light.
A list of all available lights and light groups is shown.
2 Select a light or light group.
3 Select Turn On or Turn Off.
TIP: You can select the toggle switch on the light or light group directly from the lighting control screen to
quickly turn lights and light groups on and off.

Adjusting LED Light Brightness

1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Edit Light.
A list of all available lights and light groups is shown.
2 Select the light or light group you want to adjust.
3 Adjust the brightness level on the bottom of the screen for the selected light or light group.
TIP: You can select on the light or light group directly from the lighting control screen to quickly adjust the
brightness for a light or group of lights.

198 LED Lighting Control

Changing LED Light Color
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Edit Light.
A list of all available lights and light groups is shown.
2 Select a light or light group.
3 Select Color Pick > Color.
4 Depending on the type of light connected, select an option:
• To change the RGB color of a connected light, select Color.
• To change the tone of a white light, select White.
A color or white light gradient window is shown, along with a set of predefined colors or white light
selections.
5 Select a color or white tone.
TIP: You can select on the light or light group directly from the lighting control screen to quickly adjust the
color or effect for a light or group of lights.

Changing LED Light Effects

WARNING
Selecting some LED light effects may result in lights flashing at various intervals. Consult your physician if you
have epilepsy or are sensitive to bright or flashing lights.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Edit Light.
A list of all available lights and light groups is shown.
2 Select the light or light group you want to adjust.
3 Select Effects > Effect.
A list of predefined lighting effects is shown
4 Select an effect from the list.
The screen shows the colors and pattern included in the effect, and the affected light or light group starts
using the selected effect.
5 If necessary, select Effect, and choose a different effect until the light or group of lights uses the preferred
effect.
TIP: You can select on the light or light group directly from the lighting control screen to quickly adjust the
effect or color for a light or group of lights.

LED Lighting Control 199

Setting LED Lights to React to Music
You must associate a light or light group with an audio zone on a connected compatible stereo before you can
use the Audio Sync feature and have the lights react to music playing on the stereo (Associating LED Lights with
an Audio Zone, page 196).
WARNING
Setting LED lights to react to music may result in lights flashing at various intervals. Consult your physician if
you have epilepsy or are sensitive to bright or flashing lights.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Edit Light.
A list of all available lights and light groups is shown.
2 Select the light or light group you want to adjust.
3 Select Audio Sync.
4 Depending on the type of light connected, select an option:
• If you want the lights to react to quieter and louder elements of the music playing, select Mode > Color
Blend.
• If you want the lights to react to the bass and treble frequencies of the music playing, Mode > Audio
Spectrum.
5 If necessary, select the colors associated with the quieter, louder, bass, and treble elements depending on
the selected mode.
TIP: You can select on the light or light group directly from the lighting control screen to quickly adjust the
color or effect for a light or group of lights.

LED Light Scenes

A scene is a collection of LED lights that you can set to change to a defined set of colors and effects. You can
create up to 20 scenes, with any number of connected lights or light groups in each scene. You can configure all
of the lights in a scene to behave the same way or independently of one another.
A scene is different from a light group because you can add a light or light group to any number of scenes
you create. You are not limited to how many scenes contain a connected light or light group. A light group is
more restrictive and defines specific lights that you want to regularly behave the same way (LED Light Groups,
page 201).
NOTE: LED light scenes you create are synchronized across chartplotters and stereos connected to the same
Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network. LED light scene information is not synchronized across the
NMEA 2000 network, so you should connect your devices using a Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine
Network connection for the best experience between devices.

Creating a new LED Light Scene

1 From the lighting control screen, select Scenes.
2 Select Options > Create New Scene.
TIP: You can select from the lighting control screen at any time to quickly create a new scene.
3 Enter a name for the scene, and select Done.
The new scene appears on the lighting control screen.
After creating the scene, you should edit the scene to add or remove lights and define how you want them to
behave when you run the scene.

200 LED Lighting Control

Editing an LED Light Scene
1 From the lighting control screen, select Scenes.
2 Select Options > Edit Scene.
3 Select the name of the scene.
TIP: You can select on a scene directly from the lighting control screen to quickly edit the scene.
4 To edit the scene behavior, select one or more options:
• To rename the scene, select Rename, and enter the new name.
• If you've changed the status and behavior of lights in the scene and want to update the scene to use the
present state of all lights in the scene, select Resave Scene.
• To add or remove lights or light groups from the scene, select Add/Remove Lights, and select the lights
and light groups you want to include in the scene.

Starting an LED Light Scene

Before you can start a scene, you must create at least one scene.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Scenes.
2 Select on a scene to start it.
TIP: If you want to turn off all lights in a scene, select Options > Edit Scene, select the name of the scene,
and select Turn Off Lights.

Deleting an LED Light Scene

You can remove any LED light scenes you created. Deleting a scene does not affect any lights or light groups
that were added to the scene.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Scenes.
2 Select Options > Delete Scene.
3 Select the name of the scene you want to delete, and select Yes to confirm.

LED Light Groups

A group consists of two or more connected LED lights associated with one another so they regularly behave the
same way. For example, you may have LEDs on a set of speakers connected to one port on a lighting controller,
and you may have LEDs on a subwoofer in the same area connected to another port on the lighting controller.
By adding both of these sets of lights to a group, they will appear as one toggle on the lighting page and turn on
and off together.
A group is different from a scene because a connected LED light can only belong to one group at a time. Also, a
group appears on the Lights tab in the lighting page along with other connected lights.
NOTE: LED light groups you create are synchronized across chartplotters and stereos connected to the same
Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network. LED light-group information is not synchronized across the
NMEA 2000 network, so you should connect your devices using a Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine
Network connection for the best experience between devices.

Creating and Adding Lights to an LED Light Group

1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lights.
A list of all available lights is shown.
2 Select a light you would like to add to a light group and select Light Group > Select Group.
3 Select Create New Group, and enter the name for the new group.
The new group is created, and the selected light is added to the group.
4 Select another light to add to the light group, and select Light Group > Select Group.
5 Select the name of the light group to add the light to the group.
6 Repeat until the group contains all of the lights you want to add.

LED Lighting Control 201

Editing an LED Light Group
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lights.
A list of all available lights is shown.
2 Select a light to add or remove from a group.
3 Select Light Group, and select an option:
• To add the light to a group, select Select Group.
• To move the light to a different group, select Change Group, and select a different group or create a new
group.
• To remove the light from a group, select Remove From Group.
4 Repeat for any additional lights until they are grouped as preferred.

Renaming an LED Light Group

NOTE: LED light group information is synchronized across chartplotters and stereos connected to the same
Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network.
1 From the lighting control screen, select Options > Installation > Lights.
A list of all available lights is shown.
2 Select a light in the group you want to rename.
3 Select Light Group > Rename, and enter a new name for the group.

Device Configuration
System Settings
Select > System.
Sounds and Display: Adjusts the display settings and the audio settings (if available).
Satellite Positioning: Provides information about the GPS satellites and settings.
System Information: Provides information about the devices on the network and the software version.
Station Information: Adjusts the setup of the station.
Auto Power Up: Controls which devices turn on automatically when power is applied.
Auto Power Off: Automatically turns off the system after it has been asleep for the selected length of time.
Simulator: Turns the simulator on or off and allows you to set the time, date, speed, and simulated location.

Sounds and Display Settings

Select > System > Sounds and Display.
Beeper: Turns on and off the tone that sounds for alarms and selections.
Audio Setup: Sets up the audio output.
Backlight: Sets the backlight brightness. You can select the Auto option to adjust the backlight brightness
automatically based on the ambient light.
Backlight Sync: Synchronizes the backlight brightness of other chartplotters in the station.
Color Mode: Sets the device to display day or night colors. You can select the Auto option to allow the device to
set day or night colors automatically based on the time of day.
Startup Image: Sets the image that appears when you turn on the device.
Startup Layout: Sets the layout that appears when you turn on the device.
Screen Lock: Sets the anti-theft feature that requires a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) to prevent
unauthorized use of the device (Enabling Screen Lock, page 18).

202 Device Configuration

Audio Settings
You can adjust audible alarms, alerts, and warnings that are sounded over connected audio devices. You can
connect an audio device using the NMEA 0183 Audio Cable accessory. Models that support HDMI audio out can
sound audio alarms through a device connected using HDMI.
Select > System > Sounds and Display > Audio Setup.
Audio Output: Turns on the audio output for audio alerts. This turns on the audio output through HDMI for
models that support HDMI audio out.
Audio Alerts: Sets which system alarms and alerts are played over the compatible audio output. An alarm
indicates a situation could be hazardous to passengers and requires immediate action. A warning indicates
the situation could be hazardous to equipment on the vessel or the vessel itself and requires action very
soon. All other messages and information are classified as alerts.
Audio Alert Language: Sets the spoken language for alerts.
Audio Alert Device: Sets the device to control when alerts are played.
Audio Alert Source: Switches the audio device to the selected source when an alert is played.
Alert Volume: Controls the volume of the alerts.

Satellite Positioning (GPS) Settings

NOTE: These settings may change depending on the selected GPS source. Not all options are available on all
models.
Select > System > Satellite Positioning.
Source: Allows you to select the preferred source for GPS data.
Speed Filter: Averages the speed of your vessel over a short period of time for smoother speed values.
WAAS/EGNOS: Turns on or off WAAS data (in North America) or EGNOS data (in Europe), which can provide
more-accurate GPS position information. When using WAAS or EGNOS data, the device may take longer to
acquire satellites.
Positioning Mode > GPS Only: The GPS source uses only GPS satellites for position data.
Positioning Mode > GPS and GLONASS: The GPS source uses both GPS satellites and GLONASS (Russia
satellite system) for position data. When the system is used in situations with poor sky visibility, GLONASS
data can be used in combination with GPS to provide more accurate position information.
Positioning Mode > Multi-Constellation: The GPS source uses GPS data from all available satellite
constellations for position data.
Positioning Mode > Multi-Constellation and Multi-Frequency: The GPS source uses GPS data from all available
satellite constellations as well as both L1 and L5 frequencies for position data.

Station Settings
Select > System > Station Information.
Change Station: Sets the entire station to a new set of defaults based on the location of this station. You can
also select to use this display as a stand-alone, individual display, instead of grouping it with other displays to
make a station.
Input Device Pairing: Allows you to pair a GRID remote input device or other compatible input device with this
station.
Display Order: Sets the order of the displays, which is important when using a GRID remote input device.
Autopilot Enabled: Allows you to control the autopilot from this device.
Reset Layouts: Resets the layouts in this station to the factory default settings.
Reset Station Settings: Resets all station settings to on all connected devices in the station to the factory
default settings, and requires initial station setup.

Device Configuration 203

Viewing System Software Information
You can view the software version, the basemap version, all supplemental map information (if applicable),
the software version for an optional Garmin radar (if applicable), and the unit ID number. You may need this
information to update the system software or to purchase additional map data information.
Select > System > System Information > Software Information.
Viewing the Event Log
The event log shows a list of system events.
1 Select > System > System Information > Event Log.
2 If necessary, select an event in the list, and select Review to view more information about the event.
Sorting and Filtering Events
1 From the Event Log, select Sort By.
2 Select an option to sort or filter the event log.
Saving Events to a Memory Card
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 From the Event Log, select Save to Card.
Clearing All of the Events From the Event Log
From the Event Log, select Clear Event Log.

Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance Information

The label for this device is provided electronically. The e-label may provide regulatory information, such as
identification numbers provided by the FCC or regional compliance markings, as well as applicable product and
licensing information. Not available on all models.
1 Select .
2 Select System.
3 Select Regulatory Information.

Preferences Settings
Select > Preferences.
Units: Sets units of measure.
Language: Sets the on-screen text language.
Navigation: Sets navigation preferences.
Filters: Smooths out the values shown in the data fields, which can decrease the noise or show longer term
trends. Increasing the filter setting increases the smoothing and decreasing it reduces the smoothing. A filter
setting of 0 will disable the filter and the value shown will be the raw value from the source. You can also
synchronize these settings across all devices that enable the Sync Filters setting.
Keyboard Layout: Arranges the keys on the on-screen keyboard.
Screenshot Capture: Allows the device to save images of the screen.
Menu Bar Display: Shows or automatically hides the menu bar when it is not needed.

204 Device Configuration

Units Settings
Select > Preferences > Units.
System Units: Sets the unit format for the device. For example, Custom > Depth > Fathoms sets the unit format
for depth to Fathoms.
Variance: Sets the magnetic declination, the angle between magnetic north and true north, for your present
location.
North Reference: Sets the direction references used in calculating heading information. True sets geographic
north as the north reference. Grid sets grid north as the north reference (000º). Magnetic sets the magnetic
north as the north reference.
Position Format: Sets the position format in which a given location reading appears. Do not change this setting
unless you are using a map or chart that specifies a different position format.
Map Datum: Sets the coordinate system on which the map is structured. Do not change this setting unless you
are using a map or chart that specifies a different map datum.
Time: Sets the time format, time zone, and daylight saving time.

Navigation Settings
NOTE: Some settings and options require additional charts or hardware.
Select > Preferences > Navigation.
Route Labels: Sets the type of labels shown with route turns on the map.
Turn Transition: Adjusts how the chartplotter transitions to the next turn or leg or the route. You can set the
transition to be based on time or distance before the turn. You can increase the time or distance value to help
improve the accuracy of the autopilot when navigating a route or an Auto Guidance line with many frequent
turns or at higher speeds. For straighter routes or slower speeds, lowering this value can improve autopilot
accuracy.
Speed Sources: Sets the source for the speed readings.
Auto Guidance: Sets the measurements for the Preferred Depth, Vertical Clearance, and Shoreline Distance,
when you are using some premium maps.
Route Start: Selects a starting point for route navigation.

Device Configuration 205

Auto Guidance Path Configurations
CAUTION
The Preferred Depth and Vertical Clearance settings influence how the chartplotter calculates an Auto Guidance
path. If a section of an Auto Guidance path is shallower than the Preferred Depth or lower than the Vertical
Clearance settings, the section of the Auto Guidance path appears as a solid orange line or a red striped line
in Garmin Navionics+ and Garmin Navionics Vision+ charts and appears as a magenta and gray striped line in
previous versions. When your boat enters one of those areas, a warning message appears (Route Color Coding,
page 55).
NOTE: Auto Guidance is available with premium charts, in some areas.
NOTE: Not all settings apply to all maps.
You can set the parameters the chartplotter uses when calculating an Auto Guidance path.
Select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance.
Preferred Depth: Sets the minimum water depth, based on chart depth data, that your boat can safely travel
over.
NOTE: The minimum water depth for the premium charts (made before 2016) is 3 feet. If you enter a value of
less than 3 feet, the charts only use depths of 3 feet for Auto Guidance path calculations.
Vertical Clearance: Sets the minimum height of a bridge or obstacle, based on chart data, that your boat can
safely travel under.
Shoreline Distance: Sets how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance path to be placed. The path
may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for this setting are relative, not
absolute. To ensure that path is placed the appropriate distance from shore, you can assess the placement
of the path using one or more familiar destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway
(Adjusting the Distance from Shore, page 65).

206 Device Configuration

Adjusting the Distance from Shore
The Shoreline Distance setting indicates how close to the shore you want the Auto Guidance line to be placed.
The Auto Guidance line may move if you change this setting while navigating. The available values for the
Shoreline Distance setting are relative, not absolute. To ensure the Auto Guidance line is placed the appropriate
distance from shore, you can assess the placement of the Auto Guidance line using one or more familiar
destinations that require navigation through a narrow waterway.
1 Dock your vessel or drop the anchor.
2 Select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline Distance > Normal.
3 Select a destination that you have navigated to previously.
4 Select Navigate To > Auto Guidance.
5 Review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether the line safely avoids known
obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.
6 Select an option:
• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and
proceed to step 10.
• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >
Shoreline Distance > Far.
• If the turns in the line are too wide, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline
Distance > Near.
7 If you selected Near or Far in step 6, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine whether
the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.
Auto Guidance maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the Shoreline
Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto Guidance line,
unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.
8 Select an option:
• If the placement of the line is satisfactory, select Options > Navigation Options > Stop Navigation, and
proceed to step 10.
• If the line is too close to known obstacles, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance >
Shoreline Distance > Farthest.
• If the turns in the line are too wide, select > Preferences > Navigation > Auto Guidance > Shoreline
Distance > Nearest.
9 If you selected Nearest or Farthest in step 8, review the placement of the Auto Guidance line, and determine
whether the line safely avoids known obstacles and the turns enable efficient travel.
The Auto Guidance path maintains a wide clearance from obstacles in open water, even if you set the
Shoreline Distance setting to Near or Nearest. As a result, the chartplotter may not reposition the Auto
Guidance line, unless the destination selected requires navigation through a narrow waterway.
10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 at least once more, using a different destination each time, until you are familiar
with the functionality of the Shoreline Distance setting.

Device Configuration 207

Communications Settings
Viewing Connected Devices
You can view lists of the connected devices on the vessel including which chartplotter a device is connected to
or paired with.
1 Select > Communications.
2 Select a network.
3 Select Device List.
A list of network devices appears. If a device is connected to or paired with a specific chartplotter, the name
of the chartplotter is shown along with the device name.
NOTE: Some devices included in the NMEA 2000 device list may be connected to a chartplotter at another
station on the vessel. You can select Related To: to see more information about which chartplotter the
device is connected to.

NMEA 0183 Settings

Select > Communications > NMEA 0183 Setup.
Port Types: See Setting the Communication Format for Each NMEA 0183 Port, page 208.
Output Sentences: See Configuring NMEA 0183 Output Sentences, page 208.
Position Precision: Adjusts the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for transmission of NMEA
output.
XTE Precision: Adjusts the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for NMEA crosstalk error output.
Waypoint IDs: Sets the device to transmit waypoint names or numbers using NMEA 0183 while navigating.
Using numbers may resolve compatibility issues with older NMEA 0183 autopilots.
Restore Defaults: Restores the NMEA 0183 settings to the original factory default values.
Diagnostics: Displays NMEA 0183 diagnostic information.
Configuring NMEA 0183 Output Sentences
You can enable and disable NMEA 0183 output sentences.
1 Select > Communications > NMEA 0183 Setup > Output Sentences.
2 Select an option.
3 Select one or more NMEA 0183 output sentences, and select Back.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enable or disable additional output sentences.
Setting the Communication Format for Each NMEA 0183 Port
You can configure the communication format for each internal NMEA 0183 port when connecting your
chartplotter to external NMEA 0183 devices, a computer, or other Garmin devices.
1 Select > Communications > NMEA 0183 Setup > Port Types.
2 Select an input or output port.
3 Select a format:
• To support the input or output of standard NMEA 0183 data, DSC, and sonar NMEA input support for the
DPT, MTW, and VHW sentences, select NMEA Std..
• To support the input or output of standard NMEA 0183 data for most AIS receivers, select NMEA High
Speed.
• To support the input or output of Garmin proprietary data for interfacing with Garmin software, select
Garmin.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to configure additional input or output ports.

208 Device Configuration

NMEA 2000 Settings
Select > Communications > NMEA 2000 Setup.
Device List: Displays the devices connected to the network and allows you to set options for some transducers
connected using the NMEA 2000 network.
Label Devices: Changes the labels for available connected devices.
Naming Devices and Sensors on the Network
You can name devices and sensors connected to the Garmin Marine Network and the NMEA 2000 network.
1 Select > Communications.
2 Select Marine Network or NMEA 2000 Setup > Device List.
3 Select a device from the list on the left.
4 Select Change Name.
5 Enter the name, and select Done.

The Garmin BlueNet Network and the Legacy Garmin Marine Network
The Garmin BlueNet network allows you to share data from Garmin peripheral devices with chartplotters quickly
and easily. You can connect compatible devices using Garmin BlueNet technology to receive data from and
share data with other connected devices and chartplotters.
There are two types of network technology used by Garmin marine devices. The legacy Garmin Marine Network
technology has larger connectors and has been in use for many years. The newer Garmin BlueNet network
technology has smaller connectors and is capable of higher speeds than the previous network technology. You
can connect Garmin Marine Network devices to Garmin BlueNet devices to share data with one another when
the network is structured properly. For more information, see garmin.com/manuals/bluenet.
You can view all of the devices connected to the Garmin BlueNet network and add or change a custom name for
each device.
Select > Communications > BlueNet™ Network or Marine Network.

USB DRD Settings

The USB-C dual-role-data (DRD) port on the chartplotter can function as either a USB host or a USB client
(device), depending on the needs of the connected device. If your device has this port, it is labeled USB DRD.
Select > Communications > USB DRD Setup.
Auto: The USB port automatically changes between host and client (device) mode. This is the default setting
and should be appropriate for most connections.
Host: This chartplotter manages a connected client device, such as a card reader or an external touch screen.
Device: This chartplotter is managed by a connected host device. For example, the chartplotter can provide
touch output to a host, such as a computer.

Setting Alarms
CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.

Device Configuration 209

Navigation Alarms
Select > Alarms > Navigation.
Arrival: Sets an alarm to sound when you are within a specified distance or time from a turn or a destination.
Anchor Drag: Sets an alarm to sound when you exceed a specified drift distance while anchored.

WARNING
The anchor drag alarm is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent groundings or collisions in
all circumstances. You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel, for remaining aware of
your surroundings, and for using safe judgment on the water at all times.
Off Course: Sets an alarm to sound when you are off course by a specified distance.
Boundary Alarms: Disables and enables all boundary alarms.
Setting the Anchor Drag Alarm
You can set an alarm to sound if you have moved outside an allowable radius you set when configuring the
alarm.

WARNING
The anchor drag alarm is a tool for situational awareness only, and may not prevent grounding or collisions in
all circumstances. You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel, for remaining aware
of your surroundings, and for using safe judgement on the water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could
result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.

CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
1 Select > Alarms > Navigation > Anchor Drag.
2 Select Alarm to turn on the alarm.
3 Select Set Radius, and select a distance on the chart.
4 Select Back.

210 Device Configuration

System Alarms
Select > Alarms > System.
Clock
Sets an alarm clock.
Unit Voltage: Sets an alarm to sound when the battery reaches a specified low voltage.
GPS Accuracy: Sets an alarm to sound when the GPS location accuracy falls outside the user-defined value.

Sonar Alarms
WARNING
The sonar alarms feature is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent grounding in all
circumstances. It is your obligation to ensure safe operation of the vessel.

CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
NOTE: Not all options are available on all transducers.
From an applicable sonar view, select Options > Sonar Setup > Alarms.
You can also open the sonar alarms by selecting > Alarms > Sonar.
Shallow Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is less than the specified value.
Deep Water: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth is greater than the specified value.
FrontVü Alarm: Sets an alarm to sound when the depth in front of the vessel is less than the specified value,
which can help you avoid running aground (Setting the Garmin FrontVü Depth Alarm, page 103). This alarm is
available only with Panoptix Garmin FrontVü transducers.
Water Temp.: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer reports a temperature that is 2°F (1.1°C) above or
below the specified temperature.
Contour: Sets an alarm to sound when the transducer detects a suspended target within the specified depth
from the surface of the water and from the bottom.
Fish: Sets an alarm to sound when the device detects a suspended target.
• sets the alarm to sound when fish of all sizes are detected.
• sets the alarm to sound only when medium or large fish are detected.
• sets the alarm to sound only when large fish are detected.

Setting Weather Alarms

Before you can set weather alarms, you must have a compatible chartplotter connected to a weather device,
such as a GXM device, and have a valid weather subscription.
1 Select > Alarms > Weather.
2 Turn on alarms for specific weather events.

Setting the Fuel Alarm

CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
Before you can set a fuel level alarm, you must connect a compatible fuel flow sensor to the chartplotter.
You can set an alarm to sound when the total amount of remaining onboard fuel reaches the level you specify.
1 Select > Alarms > Fuel > Total Fuel Onboard > On.
2 Enter the remaining amount of fuel that triggers the alarm, and select Done.

Device Configuration 211

My Vessel Settings
NOTE: Some settings and options require additional charts or hardware.
Select > My Vessel.
Transducers: Shows all transducers on the network, allows you to change transducers, and allows you to view
diagnostic information (Selecting the Transducer Type, page 91).
Depth and Anchoring: Allows you to enter information about the keel (Setting the Keel Offset, page 73) and the
anchor.
The Anchor Height value is the height of the anchor above the waterline. The Anchor Scope value is the ratio
of the length of anchor rode in use to the vertical distance from the bow of the vessel to the bottom of the
water. These anchor settings are used to calculate the Target Anchor Rode date field.
Temp. Offset: Allows you to set an offset value to compensate for the water temperature reading from a
connected water-temperature sensor or a temperature-capable transducer (Setting the Water Temperature
Offset, page 214).
Calibrate Water Speed: Calibrates the speed-sensing transducer or sensor (Calibrating a Water-Speed Device,
page 214).
Fuel: Sets the combined fuel capacity and fuel remaining in the fuel tanks on your vessel (Fuel Settings,
page 214).
Vessel Type: Enables some chartplotter features based on the boat type.
Switching: Sets the digital switching circuits, such as SeaStar and CZone™ devices.
®

Polar Table: Enables polar table data, when the vessel type is not a powerboat.
System Profiles: Allows you to save your system profile to a memory card and import system profile settings
from a memory card. This can be helpful for charter or fleet vessels, and for sharing your setup information
with a friend.
Hull ID Number: Allows you to enter the Hull Identification Number (HIN).The HIN might be permanently affixed
to the upper starboard side of the transom or outboard side.
Optimus Steering: Allows you to adjust the Optimus steering parameters.

212 Device Configuration

Setting the Keel Offset
You can enter a keel offset to compensate the water depth reading for the transducer installation location. This
allows you to view the depth of the water below the keel or the true depth of the water, depending on your
needs.
If you want to know the water depth below the keel or the lowest point of your boat and the transducer is
installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the distance from the transducer
location to the keel of the boat.
If you want to know the true water depth and the transducer is installed below the water line, measure the
distance from the bottom of the transducer up to the water line.
NOTE: This option is only available when you have valid depth data.
1 Measure the distance:
• If the transducer is installed at the water line or anywhere above the end of the keel, measure the
distance from the transducer location to the keel of the boat. Enter this value as a positive number.
• If the transducer is installed at the bottom of the keel and you want to know the true depth of the
water, measure the distance from the transducer to the water line. Enter this value in as a negative
number.

2 Complete an action:
• If the transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select > My Vessel > Depth and
Anchoring > Keel Offset.
• If the transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select > Communications > NMEA 2000
Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Keel Offset.
3 Select if the transducer is installed at the water line, or select if the transducer is installed at the
bottom of the keel.
4 Enter the distance measured in step 1.

Device Configuration 213

Setting the Water Temperature Offset
The temperature offset compensates for the temperature reading from a temperature sensor or temperature-
capable transducer.
1 Measure the water temperature using the temperature sensor or temperature-capable transducer that is
connected to the network.
2 Measure the water temperature using a different temperature sensor or a thermometer that is known to be
accurate.
3 Subtract the water temperature measured in step 1 from the water temperature measured in step 2.
This value is the temperature offset. Enter this value in step 5 as a positive number if the sensor measures
the water temperature as being colder than it actually is. Enter this value in step 5 as a negative number if the
sensor measures the water temperature as being warmer than it actually is.
4 Complete an action:
• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select > My Vessel >
Temp. Offset.
• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select > Communications > NMEA
2000 Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Temp. Offset.
5 Enter the temperature offset value calculated in step 3.

Fuel Settings
Select > My Vessel > Fuel.
Fuel Remaining: Allows you to use fuel flow sensors or fuel tank level sensors to monitor the fuel remaining on
the vessel. The Fuel Flow option uses fuel flow sensors. The Fuel Tank option uses fuel tank level sensors.
Fuel Tank Capacity: Allows you to enter the fuel capacity of each fuel tank onboard. This setting is available
when the Fuel Remaining setting is set to the Fuel Tank option. The chartplotter uses information from the
tank level sensors, so you do not need to do manually enter fuel information after you fill up the tanks.
Fuel Capacity: Allows you to enter the total fuel capacity of all fuel tanks onboard. This setting is available when
the Fuel Remaining setting is set to the Fuel Flow option. After you fill up your tanks with fuel, you must enter
fuel information manually using one of the options below.
• If you have filled up all the fuel tanks on the vessel, select Fill Up All Tanks. The fuel level is set to
maximum capacity.
• If you have added less than a full tank of fuel, select Add Fuel to Boat, and enter the amount added.
• To specify the total fuel in the vessel tanks, select Set Total Fuel Onboard, and enter the total amount of
fuel in the tanks.

Calibrating a Water-Speed Device

If you have a speed sensor or a speed-sensing transducer connected, you can calibrate that speed-sensing
device to improve the accuracy of water-speed data displayed by the chartplotter.
1 Complete an action:
• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the chartplotter or a sonar module, select > My Vessel >
Calibrate Water Speed.
• If the sensor or transducer is connected to the NMEA 2000 network, select > Communications > NMEA
2000 Setup > Device List, select the transducer, and select Review > Calibrate Water Speed.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
If the boat is not moving fast enough or the speed sensor is not registering a speed, a message appears.
3 Select OK, and safely increase the boat speed.
4 If the message appears again, stop the boat, and ensure the speed-sensor wheel is not stuck.
5 If the wheel turns freely, check the cable connections.
6 If you continue to get the message, contact Garmin product support.

214 Device Configuration

Other Vessels Settings
CAUTION
The Beeper setting must be turned on to make alarms audible (Sounds and Display Settings, page 202). Failure
to set audible alarms could lead to injury or property damage.
When your compatible chartplotter is connected to an AIS device or VHF radio, you can set up how other
vessels are displayed on the chartplotter.
Select > Other Vessels.
AIS: Enables and disables AIS signal reception.
DSC: Enables and disables digital selective calling (DSC).
Collision Alarm: Sets the collision alarm (Setting the Safe-Zone Collision Alarm, page 44).
AIS-EPIRB Test: Enables test signals from Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons (EPRIB).
AIS-MOB Test: Enables test signals from man overboard (MOB) devices.
AIS-SART Test: Enables test transmissions from Search and Rescue Transponders (SART).

Settings that are Synced on the Garmin Marine Network

Garmin ECHOMAP™ and GPSMAP chartplotters sync certain settings when connected to the Garmin Marine
Network.
The following settings are synced, if applicable, to the device.
Alarm Settings (also syncs alarm acknowledgment):
• Arrival
• Anchor Drag
• Off Course
• GPS Accuracy
• Shallow Water
• Deep Water (Not available in the GPSMAP 8400/8600 series)
• Water Temp.
• Contour (Not available in echoMAP 70s and GPSMAP 507/701 series)
• Fish
• Collision Alarm
General Settings:
• Auto Guidance Preferred Depth
• Auto Guidance Vertical Clearance
• Beeper
• Color Mode
• Keyboard Layout
• Language
• Map Datum
• Heading
• Position Format
• System Units
• Calibrate Water Speed
• Radar Antenna Size
Chart Settings:
• Chart Borders
• Hazard Colors
• Heading Line

Device Configuration 215

• Land POIs
• Light Sectors
• Navaid Size
• Navaid Type
• Photo Points
• Preferred Depth
• Shallow Shading
• Service Points
• Vessel Icon (Cannot be synced between all models)

Restoring the Original Chartplotter Factory Settings

NOTE: This affects all devices on the network.
1 Select > System > System Information > Reset.
2 Select an option:
• To reset the device settings to the factory default values, select Reset Default Settings. This restores the
default configuration settings, but does not remove saved user data, maps, or software updates.
• To reset all settings in all devices in the station to the factory default values, select Reset Station
Settings. This restores the default configuration settings, but does not remove saved user data, maps, or
software updates
• To clear saved data, such as waypoints and routes, select Delete User Data. This does not affect maps or
software updates.
• To clear saved data and reset device settings to the factory default values, disconnect the chartplotter
from the Garmin Marine Network, and select Delete Data and Reset Settings. This does not affect maps
or software updates.

Sharing and Managing User Data

WARNING
This feature allows you to import data from other devices that may have been generated by third parties.
Garmin makes no representations about the accuracy, completeness, or timeliness of data that is generated by
third parties. Any reliance on or use of such data is at your own risk.
You can share user data between compatible devices. User data includes waypoints, saved tracks, routes, and
boundaries.
• User data is shared with other devices connected to the Garmin BlueNet network or Garmin Marine Network.
• You can share and manage user data between different devices using a memory card. The memory card you
use must be formatted to a file type supported by all devices that you want to share user data. For example,
if you have one device that supports only FAT32 format cards and another device that supports exFat format
cards, you should use a card formatted to FAT32 so that it can be read by both devices (Memory Cards,
page 12).

Selecting a File Type for Third-Party Waypoints and Routes

You can import and export waypoints and routes from third-party devices.
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 Select Where To > Manage User Data > Data Transfer > File Type.
3 Select GPX.
To transfer data with Garmin devices again, select the ADM file type.

216 Sharing and Managing User Data

Copying User Data from a Memory Card
You can transfer user data from a memory card to transfer from other devices. User data includes waypoints,
routes, Auto Guidance paths, tracks, and boundaries.
NOTE: Only boundary files with an .adm extension are supported.
1 Insert a memory card into a card slot.
2 Select Where To > Manage User Data > Data Transfer.
3 If necessary, select the memory card to copy data to.
4 Select an option:
• To transfer data from the memory card to the chartplotter and combine it with existing user data, select
Merge from Card.
• To transfer data from the memory card to the chartplotter and overwrite existing user data, select Replace
from Card.
5 Select the file name.

Copying All User Data to a Memory Card

You can save all of the user data on the device to a memory card to transfer to other devices. User data includes
waypoints, routes, Auto Guidance paths, tracks, and boundaries.
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 Select Where To > Manage User Data > Data Transfer > Save All to Card.
3 If necessary, select the memory card to copy the data to.
4 Select an option:
• To create a new file, select Add New File, and enter a name.
• To add the information to an existing file, select the file from the list, and select Save to Card.

Copying User Data from a Specified Area to a Memory Card

You can save user data from a specified area to a memory card to transfer to other devices. User data includes
waypoints, routes, Auto Guidance paths, tracks, and boundaries.
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 Select Where To > Manage User Data > Data Transfer > Save Area to Card.
3 Select an option:
• If you previously defined an area boundary containing user data you want to transfer, select the name of
the area and select Select Area.
• If you want to define a new area containing user data to transfer, select New Area, and follow the
on-screen instructions to define the area.
4 Select Save Area to Card.
5 If necessary, select the memory card to copy the data to.
6 Select an option:
• To create a new file, select Add New File, and enter a name.
• To add the information to an existing file, select the file from the list, and select Save to Card.

Sharing and Managing User Data 217

Updating Built-In Maps with a Memory Card and Garmin Express
You can update the built-in maps using the Garmin Express computer application and a memory card.
1 Insert a memory card into the computer's card slot (Memory Cards, page 12).
2 Open the Garmin Express application.
If you do not have the Garmin Express application installed on your computer, you can download it from
garmin.com/express.
3 If necessary, register your device (Registering Your Device Using the Garmin Express App, page 220).
4 Click Vessel > View Details.
5 Click Download next to the map to update.
6 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the download.
7 Wait while the update downloads.
The update may take an extended period of time.
8 After the download is complete, eject the card from the computer.
9 Insert the memory card into the card slot (Memory Cards, page 12).
10 On the chartplotter, select > System > System Information > Update Built-In Map.
The updated chart appears on your chartplotter.

Backing Up Data to a Computer

1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 Select Where To > Manage User Data > Data Transfer > Save to Card.
3 Select a file name from the list, or select Add New File.
4 Select Save to Card.
5 Remove the memory card, and insert it into a card reader attached to a computer.
6 Open the Garmin\UserData folder on the memory card.
7 Copy the backup file on the card and paste it to any location on the computer.

Restoring Backup Data to a Chartplotter

1 Insert a memory card into a card reader that is attached to the computer.
2 Copy a backup file from the computer to the memory card, into a folder named Garmin\UserData.
3 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
4 Select Where To > Manage User Data > Data Transfer > Replace from Card.

Saving System Information to a Memory Card

You can save system information to a memory card as a troubleshooting tool. A product support representative
may ask you to use this information to retrieve data about the network.
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 Select > System > System Information > Garmin Devices > Save to Card.
3 If necessary, select the memory card to save system information to.
4 Remove the memory card.

218 Sharing and Managing User Data

 Appendix
ActiveCaptain and Garmin Express
The ActiveCaptain and Garmin Express apps help you manage your Garmin chartplotter and other devices.
ActiveCaptain: The ActiveCaptain mobile app provides an easy-to-use connection between your compatible
mobile device and your compatible Garmin chartplotter, charts, and the Garmin Quickdraw Contours
Community (ActiveCaptain App, page 27). The app allows you to monitor and track your boat with the
OnDeck™ system. The app provides unlimited access to your cartography and a quick, mobile way to
download new charts using the OneChart™ feature, provides a link to receive notifications on your chartplotter,
and provides access to the ActiveCaptain Community for feedback on marinas and other boating points of
interest. You can also use the app to plan your trip and sync user data. The app checks your devices for
available updates, and notifies you when an update is available. You can even control the chartplotter using
the Garmin Helm feature.
Garmin Express: The Garmin Express desktop app allows you to use your computer and a memory card to
download and update Garmin chartplotter software and charts (Garmin Express App, page 219). You should
use the Garmin Express app for faster data transfer of larger downloads and updates, and to avoid possible
data charges with some mobile devices.

ActiveCaptain Garmin Express

Function
mobile app desktop app

Register your new Garmin Marine device Yes Yes

Update your Garmin chartplotter software Yes Yes

Update your Garmin charts Yes Yes

Download new Garmin charts Yes Yes

Access the Garmin Quickdraw Contours Community to download

Yes No
and share contours with other users

Monitor and track your boat with the OnDeck system Yes No

Sync a mobile device with your Garmin chartplotter Yes No

Access the ActiveCaptain Community for feedback on marinas and

Yes No
boating points of interest

Receive smart notification on the chartplotter Yes No

Control the chartplotter with Garmin Helm Yes No

Garmin Express App

The Garmin Express desktop app allows you to use your computer and a memory card to download and update
Garmin device software and charts and register your devices. We recommend it for larger downloads and
updates for faster data transfer and to avoid possible data charges with some mobile devices.

Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer

You can install the Garmin Express app on a Windows or Mac computer.
® ®

1 Go to garmin.com/express.
2 Select Download for Windows or Download for Mac.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Appendix 219
Registering Your Device Using the Garmin Express App
NOTE: You should use the ActiveCaptain app and a mobile device to register the device (Getting Started with the
ActiveCaptain App, page 29).
Help us better support you by completing our online registration today. Keep the original sales receipt, or a
photocopy, in a safe place.
1 Install the Garmin Express app on your computer (Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer,
page 219).
2 Insert a memory card into the chartplotter card slot (Memory Cards, page 12).
3 Wait a few moments.
The chartplotter opens the card management page and creates a file named GarminDevice.xml in the
Garmin folder on the memory card.
4 Remove the memory card from your device.
5 Open the Garmin Express app on your computer.
6 Insert the memory card into your computer.
7 If necessary, select Get Started.
8 If necessary, while the application searches, select Sign In next to Have marine charts or devices? near the
bottom of the screen.
9 Create or sign in to your Garmin account.
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your vessel.
11 Select > Add.
The Garmin Express application searches the memory card for the device information.
12 Select Add Device to register the device.
When registration is complete, the Garmin Express application searches for additional charts and chart
updates for your device.
When you add devices to the chartplotter network, repeat these steps to register the new devices using the
Garmin Express app.

220 Appendix
Updating Your Charts Using the Garmin Express App
The internal card readers on GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotters support up to 32 GB memory cards,
formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher8. Use of an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10
is recommended. As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotters
support up to 1 TB memory cards, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.
Downloading the chart update may take up to a few hours.
You should use a blank memory card for chart updates. The update process erases the content on the card and
reformats the card.
1 Install the Garmin Express app on your computer (Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer,
page 219).
2 Open the Garmin Express app on your computer.
3 Select your vessel and device.
4 If chart updates are available, select Chart Updates > Continue.
5 Read and agree to the terms.
6 Insert your chartplotter chart memory card into the computer.
7 Select the drive for the memory card.
8 Review the reformat warning, and select OK.
9 Wait while the chart update is copied to the memory card.
NOTE: Copying the update file onto the card may take from a few minutes up to a few hours.
10 Close the Garmin Express app.
11 Eject the memory card from the computer.
12 Turn on the chartplotter.
13 After the home screen appears, insert the memory card into the card slot.
NOTE: In order for the update instructions to appear, the device must be fully booted before the card is
inserted.
14 Select Update Software > Yes.
15 Wait several minutes while the update process completes.
16 When prompted, leave the memory card in place, and restart the chartplotter.
17 Remove the memory card.
NOTE: If the memory card is removed before the device restarts fully, the update is not complete.

8 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to 1 TB,
formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

Appendix 221
Software Updates
You may need to update the software when you install a new device or add an accessory.
You can use the ActiveCaptain mobile app to update the device software (Updating Software with the
ActiveCaptain App, page 31).
You can also use the Garmin Express desktop app to update your chartplotter software (Loading the New
Software on a Memory Card Using Garmin Express, page 222).
The internal card readers on GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotters support up to 32 GB memory cards,
formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher8. Use of an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10
is recommended. As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotters
support up to 1 TB memory cards, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.
The Garmin memory card reader accessory is sold separately.
Before you update the software, you should check the software version installed on your device (Viewing System
Software Information, page 204). Then, you can go to garmin.com/support/software/marine.html, select See
All Devices in this Bundle, and compare the installed software version to the software version listed for your
product.
If the software version installed on your device is older than the version listed on the website, you should update
the software using the ActiveCaptain mobile app (Updating Software with the ActiveCaptain App, page 31) or the
Garmin Express desktop app (Loading the New Software on a Memory Card Using Garmin Express, page 222).
Loading the New Software on a Memory Card Using Garmin Express
You can copy the software update to a memory card using a computer with the Garmin Express app.
The internal card readers on GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotters support up to 32 GB memory cards,
formatted to FAT32 with speed class 4 or higher8. Use of an 8 GB or larger memory card with speed class 10
is recommended. As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series chartplotters
support up to 1 TB memory cards, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.
Downloading the software update may take from a few minutes up to a few hours.
You should use a blank memory card for software updates. The update process erases the content on the card
and reformats the card.
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot on the computer.
2 Install the Garmin Express app (Installing the Garmin Express App on a Computer, page 219).
3 Select your vessel and device.
4 Select Software Updates > Continue.
5 Read and agree to the terms.
6 Select the drive for the memory card.
7 Review the reformat warning, and select Continue.
8 Wait while the software update is copied to the memory card.
NOTE: Copying the update file onto the card may take from a few minutes up to a few hours.
9 Close the Garmin Express app.
10 Eject the memory card from the computer.
After loading the update onto the memory card, install the software on the chartplotter (Updating the Device
Software Using a Memory Card, page 223).

8 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to 1 TB,
formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

222 Appendix
Updating the Device Software Using a Memory Card
To update the software using a memory card, you must obtain a software-update memory card or load the
latest software onto a memory card using the Garmin Express app (Loading the New Software on a Memory
Card Using Garmin Express, page 222).
1 Turn on the chartplotter.
2 After the home screen appears, insert the memory card into the card slot.
NOTE: In order for the software update instructions to appear, the device must be fully booted before the
card is inserted.
3 Select Install Now > Update Software > Yes.
4 Wait several minutes while the software update process completes.
5 When prompted, leave the memory card in place, and restart the chartplotter.
6 Remove the memory card.
NOTE: If the memory card is removed before the device restarts fully, the software update is not complete.

NMEA 0183 with Audio Cable Pinout

The NMEA 0183 with audio cable (010-12852-00 or 010-12390-21) includes bare wires and an RCA connector
for an audio out connection to a stereo, including Fusion stereos. You can purchase this cable from garmin.com
or your local Garmin dealer.
After installing the cable, you can connect the RCA connectors to the AUX input of the stereo. The HDMI input is
then output to the stereo.
The cable also provides NMEA 0183 inputs and outputs.
GPSMAP 8000 Series Chartplotters

Model Accessory Part Number NMEA 0183 Inputs and Outputs

10 inch through 16 inch 010-12852-00 One input and output port

17 inch through 24 inch 010-12390-21 Four input ports and two output ports

8700 black box 010-12390-21 (included) Four input ports and two output ports

GPSMAP 9000 Series Chartplotters

Model Accessory Part Number NMEA 0183 Inputs and Outputs

19 inch through 27 inch 010-12852-00 One input and output port

Appendix 223
Touchscreen Controls for a Connected Computer (MFD models)
NOTICE
To prevent corrosion due to moisture, you must use Garmin GPSMAP accessory cables when connecting the
chartplotter to the computer. Using different cables voids your warranty.
You can connect the chartplotter to a computer to see the computer screen on the chartplotter touchscreen and
control the computer using the chartplotter touchscreen. To see the computer screen, you must connect the
computer to the HDMI IN port. To control the computer, you must connect the computer to the USB port.
The Garmin HDMI accessory cable (010-12390-20) is 4.5 m (15 ft) long. If you need a longer cable, you should
use an active HDMI cable only. You need an HDMI coupler to connect the two HDMI cables.
For an 8000 series chartplotter, the recommended USB cable (010-12390-10) has a micro-USB end that
connects to the chartplotter USB ports. For a 9000 series chartplotter, the recommended cable (010-12390-14)
has a USB C end that connects to the chartplotter USB ports. Both of these cables are 4.5 m (15 ft) long. If you
need a longer cable, you should use a USB hub or USB repeater extension cable only.
NOTICE
To avoid potential communication errors, you should use the correct USB cable for your chartplotter. You should
not use an adapter to change the USB connector type on either of these cables.
You must make all cable connections in a dry environment.

Devices
Item Device

Computer

GPSMAP chartplotter

224 Appendix
Connections
From To Cable

Garmin HDMI Cable (010-12390-20)

Computer's HDMI OUT port Chartplotter's HDMI IN port

8000 Series Chartplotters: Garmin USB Cable

(010-12390-10)
Chartplotter's USBport Computer's USB port 9000 Series Chartplotters: Garmin USB-C to USB-A
Cable (010-12390-14)

Touchscreen Controls for a Connected Computer (8700 and 9500 Models)

NOTICE
To prevent corrosion due to moisture, you must use Garmin GPSMAP accessory cables when connecting the
chartplotter to the computer. Using different cables voids your warranty.
You can connect the chartplotter to a computer to see the computer screen and to control the computer using
a touchscreen. To see the computer screen, you must connect the computer to the HDMI IN port and connect
the touchscreen to the HDMI OUT port. To control the computer using the chartplotter touchscreen, you must
connect the computer to the USB OTG or USB DRD port and connect the touchscreen to the USB HOST or USB
port.
The HDMI Cable (010-12390-20) is 4.5 m (15 ft) long. If you need a longer cable, you should use an active HDMI
cable only. You need an HDMI coupler to connect the two HDMI cables.
For an 8000 series chartplotter, the recommended USB cable (010-12390-10) has a micro-USB end that
connects to the chartplotter USB ports. For a 9000 series chartplotter, the recommended cable (010-12390-14)
has a USB-C end that connects to the chartplotter USB ports. Both of these cables are 4.5 m (15 ft) long. If you
need a longer cable, you should use a USB hub or USB repeater extension cable only.
NOTICE
To avoid potential communication errors, you should use the correct USB cable for your chartplotter. You should
not use an adapter to change the USB connector type on either of these cables.
You must make all cable connections in a dry environment.

Appendix 225
Devices
Item Device

Computer

GPSMAP chartplotter

Touchscreen monitor

Connections
From To Cable

Garmin HDMI Cable (010-12390-20)

Computer's HDMI OUT port Chartplotter's HDMI IN port

Garmin HDMI Cable (010-12390-20)

Chartplotter's HDMI OUT port Monitor's HDMI IN port

8000 Series Chartplotters: Garmin USB Cable

(010-12390-10)
Chartplotter's USB HOST or 9000 Series Chartplotters: Garmin USB-C to USB-
Monitor's USB port
USB port A Cable (010-12390-12)

8000 Series Chartplotters: Garmin USB Cable

(010-12390-10)
Chartplotter's USB OTG or 9000 Series Chartplotters: Garmin USB-C to USB-
Computer's USB port
USB DRD port A Cable (010-12390-14)

Controlling a Computer with the Chartplotter

Before you can control a computer using the chartplotter, you must connect the chartplotter and computer
correctly. See the chartplotter installation instructions for connection information.
1 Select Vessel > Video.
2 Select the HDMI source for the computer.
3 Select Options > USB Touch Out.
You can now control your computer using two-finger touch gestures on the chartplotter screen.
4 If necessary, select Options > Full Screen to view the computer screen in full screen mode.
TIP: To exit full screen mode, press .

Cleaning the Screen

NOTICE
Cleaners containing ammonia will harm the anti-reflective coating.
The device is coated with a special anti-reflective coating which is very sensitive to waxes and abrasive
cleaners.
1 Apply an eyeglass lens cleaner specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings to the cloth.
2 Gently wipe the screen with a soft, clean, lint-free cloth.

226 Appendix
Viewing Images on a Memory card
You can view images that are saved on a memory card. You can view .jpg, .png, and .bmp files.
1 Insert a memory card with image files into the card slot.
2 Select > Image Viewer.
3 Select the folder containing the images.
4 Wait a few seconds for the thumbnail images to load.
5 Select an image.
6 Use the arrows to scroll through the images.
7 If necessary, select Options > Start Slideshow.

Screenshots
You can capture a screenshot of any screen shown on your chartplotter as a .png file. You can transfer the
screenshot to your computer. You can also view the screenshot in the image viewer (Viewing Images on a
Memory card, page 227).

Capturing Screenshots
1 Insert a memory card into the card slot.
2 Go to a screen you want to capture.
3 Hold or for at least six seconds.
A message appears to confirm the screenshot was captured, including the name of the file written to the
memory card.

Copying Screenshots to a Computer

1 Remove the memory card from the chartplotter, and insert it into a card reader that is attached to a
computer.
2 From Windows Explorer, open the Garmin\scrn folder on the memory card.
3 Copy the image file from the card and paste it to any location on the computer.

Troubleshooting
My device will not acquire GPS signals
If the device is not acquiring satellite signals, there could be a few causes. If the device has moved a large
distance since the last time it has acquired satellites or has been turned off for longer than a few weeks or
months, the device may not be able to acquire the satellites correctly.
• Ensure the device is using the latest software. If not, update the device software (Software Updates,
page 222).
• If the device is using an internal GPS antenna, make sure the device has a clear view of the sky so the internal
antenna can receive the GPS signal. If it is mounted inside of a cabin, it should be close to a window so it can
receive the GPS signal. If the device is mounted inside a cabin and cannot be placed in a location where the
device can acquire satellites, use an external GPS antenna.
• If the device is using an external GPS antenna, make sure the antenna is connected to the chartplotter or the
NMEA network. If necessary, see the GPS antenna installation instructions for connection information and
diagrams.
• If the device is using an external GPS antenna connected using the NMEA 2000 network, select >
Communications > NMEA 2000 Setup > Device List. Make sure the antenna appears on this list. If it does
not, verify the antenna installation and the NMEA 2000 network installation.
• If the device has more than one GPS antenna source, select a different source (Selecting the GPS Source,
page 14).

Appendix 227
My device will not turn on or keeps turning off
Devices erratically turning off or not turning on could indicate an issue with the power supplied to the device.
Check these items to attempt to troubleshoot the cause of the power issue.
• Make sure the power source is generating power.
You can check this several ways. For example, you can check whether other devices powered by the source
are functioning.
• Check the fuse in the power cable.
The fuse should be located in a holder that is part of the red wire of the power cable. Check that the proper
size fuse is installed. Refer to the label on the cable or the installation instructions for the exact fuse size
needed. Check the fuse to make sure there is still a connection inside of the fuse. You can test the fuse using
a multimeter. If the fuse is good, the multimeter reads 0 ohm.
• Check to make sure the device is receiving at least 12 Vdc.
To check the voltage, measure the female power and ground sockets of the power cable for DC voltage. If the
voltage is less than 12 Vdc, the device will not turn on.
• If the device is receiving enough power but does not turn on, contact Garmin product support.

My device is not creating waypoints in the correct location

You can manually enter a waypoint location to transfer and share data from one device to the next. If you have
manually entered a waypoint using coordinates, and the location of the point does not appear where the point
should be, the map datum and position format of the device may not match the map datum and position format
originally used to mark the waypoint.
Position format is the way in which the GPS receiver's position appears on the screen. This is commonly
displayed as latitude/longitude in degrees and minutes, with options for degrees, minutes and second, degrees
only, or one of several grid formats.
Map datum is a math model which depicts a part of the surface of the earth. Latitude and longitude lines on a
paper map are referenced to a specific map datum.
1 Find out which map datum and position format was used when the original waypoint was created.
If the original waypoint was taken from a map, there should be a legend on the map that lists the map datum
and position format used to create that map. Most often this is found near the map key.
2 Select > Preferences > Units.
3 Select the correct map datum and position format settings.
4 Create the waypoint again.

Contacting Garmin Support

• Go to support.garmin.com for help and information, such as product manuals, frequently asked questions,
videos, and customer support.
• In the USA, call 913-397-8200 or 1-800-800-1020.
• In the UK, call 0808 238 0000.
• In Europe, call +44 (0) 870 850 1241.

228 Appendix
Specifications
GPSMAP 8x10 Specifications
Dimensions (W × H × D) 259.9 × 205.1 × 75.1.mm (101/4× 81/16 × 215/16 in.)

Dimensions on bail mount (W × H × D) 259.9 × 221.6 × 103.5.mm (111/16× 83/4 × 41/16 in.)

218.4 × 136.9 mm (85/8 × 53/8 in.)

Display size (W × H)
10 in. diagonal

Display resolution WUXGA, 1920 × 1200 pixels

Weight 2.4 kg (5.2 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 45 cm (17.7 in.)

Clearance behind flush-mounted device 11.1 cm (43/8 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX79

Fuse 10 A, 125 V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32 Vdc

Max. power usage at 10 Vdc 40.1 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 1.5 A

Max. current draw at 12 Vdc 6.0 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100 (250 waypoints each)

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 microSD memory card slots, 32 GB max card size10.

Wi‑Fi and ANT technologies

®

Wireless frequency and protocols

2.4 GHz @ 12.3 dBm nominal

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm™ integration

9 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.
10 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to
1 TB, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

Appendix 229
GPSMAP 8x12 Specifications
Dimensions (W × H × D) 302.8 × 216.4 × 76.5 mm (1115/16 × 81/2 × 45/8 in.)

Dimensions on bail mount (W × H × D) 323.9 × 216.4 × 104.5 mm (123/4 × 93/16× 41/8 in.)

257.3 × 145.2 mm (101/8 × 511/16 in.)

Display size (W × H)
11.6 in. diagonal

Display resolution FHD, 1920 × 1080 pixels

Weight 2.7 kg (6.0 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 35 cm (13.8 in.)

Clearance behind flush-mounted device 11.1 cm (43/8 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7 11

Fuse 10 A, 125 V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32 Vdc

Max. power usage at 10 Vdc 45 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 1.3 A

Max. current draw at 12 Vdc 6.0 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100 (250 waypoints each)

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 microSD memory card slots, 32 GB max card size12.

Wi‑Fi and ANT technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 12.3 dBm nominal

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

11 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.
12 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to
1 TB, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

230 Appendix
GPSMAP 8x16 Specifications
Dimensions (W × H × D) 384.7 × 262.6 × 76 mm (151/8 × 105/16 × 3 in.)

Dimensions on bail mount (W × H × D) 405.6 × 279.1 × 103 mm (1515/16 × 11 × 41/16 in.)

345.2 × 194.6 mm (139/16711/16 in.)

Display size (W × H)
15.6 in. diagonal

Display resolution FHD, 1920 × 1080 pixels

Weight 4.4 kg (9.6 lb.)

Clearance behind flush-mounted device 11.1 cm (43/8 in.)

Compass-safe distance 105 cm (41.3 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX713

Fuse 10 A, 125 V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32 Vdc

Max. power usage at 10 Vdc 52.1 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 1.3 A

Max. current draw at 12 Vdc 6.0 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100 (250 waypoints each)

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 microSD memory card slots, 32 GB max card size14.

Wi‑Fi and ANT technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 12.3 dBm nominal

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

13 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.
14 As of software version 34.00, you can connect an external USB card reader to a GPSMAP 8400 and 8600 series chartplotter and use a memory card up to
1 TB, formatted to exFAT with speed class 10 or higher.

Appendix 231
GPSMAP 8x17 Specifications
Specification Measurement

Dimensions (W × H × D) 41.9 × 30.7 × 7.1 cm (16.5 × 12.1 × 2.8 in.)

Display size (W × H) 36.6 × 23.1 cm (14.4 × 9.1 in.)

Display resolution WUXGA, 1920 × 1200 pixels

Weight 5.2 kg (11.48 lb.)

Device: 53.34 cm (21 in.)

Compass-safe distance Device and sun cover: 99.06 cm (39 in.)
Sun cover: 48.26 cm (19 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7 15

Fuse 15 A

Input voltage From 10 to 35 Vdc

Max. power usage 40 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 2.8 A

Typical current draw at 24 Vdc 1.4 A

Max. current draw 3.5 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wi‑Fi, ANT, and Bluetooth technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 17.21 dBm max.

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

15 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

232 Appendix
GPSMAP 8x22 Specifications
Specification Measurement

Dimensions (W × H × D) 52.8 × 35.1 × 7.1 cm (20.8 × 13.8 × 2.8 in.)

Display size (W × H) 47.8 × 27.0 cm (18.8 × 10.6 in.)

Display resolution FHD, 1920 × 1080 pixels

Weight 7.1 kg (15.63 lb.)

Device: 68.58 cm (27 in.)

Compass-safe distance Device and sun cover: 111.76 cm (44 in.)
Sun cover: 43.18 cm (17 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7 16

Fuse 15 A

Input voltage From 10 to 35 Vdc

Max. power usage 59 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 3.9 A

Typical current draw at 24 Vdc 1.8 A

Max. current draw 4.9 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wi‑Fi, ANT, and Bluetooth technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 17.21 dBm max.

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

16 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Appendix 233
GPSMAP 8x24 Specifications
Specification Measurement

Dimensions (W × H × D) 60.0 × 41.0 × 7.1 cm (22.8 × 16.1 × 2.8 in.)

Display size (W × H) 51.8 × 32.5 cm (20.4 × 12.8 in.)

Display resolution WUXGA, 1920 × 1200 pixels

Weight 8.6 kg (18.95 lb.)

Device: 73.66 cm (29 in.)

Compass-safe distance Device and sun cover: 124.46 cm (49 in.)
Sun cover: 43.18 cm (17 in.)

Temperature range From -10° to 55°C (from 14° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7 17

Fuse 15 A

Input voltage From 10 to 35 Vdc

Max. power usage 87 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 6.1 A

Typical current draw at 24 Vdc 2.8 A

Max. current draw 7.6 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Wi‑Fi, ANT, and Bluetooth technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 17.21 dBm max.

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

17 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

234 Appendix
GPSMAP 9x19 Specifications
Specification Measurement

Dimensions (W × H × D) 45.7 × 30.5 × 69 cm (18 × 12 × 2.7 in.)

Display size (W × H × diagonal) 40.9 × 23 × 46.9 cm (16.1 × 9.1 × 18.5 in.)

Display resolution 4KUHD, 3840 × 2160 pixels

Weight 6.42 kg (14.16 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 46 cm (18 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

IEC 60529 IPX7

Water rating The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to
30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Fuse 15 A

Input voltage From 10 to 35 Vdc

Max. power usage 60 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 4.6 A

Typical current draw at 24 Vdc 2.3 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 microSD memory card slots, 1 TB max. card size18

Wi‑Fi, ANT, and Bluetooth technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 17.21 dBm max.

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

18 As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series devices are compatible with up to 1 TB memory cards formatted to exFAT.

Appendix 235
GPSMAP 9x22 Specifications
Specification Measurement

Dimensions (W × H × D) 52.9 × 34.6 × 6.9 cm (20.8 × 13.6 × 2.7 in.)

Display size (W × H × diagonal) 47.5 × 26.7 × 54.5 cm (18.7 × 10.5 × 21.5 in.)

Display resolution 4KUHD, 3840 × 2160 pixels

Weight 7.96 kg (17.55 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 84 cm (33 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

IEC 60529 IPX7

Water rating The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to
30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Fuse 15 A

Input voltage From 10 to 35 Vdc

Max. power usage 68 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 5.2 A

Typical current draw at 24 Vdc 2.5 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 microSD memory card slots, 1 TB max. card size19

Wi‑Fi, ANT, and Bluetooth technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 17.21 dBm max.

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

19 As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series devices are compatible with up to 1 TB memory cards formatted to exFAT.

236 Appendix
GPSMAP 9x24 Specifications
Specification Measurement

Dimensions (W × H × D) 57.6 × 37.6 × 6.9 cm (22.7 × 14.8 × 2.7 in.)

Display size (W × H × diagonal) 52.7 × 29.6 × 60.5 cm (20.7 × 11.7 × 23.8 in.)

Display resolution 4KUHD, 3840 × 2160 pixels

Weight 9.34 kg (20.60 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 99 cm (39 in.)

Temperature range From -10° to 55°C (from 14° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

IEC 60529 IPX7

Water rating The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to
30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Fuse 15 A

Input voltage From 10 to 35 Vdc

Max. power usage 82 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 6.5 A

Typical current draw at 24 Vdc 3.2 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 microSD memory card slots, 1 TB max. card size20

Wi‑Fi, ANT, and Bluetooth technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 17.21 dBm max.

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

20 As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series devices are compatible with up to 1 TB memory cards formatted to exFAT.

Appendix 237
GPSMAP 9x27 Specifications
Specification Measurement

Dimensions (W × H × D) 65.5 × 42.3 × 8.5 cm (25.8 × 16.7 × 3.3 in.)

Display size (W × H × diagonal) 59.7 × 33.6 × 68.5 cm (23.5 × 13.2 × 27.0 in.)

Display resolution 4KUHD, 3840 × 2160 pixels

Weight 12.54 kg (27.65 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 81 cm (32 in.)

Temperature range From -10° to 55°C (from 14° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

IEC 60529 IPX7

Water rating The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to
30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Fuse 15 A

Input voltage From 10 to 35 Vdc

Max. power usage 97 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 7.2 A

Typical current draw at 24 Vdc 3.3 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 Draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

Memory card 2 microSD memory card slots, 1 TB max. card size21

Wi‑Fi, ANT, and Bluetooth technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 17.21 dBm max.

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

21 As of software version 34.00, the internal card readers on GPSMAP 9000 series devices are compatible with up to 1 TB memory cards formatted to exFAT.

238 Appendix
GPSMAP 8700 Specifications
Dimensions (W × H × D) 38.3 × 19.8 × 4.7 cm (151/8× 713/16× 17/8 in.)

Clearance on front of device 8.6 cm (33/8 in.)

Weight 1.39 kg (3.06 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 2.54 cm (1 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7 22

Fuse 10 A, 42 V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32 Vdc

Max. power usage at 10 Vdc 40.1 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 1.5 A

Max. current draw at 12 Vdc 6.0 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100 (250 waypoints each)

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

Memory card External card reader required (not included)

Wi‑Fi and ANT technologies

Wireless frequency and protocols
2.4 GHz @ 14.15 dBm maximum

22 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Appendix 239
GPSMAP 9500 Specifications
Dimensions (W × H × D) 38.3 × 19.8 × 5.3 cm (151/8× 713/16× 23/32 in.)

Clearance on front of device 8.6 cm (33/8 in.)

Weight 1.58 kg (3.49 lb.)

Compass-safe distance 2.54 cm (1 in.)

Temperature range From -15° to 55°C (from 5° to 131°F)

Material Polycarbonate plastic and die-cast aluminum

Water rating IEC 60529 IPX7 22

Fuse 4 A, 42 V fast-acting

Input voltage From 10 to 32 Vdc

Max. power usage at 10 Vdc 25 W

Typical current draw at 12 Vdc 19.1 W

Max. current draw at 12 Vdc 2.08 A

NMEA 2000 LEN @ 9 Vdc 2

NMEA 2000 draw 75 mA max.

Max. waypoints 5,000

Max. routes 100 (250 waypoints each)

Max. active track points 50,000 points, 50 saved tracks

HTML integration Compatible with OneHelm integration

Memory card External card reader required (not included)

Wireless frequency 2.4 GHz @ 16.6 dBm maximum

Sonar Models Specifications

Specification Measurement

Traditional: 50/200, 77/200, 83/200 kHz

Single Channel CHIRP: from 40 to 250 kHz
Sonar frequencies23 Garmin ClearVü CHIRP: 260/455/800 kHz
Ultra High-Definition Garmin ClearVü: 800 kHz, CHIRP range: 760 to 880 kHz
Ultra High-Definition SideVü: 1,200 kHz, CHIRP range: 1,060 to 1,170 kHz

CHIRP: 1000 W
Sonar transmit power (RMS)24
Garmin ClearVü and SideVü CHIRP: 500 W

Sonar depth25 5,000 ft. at 1 kW

22 The device withstands incidental exposure to water of up to 1 m for up to 30 min. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.
23 Dependent upon the transducer.
24 Dependent upon the transducer rating and depth.
25 Dependent upon the transducer, water salinity, bottom type, and other water conditions.

240 Appendix
Recommended Startup Image Dimensions
For the best fit for the startup images, use an image that has the following dimensions, in pixels.

Model Display resolution Image width Image height

GPSMAP 8x12, 8x16, and 8x22 FHD 1240 450

GPSMAP 8x10, 8x17, and 8x24 WUXGA 1700 650

GPSMAP 9000 4KUHD 2480 900

Appendix 241
NMEA 2000 PGN Information
Transmit and Receive
PGN Description

059392 ISO acknowledgment

059904 ISO request

060160 ISO transport protocol: Data transfer

060416 ISO transport protocol: Connection management

060928 ISO address claimed

126208 Request group function

126993 Heartbeat

126996 Product information

126998 Configuration information

127237 Heading/track control

127245 Rudder

127250 Vessel heading

127258 Magnetic variance

127488 Engine parameters: Rapid update

127489 Engine parameters: Dynamic

127490 Electric drive status: Dynamic

127491 Electric energy storage status: Dynamic

127493 Transmission parameters: Dynamic

127494 Electric drive information

127495 Electric energy storage information

127505 Fluid level

127508 Battery status

128002 Electric drive status: Rapid update

128003 Electric energy storage status: Rapid update

128259 Speed: Water referenced

128267 Water depth

129025 Position: Rapid update

129026 COG and SOG: Rapid update

129029 GNSS position data

129283 Cross track error

129284 Navigation data

242 Appendix
PGN Description

129285 Navigation - route/waypoint information

129539 GNSS DOPs

129540 GNSS satellites in view

130060 Label

130306 Wind data

130310 Environmental parameters (obsolete)

130312 Temperature (obsolete)

Transmit
PGN Description

126464 Transmit and receive PGN list group function

126984 Alert response

127258 Magnetic variation

127497 Trip parameters: Engine

127502 Switch bank control (DEPRECATED)

Receive
PGN Description

065030 Generator average basic AC quantities (GAAC)

065240 Commanded address

126983 Alert

126985 Alert text

126987 Alert threshold

126988 Alert value

126992 System time

127233 Man overboard

127237 Heading/track control

127245 Rudder

127251 Rate of turn

127252 Heave

127257 Attitude

127498 Engine parameters: Static

127501 Switch bank status

127503 AC input status (obsolete)

Appendix 243
PGN Description

127504 AC output status (obsolete)

127506 DC detailed status

127507 Charger status

127509 Inverter status

128000 Nautical leeway angle

128275 Distance log

128780 Linear actuator

129038 AIS class A position report

129039 AIS class B position report

129040 AIS class B extended position report

129041 AIS Aids to Navigation (AtoN) report

129044 Datum

129285 Navigation: Route, waypoint information

129794 AIS class A static and voyage related data

129798 AIS SAR aircraft position report

129799 Radio frequency/mode/power

129802 AIS safety-related broadcast message

129808 DSC call Information

129809 AIS class B "CS" static data report, part A

129810 AIS class B "CS" static data report, part B

130067 Route and waypoint service: Route, waypoint name and position

130311 Environmental parameters (obsolete)

130313 Humidity

130314 Actual pressure

130316 Temperature: Extended range

130569 Entertainment: Current file and status

130570 Entertainment: Library data file

130571 Entertainment: Library data group

130573 Entertainment: Supported source data

130574 Entertainment: Supported zone data

130576 Trim tab status

130577 Direction data

244 Appendix
J1939 Information
The chartplotter can receive J1939 sentences. The chartplotter cannot transmit over the J1939 network.

Description PGN SPN

Engine percent load at current speed 61443 92

Engine speed 61444 190

Engine manifold exhaust gas temperature - right manifold 65031 2433

Engine manifold exhaust gas temperature - left manifold 65031 2434

Engine auxiliary coolant 65172

Active diagnostic trouble codes 65226

Vehicle distance 65248

Water in fuel indicator 65279

Engine wait to start lamp 65252 1081

Engine over speed test 65252 2812

Engine air shutoff command status 65252 2813

Engine alarm output command status 65252 2814

Engine total hours of operation 65253 247

Navigation-based vehicle speed 65256 517

Engine fuel temperature 1 65262 174

Engine oil temperature 1 65262 175

Engine fuel delivery pressure 65263 94

Engine oil pressure 65263 100

Engine coolant pressure 65263 109

Engine coolant temperature 65263 110

Engine coolant level 65263 111

Engine fuel rate 65266 183

Engine average fuel economy 65266 185

Engine intake manifold #1 pressure 65270 102

Battery potential / power input 1 65271 168

Transmission oil temperature 65272 177

Transmission oil pressure 65272 127

Fuel level 65276 96

Engine oil filter differential pressure 65276 969

Appendix 245
NMEA 0183 Information
Transmit
Sentence Description

GPAPB APB: Heading or track controller (autopilot) sentence "B"

GPBOD BOD: Bearing (origin to destination)

GPBWC BWC: Bearing and distance to waypoint

GPGGA GGA: Global positioning system fix data

GPGLL GLL: Geographic position (latitude and longitude)

GPGSA GSA: GNSS DOP and active satellites

GPGSV GSV: GNSS satellites in view

GPRMB RMB: Recommended minimum navigation information

GPRMC RMC: Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

GPRTE RTE: Routes

GPVTG VTG: Course over ground and ground speed

GPWPL WPL: Waypoint location

GPXTE XTE: Cross track error

PGRME E: Estimated error

PGRMM M: Map datum

PGRMZ Z: Altitude

SDDBT DBT: Depth below transducer

SDDPT DPT: Depth

SDMTW MTW: Water temperature

SDVHW VHW: Water speed and heading

TLB Target label

TLL Target latitude and longitude

TTD Tracked target data

ZDA Time and date

246 Appendix
Receive
Sentence Description

DPT Depth

DBT Depth below transducer

MTW Water temperature

VHW Water speed and heading

WPL Waypoint location

DSC Digital selective calling information

DSE Expanded digital selective calling

HDG Heading, deviation, and variation

HDM Heading, magnetic

MWD Wind direction and speed

MDA Meteorological composite

MWV Wind speed and angle

RTE Routes

VDM AIS VHF data-link message

You can purchase complete information about National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) format and
sentences from www.nmea.org.

Appendix 247
 support.garmin.com

GUID-25CCEC48-337E-47C0-8B89-5C35CCDB65AC
September 2024 v29